UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 10-K
[ X ] Annual Report Pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 1998
or
[ ] Transition Report Pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934
Commission file number 1-7784
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
Louisiana 72-0651161
(State or other jurisdiction of (IRS Employer
incorporation or organization) Identification No.)
100 Century Park Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203
(Address of principal executive offices) (Zip Code)
Registrant's telephone number, including area code - (318) 388-9000
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Title of each class Name of each exchange on which registered
------------------- -----------------------------------------
Common Stock, par value $1.00 New York Stock Exchange
Berlin Stock Exchange
Preference Share Purchase Rights New York Stock Exchange
Berlin Stock Exchange
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None
Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant (1) has filed all reports required
to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during
the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the Registrant was
required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing
requirements for the past 90 days. Yes [X] No [ ]
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405
of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the
best of Registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements
incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this
Form 10-K. [ ]
As of February 28, 1999, the aggregate market value of voting stock held by
non-affiliates (affiliates being for these purposes only directors, executive
officers and holders of more than five percent of the Company's outstanding
voting securities) was $3.7 billion. As of February 28, 1999, there were
92,357,172 shares of common stock outstanding.
DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE:
Portions of the Registrant's Proxy Statement prepared in connection with the
1999 annual meeting of shareholders are incorporated in Part III of this Report.
PART I
Item 1. Business
General. Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. ("Century"), which operates
under the tradename of CenturyTel, is a regional diversified communications
company engaged primarily in providing local exchange telephone services and
cellular telephone services. For the year ended December 31, 1998, local
exchange telephone operations and cellular operations provided 69% and 26%,
respectively, of the consolidated revenues of Century and its subsidiaries (the
"Company"). All of the Company's telephone and cellular operations are conducted
within the continental United States and Alaska.
At December 31, 1998, the Company's local exchange telephone subsidiaries
operated over 1.3 million telephone access lines, primarily in rural, suburban
and small urban areas in 21 states, with the largest customer bases located in
Wisconsin, Washington, Alaska, Michigan, Louisiana, Colorado, Ohio, Oregon and
Montana. According to published sources, the Company is the ninth largest local
exchange telephone company in the United States based on the number of access
lines served. For more information, see "Telephone Operations."
At December 31, 1998, the Company's majority-owned and operated cellular
systems served approximately 624,000 customers in 21 Metropolitan Statistical
Areas ("MSAs") in Michigan, Louisiana, Arkansas, Mississippi, Wisconsin and
Texas, and 23 Rural Service Areas ("RSAs"), most of which are in Michigan,
Mississippi, Wisconsin, Louisiana and Arkansas. The Company's ownership interest
in these operated markets represented approximately 8.1 million pops (the
estimated population of licensed cellular telephone markets multiplied by the
Company's proportionate equity interest in the licensed operators thereof). At
December 31, 1998, the Company also owned minority equity interests in 10 MSAs
and 17 RSAs, representing approximately 1.9 million pops. Of the Company's 10.1
million aggregate pops, approximately 67% are attributable to the Company's MSA
interests, with the balance attributable to its RSA interests. All of the
cellular systems operated by the Company are operated under wireline licenses,
except for five MSAs and four RSAs which are operated under non-wireline
licenses. According to data derived from published sources, the Company is the
tenth largest cellular telephone company in the United States based on the
Company's 10.1 million pops. For more information , see "Cellular Operations."
The Company also provides long distance, call center, security monitoring,
cable television and interactive services in certain local and regional markets,
as well as certain printing and related services. For more information, see
"Other Operations."
Recent acquisitions and dispositions. On December 1, 1998, the Company
acquired the assets of certain of Ameritech's telephone operations and related
telephone directories in 19 telephone exchanges covering 21 communities in
northern and central Wisconsin for approximately $221 million cash. The
operations acquired by the Company include the telephone property and equipment
that serves nearly 69,000 customers, or approximately 86,000 access lines, as
well as the nine related telephone directories.
On December 1, 1997, the Company acquired Pacific Telecom, Inc. ("PTI") in
exchange for $1.503 billion cash. As a result of the PTI acquisition, the
Company acquired (i) over 660,000 telephone access lines in four midwestern
states, seven western states and Alaska, (ii) over 88,000 cellular customers in
ten markets located in two midwestern states and Alaska and (iii) various
wireless, cable television and other communications assets. In May 1998, the
Company sold PTI's undersea cable operations for approximately $61.8 million
cash.
During late 1997 and early 1998, the Company acquired two security alarm
businesses that provide services to approximately 6,000 customers in north
central Louisiana, southern Arkansas and northwestern Mississippi.
In December 1997 the Company acquired an additional 76% interest in
Wisconsin RSA 8, which is adjacent to the Company's existing cellular operations
in southwestern Wisconsin.
During 1997 the Company exchanged its 89% interest in its competitive access
subsidiary for approximately 4.3 million shares of publicly traded common stock.
Approximately 3.8 million shares of such stock were sold in November 1997 for
$203 million and the remaining shares were converted into approximately 1.0
million shares of MCIWorldCom, Inc. ("WorldCom") in early 1998. In the second
quarter of 1998, the Company sold 750,000 shares of WorldCom common stock for
$35.6 million. In January 1999, the Company sold its remaining shares of
WorldCom stock for $20.1 million.
In January 1997 the Company acquired Pecoco, Inc., a provider of local
exchange telephone service in four counties in Wisconsin. As a result of the
acquisition, the Company acquired (i) more than 7,600 telephone access lines,
(ii) a minority interest in two cellular partnerships serving Madison and
Milwaukee, Wisconsin, representing approximately 35,000 pops and (iii) certain
cable television assets.
In August 1998 the Company entered into a definitive agreement to sell the
stock of the entities conducting the Company's Alaska operations to ALEC
Acquisition Corporation for $415 million cash, subject to various adjustments.
Proceeds from this transaction will be used to reduce debt. The Alaska
transaction is anticipated to close in the second quarter of 1999, subject to
regulatory approvals and various closing conditions. The transaction is also
subject to the buyer's receipt of financing pursuant to its existing debt and
equity financing commitments.
In January 1999 the Company signed definitive asset purchase agreements to
sell all of the operations of the Brownsville and McAllen, Texas, cellular
markets to Western Wireless Corporation for $95 million cash, subject to various
adjustments. The Company, which is the majority owner in these markets, will
receive a proportionate share of the sale proceeds of approximately $39 million
after-tax. The transaction is expected to close in the second quarter of 1999,
subject to regulatory approvals, the satisfactory completion of buyer's due
diligence and various other closing conditions.
Over the past several years, the Company has expanded its operations through
an ongoing program of acquisitions. Substantial acquisitions during the last
five years also include the 1994 acquisition of Celutel, Inc. (over 1.1 million
pops). The Company continually evaluates the possibility of acquiring additional
telecommunications assets in exchange for cash, securities or both, and at any
given time may be engaged in discussions or negotiations regarding additional
acquisitions. Over the past few years, the number and size of communications
properties on the market has increased substantially. Recently, two large
communications companies announced their intent to sell up to 1.6 million
primarily rural access lines. Although the Company's primary focus will continue
to be on acquiring telephone and wireless interests that are proximate to its
properties or that serve a customer base large enough for the Company to operate
efficiently, other communications interests may also be acquired.
Other. As of December 31, 1998, the Company had approximately 5,800
employees, approximately 1,000 of whom were members of seven different
bargaining units represented by the International Brotherhood of Electrical
Workers, Communications Workers of America, or the NTS Employee Committee.
Relations with employees continue to be generally good.
In mid-1998, the Company adopted the tradename "CenturyTel" as part of its
branding strategy to operate under a single name. The Company currently markets
its telephone, cellular, long distance, Internet access and most of its other
services under the CenturyTel tradename. Century proposes to formally change its
corporate name to CenturyTel, Inc. at its 1999 annual shareholders meeting
scheduled for May 6, 1999.
Century was incorporated under Louisiana law in 1968 to serve as a holding
company for several telephone companies acquired over the previous 15 to 20
years. Century's principal executive offices are located at 100 Century Park
Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203 and its telephone number is (318) 388-9000.
TELEPHONE OPERATIONS
According to published sources, the Company is the ninth largest local
exchange telephone company in the United States, based on the more than 1.3
million access lines it served at December 31, 1998. All of the Company's access
lines are digitally switched. Through its operating telephone subsidiaries, the
Company provides services to predominately rural, suburban and small urban
markets in 21 states. The table below sets forth certain information with
respect to the Company's access lines as of December 31, 1998 and 1997.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 December 31, 1997
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of Percent of Number of Percent of
State access lines access lines access lines access lines
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Wisconsin 340,895 25% 245,091 20%
Washington 175,508 13 166,611 14
Alaska 131,858 10 124,869 10
Michigan 108,769 8 104,440 9
Louisiana 97,676 7 94,432 8
Colorado 86,249 7 81,206 7
Ohio 80,400 6 77,987 7
Oregon 75,392 6 71,544 6
Montana 60,657 5 57,390 5
Texas 44,822 3 41,852 4
Arkansas 43,778 3 42,193 4
Minnesota 29,708 2 29,029 2
Tennessee 25,609 2 24,578 2
Mississippi 19,648 2 17,839 2
Idaho 5,881 1 5,746 -
New Mexico 5,770 - 5,559 -
Indiana 5,136 - 4,975 -
Wyoming 4,663 - 4,447 -
Iowa 1,938 - 1,801 -
Arizona 1,780 - 1,624 -
Nevada 430 - 437 -
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,346,567 100% 1,203,650 100%
========================================================================
</TABLE>
As indicated in the following table, the Company has experienced growth in
its telephone operations over the past several years, a substantial portion of
which was attributable to the acquisition of PTI and other telephone properties
and to the expansion of services:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended or as of December 31,
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Access lines 1,346,567 1,203,650 503,562 480,757 454,963
% Residential 74% 74 77 78 79
% Business 26% 26 23 22 21
Operating revenues $1,091,610 530,597 451,538 419,242 391,265
Capital expenditures $ 233,190 115,854 110,147 136,006 152,336
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
Future growth in telephone operations is expected to be derived from (i)
acquiring additional telephone properties, (ii) providing service to new
customers, (iii) increasing network usage and (iv) providing additional services
made possible by advances in technology and changes in regulation. For
information on developing competitive trends, see "-Regulation and Competition."
Services
The Company's local exchange telephone subsidiaries derive revenue from
providing (i) local telephone services, (ii) network access services and (iii)
other related services. The following table reflects the percentage of telephone
operating revenues derived from these respective services:
1998 1997 1996
- ----------------------------------------------------------------
Local service 30.4% 27.8 26.9
Network access 57.7 60.2 61.2
Other 11.9 12.0 11.9
- ----------------------------------------------------------------
100.0% 100.0 100.0
================================================================
Local service revenues are derived from the provision of local exchange
telephone services in the Company's service areas. Internal access line growth
during 1998, 1997 and 1996 was 4.7%, 4.4% and 4.3%, respectively. The Company
believes that access line growth in the future should benefit from population
growth in its service areas, acquisitions and increases in the number of
households maintaining more than one access line. The Company markets local
Internet access in 396 communities in 12 states, which the Company believes has
led to an increase in orders for second lines.
Network access revenues primarily relate to services provided by the Company
to long distance carriers and other customers in connection with the use of the
Company's facilities to originate and terminate interstate and intrastate long
distance telephone calls. Access charges to long distance carriers and other
customers are based on tariffed access rates filed with the Federal
Communications Commission ("FCC") for interstate services and with the
respective state regulatory agency for intrastate services. Certain of the
Company's interstate network access revenues are based on access charges filed
directly with the FCC; the remainder of such revenues are derived under revenue
sharing arrangements with other LECs administered by the National Exchange
Carrier Association ("NECA").
Certain of the Company's intrastate network access revenues are derived
through access charges billed by the Company to intrastate long distance
carriers and other LEC customers. Such intrastate network access charges are
based on access tariffs, which are subject to state regulatory commission
approval. Additionally, certain of the Company's intrastate network access
revenues, along with intrastate long distance revenues, are derived through
revenue sharing arrangements with other LECs.
The installation of digital switches and related software has been an
important component of the Company's growth strategy because it allows the
Company to offer enhanced services (such as call forwarding, conference calling,
caller identification, selective call ringing and call waiting) and to thereby
increase utilization of existing access lines. In 1998 the Company continued to
expand its list of premium services (such as voice mail and Internet access)
offered in certain service areas and aggressively marketed these services.
The Company is installing fiber optic cable in certain of its high traffic
routes and provides alternative routing of telephone service over fiber optic
cable networks in several strategic operating areas. At December 31, 1998, the
Company's telephone subsidiaries had over 8,350 miles of fiber optic cable in
use.
Other revenues include revenues related to (i) leasing, selling, installing,
maintaining and repairing customer premise telecommunications equipment and
wiring, (ii) providing billing and collection services for long distance
companies, (iii) participating in the publication of local directories and (iv)
providing Internet access. At the end of 1998, the Company offered Internet
access in telephone markets representing 60% of its access lines. Certain large
communications companies for which the Company currently provides billing and
collection services continue to indicate their desire to reduce their billing
and collection expenses, which may result in future reductions of the Company's
billing and collection revenues.
For further information on the regulation of the Company's revenues,see
"-Regulation and Competition."
Federal Financing Programs
Certain of the Company's telephone subsidiaries receive long-term financing
from the Rural Utilities Service ("RUS") and the Rural Telephone Bank ("RTB").
The RUS has made long-term loans to telephone companies since 1949 for the
purpose of improving telephone service in rural areas. The RUS continues to make
new loans at interest rates that range from 5% to 7% based on borrower
qualifications and the cost of funds to the United States government. The RTB,
established in 1971, makes long-term loans at interest rates based on its
average cost of funds as determined by statutory formula (such rates ranged from
5.71% to 5.96% for the fiscal year ended September 30, 1998), and in some cases
makes loans concurrently with RUS loans. Most of the Company's telephone plant
is pledged or mortgaged to secure obligations of the Company's telephone
subsidiaries to the RUS and RTB. The Company's telephone subsidiaries which have
borrowed from government agencies generally may not loan or advance any funds to
Century, but may pay dividends if certain financial covenants are met.
For additional information regarding the Company's financing, see the
Company's consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 herein.
Regulation and Competition
Traditionally, LECs have operated as regulated monopolies. Consequently, the
majority of the Company's telephone operations have traditionally been regulated
extensively by various state regulatory agencies (generally called public
service commissions or public utility commissions) and by the FCC. As discussed
in greater detail below, passage of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 (the
"1996 Act"), coupled with state legislative and regulatory initiatives and
technological changes, has fundamentally altered the telephone industry by
reducing the regulation of LECs and permitting competition in each segment of
the telephone industry. Although Century anticipates that these trends towards
reduced regulation and increased competition will continue, it is difficult to
determine the form or degree of future regulation and competition in the
Company's service areas.
State regulation. The local service rates and intrastate access charges of
substantially all of the Company's telephone subsidiaries are regulated by state
regulatory commissions. Most of such commissions have traditionally regulated
pricing through "rate of return" regulation that focuses on authorized levels of
earnings by LECs. Most of these commissions also (i) regulate the purchase and
sale of LECs, (ii) prescribe depreciation rates and certain accounting
procedures and (iii) regulate various other matters, including certain service
standards and operating procedures.
In recent years, state legislatures and regulatory commissions having
jurisdiction over the Company's telephone subsidiaries in most of the states in
which the Company has substantial operations have either begun to reduce the
regulation of LECs or have announced their intention to do so, and it is
expected that this trend will continue. Wisconsin, Louisiana and several other
of these states have passed legislation which permit LECs to opt out of rate of
return regulation in exchange for agreeing to alternative forms of regulation
which typically permit the LEC greater freedom to establish service rates in
exchange for agreeing not to charge rates in excess of specified caps. The
Company continues to explore its options in these states. The Company believes
that reduced regulatory oversight of certain of the Company's telephone
operations may allow the Company to offer new and competitive services faster
than under the traditional regulatory process. Coincident with these efforts,
legislative, regulatory and technological changes have introduced competition
into the local exchange industry. See "-Developments Affecting Competition."
Substantially all of the state regulatory commissions have statutory
authority, the specific limits of which vary, to initiate and conduct earnings
reviews of the LECs that they regulate. As part of the movement towards
deregulation, several states are moving away from traditional rate of return
regulation towards price cap regulation and incentive regulation (which are
similar to the FCC regulations discussed below), and are actively encouraging
larger LECs to adopt these newer forms of price regulation. The continuation of
this trend may lead to fewer earnings reviews in the future. Currently, however,
most of the Company's LECs continue to be regulated under rate of return
regulation.
During 1995 the Louisiana Public Service Commission ("LPSC") adopted a new
regulatory plan for independent telephone companies in Louisiana that
incrementally reduced the Company's access revenues between 1996 and 1998. In
1997 the LPSC adopted a Consumer Price Protection Plan (the "Louisiana Plan"),
effective July 1997, which impacts all of the Company's LECs operating in
Louisiana. The new form of regulation will focus on price and quality of
service. Under the Louisiana Plan, the Company's Louisiana LECs' local rates
were frozen for a period of three years and access rates were frozen for a
period of two years. Although the Louisiana Plan has no specified term, the LPSC
is required to review it by mid-2000. The Company's Louisiana LECs have the
option to propose a new plan at any time if the LPSC determines that (i)
effective competition exists or (ii) unforeseen events threaten the subsidiary's
ability to provide adequate service or impair its financial health.
The Company's telephone operations in Wisconsin that were acquired in the
December 1997 acquisition of PTI have been regulated under an alternative
regulation plan (the "Wisconsin Plan") since June 1996. The Wisconsin Plan has a
five-year term and includes a provision that allows the Company's subsidiary
covered by such plan to freely adjust rates within specified parameters if
certain quality-of-service and infrastructure-development commitments are met.
The Wisconsin Plan also includes initiatives designed to promote competition. In
early 1999, another of the Company's Wisconsin LECs filed a request with the
Wisconsin Public Service Commission to be regulated under an alternative
regulation plan.
The Michigan Public Service Commission regulates the Company's Michigan
telephone subsidiaries pursuant to the parameters established by the Michigan
Telecommunications Act of 1995 ("MTA"). The MTA restructured regulation to focus
on price and quality of service as opposed to traditional rate of return
regulation. The MTA relies more on existing federal and state law regarding
antitrust consumer protection and fair trade to provide safeguards for
competition and consumers.
FCC regulation. The FCC regulates the interstate services provided by the
Company's telephone subsidiaries primarily by regulating the interstate access
charges that are billed to long distance companies and other LEC customers by
the Company for use of its local network in connection with the origination and
termination of interstate telephone calls. Additionally, the FCC has prescribed
certain rules and regulations for telephone companies, including regulations
regarding the use of radio frequencies; a uniform system of accounts; and rules
regarding the separation of costs between jurisdictions and, ultimately, between
interstate services.
Effective January 1, 1991, the FCC adopted price-cap regulation relating to
interstate access rates for the Regional Bell Operating Companies ("RBOCs") and
GTE Corporation. All other LECs may elect to be subject to price-cap regulation.
Under price-cap regulation, limits imposed on a company's interstate rates are
adjusted periodically to reflect inflation, productivity improvement and changes
in certain non-controllable costs. In May 1993 the FCC adopted an optional
incentive regulatory plan for LECs not subject to price-cap regulation. A LEC
electing the optional incentive regulatory plan would, among other things, file
tariffs based primarily on historical costs and not be allowed to participate in
the relevant NECA pooling arrangements. The Company has not elected price-cap
regulation or the optional incentive regulatory plan, but will continue to
evaluate its options on a periodic basis. Either election, if made by the
Company, would have to be applicable to all of the Company's telephone
subsidiaries. The authorized interstate access rate of return for the Company's
telephone subsidiaries is currently 11.25%, which is the authorized rate
established by the FCC for LECs not governed by price-cap regulation or the
optional incentive regulatory plan.
In September 1998, the FCC initiated a proceeding to represcribe the
authorized rate of return for interstate access services provided by LECs. The
FCC periodically represcribes this rate of return to ensure that the service
rates filed by incumbent LECs subject to rate of return regulation continue to
be just and reasonable. It is uncertain whether or by how much the FCC may lower
the authorized rate of return.
In an access charge reform order adopted in May 1997, the FCC changed its
system of interstate access charges to make them compatible with the
deregulatory framework established by the 1996 Act. Such changes are primarily
applicable to price-cap companies. The Company's telephone subsidiaries
determine interstate revenues under rate of return regulation and are,
therefore, only minimally impacted by the access charge reform order. In July
1998, the FCC issued a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking to amend the access charge
rules for rate of return companies in a manner similar to that adopted for price
cap companies, subject to reviewing whether differences exist between price cap
companies and rate of return companies that would require different rules in
order to achieve the goal of fostering an efficient, competitive marketplace.
Comments were filed with the FCC in August 1998; the FCC has not yet issued a
final ruling on this matter.
In 1998 the FCC created a federal-state joint board to review jurisdictional
separations procedures through which the costs of regulated telecommunications
services are allocated to the interstate and intrastate jurisdictions.
High-cost support funds, revenue sharing arrangements and related matters. A
significant number of the Company's telephone subsidiaries recover a portion of
their costs under federal and state cost recovery mechanisms that traditionally
have allowed LECs serving small communities and rural areas to provide
communications services reasonably comparable to those available in urban areas
and at reasonably comparable prices.
The 1996 Act authorized the establishment of new federal and state universal
service funds to provide continued support to eligible telecommunications
carriers. In May 1997 the FCC adopted an order on universal service, as mandated
by the 1996 Act. In the order, the FCC ruled that rural telephone companies
which are designated eligible telecommunications carriers will continue to
receive universal service funding. Each of the Company's LECs has been so
designated by its respective state regulatory agency. As a result, the Company's
LECs will continue to receive payments under the federal support mechanisms
currently in effect until the FCC adopts funding support mechanisms based on
forward-looking economic costs, which it is required to do, but no earlier than
January 2001. Although the Company anticipates that it may experience a
reduction in its federal support revenues at some point in the future,
management believes it is premature to assess or estimate the ultimate impact
thereof. There can be no assurance, however, that such impact will not be
material. During 1998 and 1997 the Company's telephone subsidiaries received
$127.6 million and $65.4 million, respectively, from the federal Universal
Service Fund.
As part of its universal service order, the FCC also established a new
program to provide up to $2.25 billion of discounted telecommunications services
annually to schools and libraries, commencing January 1998. In addition, the FCC
established a $400 million annual fund to provide discounted telecommunications
services for rural health care providers. All communications carriers providing
interstate telecommunications services, including the Company's LECs and its
cellular and long distance operations, are required to contribute to these
programs. The FCC has stated that local exchange telephone companies will
recover their funding contributions in their rates for interstate services. The
Company's contribution by its cellular and long distance operations for 1998,
which was passed on to its customers, was approximately $3.1 million.
Some of the Company's telephone subsidiaries operate in states where
traditional cost recovery mechanisms, including rate structures, are under
evaluation or have been modified. See "-State Regulation." There can be no
assurance that these states will continue to provide for cost recovery at
current levels.
Substantially all of the Company's LECs concur with the common line tariffs
and certain of the Company's LECs concur with the traffic sensitive tariffs
filed by the NECA; such LECs participate in the access revenue sharing
arrangements administered by the NECA for interstate services. All of the
intrastate network access revenues of the Company's LECs are based on access
charges, cost separation studies or special settlement arrangements.
See "-Services."
Certain long distance carriers continue to request that certain of the
Company's LECs reduce intrastate access tariffed rates. There is no assurance
that these requests will not result in decreased access revenues.
Developments affecting competition. The communications industry is currently
undergoing fundamental changes which may have a significant impact on the future
operations and financial performance of all communications companies. Primarily
as a result of legislative and regulatory initiatives and technological changes,
competition has been introduced and encouraged in each sector of the telephone
industry, including, most recently, the local exchange sector. As a result, the
number of companies offering competitive services has increased substantially.
As indicated above, in February 1996 Congress enacted the 1996 Act, which
obligates LECs to permit competitors to interconnect their facilities to the
LEC's network and to take various other steps that are designed to promote
competition. The 1996 Act imposes several duties on a LEC if it receives a
specific request from another entity which seeks to connect with or provide
services using the LEC's network. In addition, each incumbent LEC is obligated
to (i) negotiate interconnection agreements in good faith, (ii) provide
"unbundled" access to all aspects of the LEC's network, (iii) offer resale of
its telecommunications services at wholesale rates and (iv) permit competitors
to collocate its physical plant on the LEC's property, or provide virtual
collocation if physical collocation is not practicable. Although the 1996 Act
provides certain exemptions for rural LECs such as those operated by the
Company, the FCC's August 1996 order implementing most of the 1996 Act's
interconnection provisions placed the burden of proving the continuing
availability of these exemptions on rural LECs. States are permitted to adopt
laws or regulations that provide for greater competition than is mandated under
the 1996 Act. Although substantial portions of the FCC's August 1996
interconnection order have survived judicial challenge, the FCC has neither
completed its interconnection rulemaking nor issued rules on universal service
or access reform. Management believes that competition in its telephone service
areas will ultimately increase as a result of the 1996 Act, although the form
and degree of competition cannot be ascertained until such time as the FCC (and,
in certain instances, state regulatory commissions) adopts final and
nonappealable implementing regulations.
Substantially all of the 21 states in which the Company provides telephone
services have taken legislative or regulatory steps to further introduce
competition into the LEC business. Largely as a result of these steps and the
1996 Act, several competitive access providers originally organized to provide
redundancy or access services have begun, during the past several years, to
provide competitive local exchange services, principally in urban areas.
Moreover, several well-capitalized long distance, cable television, wireless and
electric utility companies, along with several start-up companies, have also
begun to provide competitive local exchange services or announced their
intention to do so, and this trend is expected to continue. Currently the
Company is subject to a limited number of agreements permitting competitors in
Wisconsin to purchase from the Company unbundled network elements or wholesale
services, and the Company is aware of only a few other companies that have
requested authorization to provide local exchange service in the Company's
service areas. Over time, however, the Company anticipates that several more
companies will request authorization to provide competitive services, especially
in its operating areas located near larger urban areas.
In addition to receiving services directly from companies competing with
incumbent LECs, long distance companies and other users of toll service are
expected to increasingly seek other means to bypass LECs' switching services and
local distribution facilities. Certain interexchange carriers provide services
which allow users to divert their traffic from LECs' usage-sensitive services to
their flat-rate services. In addition, users or long distance companies may
construct, modify or lease facilities to transmit traffic directly from a user
to a long distance company. Cable television companies, in particular, may be
able to modify their networks to partially or completely bypass the Company's
local network. Moreover, users may choose to use wireless services to bypass
LECs' switching services. Although certain of the Company's telephone
subsidiaries have experienced a loss of traffic to such bypass, the Company
believes that the impact of such loss on revenues has not been significant.
Historically, cellular telephone services have complemented traditional LEC
services. However, the Company anticipates that existing and emerging wireless
technologies will increasingly compete with LEC services. Technological and
regulatory developments in cellular telephone, personal communications services,
digital microwave, coaxial cable, fiber optics, local-multipoint-distribution
services and other wired and wireless technologies are expected to further
permit the development of alternatives to traditional landline services. For
further information on certain of these developments, see "Wireless Operations -
Regulation and Competition."
To the extent that the telephone industry increasingly experiences
competition, the size and resources of each respective competitor may
increasingly influence its prospects. Many companies currently providing or
planning to provide competitive communication services have substantially
greater financial and marketing resources than the Company, and several are not
subject to the same regulatory constraints as the Company.
The Company anticipates that the traditional operations of LECs will be
increasingly impacted by continued technological developments as well as
legislative and regulatory initiatives affecting the ability of LECs to provide
new services and the capability of long distance companies, competitive local
exchange providers, wireless companies, cable television companies and others to
provide competitive LEC services. Competition relating to services traditionally
provided solely by LECs is expected to initially affect large urban areas to a
greater extent than rural, suburban and small urban areas such as those in which
the Company operates. The Company intends to actively monitor these
developments, to observe the effect of emerging competitive trends in initial
competitive markets and to continue to evaluate new business opportunities that
may arise out of future technological, legislative and regulatory developments.
The Company anticipates that regulatory changes and competitive pressures
may result in future revenue reductions in its telephone operations. However,
the Company anticipates that such reductions may be minimized by increases in
revenues attributable to the continued demand for enhanced services and new
product offerings. While the Company expects its telephone revenues to continue
to grow, its internal telephone revenue growth rate may slow during upcoming
periods.
CELLULAR OPERATIONS
At December 31, 1998, the Company's cellular holdings represented
approximately 10.1 million pops, of which 67% were applicable to MSAs and 33%
were RSA pops. According to data derived from published sources, the Company is
the tenth largest cellular telephone company in the United States based on the
Company's 10.1 million pops.
Cellular Industry
The cellular telephone industry has been in existence for approximately 15
years in the United States. The industry has grown significantly during this
period and cellular service is now available in substantially all areas of the
United States. According to the Cellular Telecommunications Industry
Association, at September 1998 there were estimated to be over 51 million
cellular customers across the United States.
Until recently, substantially all radio transmissions of cellular systems
were conducted on an analog basis. Technological developments involving the
application of digital radio technology offer certain advantages over analog
technologies, including expanding the capacity of mobile communications systems,
improving voice clarity, permitting the introduction of new services, and making
such systems more secure. Providers of certain services competitive with
cellular have incorporated digital technology into their operations. In recent
years most major cellular carriers have installed digital cellular voice
transmission facilities in certain of their systems, principally in larger
markets. Digital service is now available in 95% of the Company's MSA markets
and the Company plans to expand the marketing of such service during 1999. See
"-Regulation and Competition-Developments Affecting Wireless Competition."
Construction and Maintenance
The construction and maintenance of cellular systems is capital intensive.
Although all of the Company's MSA and RSA systems have been operational for
several years, the Company has continued to add cell sites to increase coverage,
provide additional capacity, and improve the quality of these systems. In 1998
the Company completed construction of 57 cell sites in markets operated by the
Company. At December 31, 1998, the Company operated 615 cell sites in its
majority-owned markets.
During the last few years the Company upgraded certain portions of its
cellular systems to be capable of providing digital service. Such service became
operational in certain markets during 1996 and 1997 using the TDMA digital
standard and the Company continued to install digital voice transmission
facilities in other markets in 1998. See "-Regulation and
Competition-Developments Affecting Wireless Competition." Capital expenditures
related to majority-owned and operated cellular systems totaled approximately
$49.5 million in 1998. Such capital expenditures for 1999 are anticipated to be
approximately $70 million.
Strategy
The Company's business development strategy for its cellular telephone
operations is to secure operating control of service areas that are
geographically clustered. Clustered cellular systems aid the Company's marketing
efforts and provide various operating and service advantages. Approximately 43%
of the Company's pops in markets operated by the Company are in a single,
contiguous cluster of eight MSAs and nine RSAs in Michigan; another 17% are in a
cluster of five MSAs and seven RSAs in northern and central Louisiana, southern
Arkansas and eastern Texas. See "-The Company's Cellular Interests."
Another component of the Company's strategy for cellular operations includes
capturing revenues from roaming service. Roaming service revenues are derived
from calls made in one cellular service area by subscribers from other service
areas. Roaming service is made possible by technical standards requiring that
cellular telephones be functionally compatible with the cellular systems in all
United States market areas. In exchange for providing roaming service to
customers of other cellular carriers, the Company charges premium rates to most
of these other carriers, who then frequently pass on some or all of these
premium rates to their own customers. The Company's Michigan cellular properties
include a significant portion of the interstate highway corridor between Chicago
and Detroit. Its Louisiana properties include an east-west interstate highway
and a north-south interstate highway which intersect in its Louisiana cellular
service area. Its Mississippi properties include two east-west interstate
highways and two north-south interstate highways. See "-Services, Customers and
System Usage."
Marketing
The Company markets its cellular services through several distribution
channels, including its direct sales force, retail outlets owned by the Company
and independent agents. All sales employees and certain independent agents
solicit cellular customers exclusively for the Company. Company sales employees
are compensated by salary and commission and independent sales agents are paid
commissions. The Company advertises its services through various means,
including direct mail, billboard, magazine, radio, television and newspaper
advertisements.
The sales and marketing costs of obtaining new subscribers include
advertising and a direct expense applicable to most new subscribers, either in
the form of a commission payment to an agent or an incentive payment to a direct
sales employee. In addition, the Company discounts the cost of cellular
telephone equipment, and periodically runs promotions which waive certain fees
or provide some amount of free service to new subscribers. The average cost of
acquiring each new customer ($268 in 1998) remains one of the larger expenses in
conducting the Company's cellular operations. In recent years, the Company has
sought to lower this average cost by focusing more on its direct distribution
channels. The Company opened its first retail outlet in 1994, and currently
operates 59 such outlets. During 1998, approximately 58% of new cellular
customers were added through direct distribution channels, up from 37% during
1996.
Services, Customers and System Usage
There are a number of different types of cellular telephones, all of which
are currently compatible with cellular systems nationwide. The Company sells a
full range of vehicle-mounted, transportable, and hand-held portable cellular
telephones.
The Company charges its subscribers for access to its systems, for minutes
of use and for enhanced services, such as voice mail. A subscriber may purchase
certain of these services separately or may purchase rate plans which bundle
these services in different ways and are designed to fit different calling
patterns. While the Company historically has typically charged its customers
separately for custom-calling features, air time in excess of the packaged
amount, and toll calls, it currently offers plans which include features such as
unlimited toll calls and unlimited weekend calling in certain calling areas.
Custom-calling features provided by the Company include call-forwarding,
call-waiting, three-way calling and no-answer transfer. The Company offers voice
message service in many of its markets. In the Company's markets where digital
service is operational, customers can subscribe to caller ID and other digital
enhancements.
Cellular customers come from a wide range of occupations and typically
include a large proportion of individuals who work outside of their office. In
recent years, the individual consumer market has generated a majority of new
customer additions. The Company's average monthly cellular service revenue per
customer declined to $57 in 1998 from $61 in 1997 and $63 in 1996. Such average
revenue per customer may further decline (i) as market penetration increases and
additional lower usage customers are activated and (ii) as competitive pressures
from current and future wireless communications providers intensify. See
"-Regulation and Competition."
Most cellular systems allow a customer to place or receive a call in a
cellular service area away from the customer's home market area. The Company has
entered into "roaming agreements" with operators of other cellular systems
covering virtually all markets in the United States; such agreements offer the
Company's customers the opportunity to roam in these markets. Also, a customer
of a participating non-Company system traveling in a market operated by the
Company where this arrangement is in effect is able to automatically make calls
on the Company's system. The charge to a non-Company customer for this service
is typically at premium rates, and is billed by the Company to the customer's
service provider, which then bills the customer. In most instances, based on
competitive factors and financial considerations, the Company charges an amount
to its customers that is equal to or lower than the amount actually charged by
the cellular carrier providing the roaming service. The Company anticipates that
competitive factors and industry consolidation may place further pressure on
charging premium roaming rates. For additional information on roaming revenue,
see "-Strategy."
Roamer fraud, a cellular industry problem, occurs when cellular telephone
equipment is programmed to conceal the true identity and location of the user.
The Company and the industry have implemented extensive fraud control processes
in an attempt to minimize roamer fraud.
Churn rate (the average percentage of cellular customers that terminate
service each month) is an industry-wide concern. A significant portion of the
churn in the Company's markets is due to the Company disconnecting service to
cellular customers for nonpayment of their bills. In addition, the Company faces
substantial competition from the other wireless providers, including PCS
providers. The Company's average monthly churn rate in its majority-owned and
operated markets was 2.23% in 1998 and 2.31% in 1997. The Company is attempting
to lower its churn rate by increasing its proactive customer service efforts and
through the implementation of additional customer retention programs.
During recent years, the Company's cellular subsidiaries experienced strong
subscriber growth in the fourth quarter, primarily due to holiday season sales.
The following table summarizes, among other things, certain information
about the Company's customers and market penetration:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended or at December 31,
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Majority-owned and operated MSA and
RSA systems (Note 1):
Cellular systems operated 44 44 34
Cell sites 615 558 354
Population of systems operated(Note 2) 9,026,150 9,008,219 7,097,568
Customers (Note 3):
At beginning of period 569,983 368,233 290,075
Gross units added internally 214,596 193,623 165,377
Net effect of property
acquisitions/dispositions - 123,600 4,850
Disconnects 160,460 115,473 92,069
At end of period 624,119 569,983 368,233
Market penetration at end of
period (Note 4) 6.9% 6.3 5.2
Churn rate (Note 5) 2.23% 2.31 2.37
Average monthly cellular service
revenue per customer $ 57 61 63
Construction expenditures (in thousands) $ 49,538 39,102 83,679
All operated MSA and RSA systems (Note 6):
Cellular systems operated 51 50 38
Cell sites 729 656 413
Population of systems
operated (Note 2) 10,312,145 10,124,759 7,946,442
Customers at end of period (Note 7) 689,181 632,446 407,400
Market penetration at end
of period (Note 8) 6.7% 6.2 5.1
Churn rate (Note 5) 2.34% 2.33 2.32
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
Notes:
1. Represents the number of systems in which the Company owned at least a 50%
interest. The revenues and expenses of these cellular markets, all of which
are operated by the Company, are included in the Company's consolidated
operating revenues and operating expenses.
2. Based on independent third-party population estimates for each respective
year.
3. Represents the approximate number of revenue-generating cellular telephones
served by the cellular systems referred to in note 1.
4. Computed by dividing the number of customers at the end of the period by the
total population of systems referred to in note 1.
5. Represents the average percentage of customers that are disconnected on a
monthly basis.
6. Represents the total number of systems that the Company operated, including
systems in which it does not own a majority interest.
7. Represents the approximate number of revenue-generating cellular telephones
served by the cellular systems referred to in note 6.
8 Computed by dividing the number of customers at the end of the period by the
total population of systems referred to in note 6.
The Company's Cellular Interests
The Company obtained the right to provide cellular service through (i) the
FCC's licensing process described below, under which it received interests in
wireline licenses, and (ii) its acquisition program, under which it has acquired
interests in both wireline and non-wireline licenses. The table below sets forth
certain information with respect to the interests in cellular systems that the
Company owned as of December 31, 1998:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
The Other
1998 Company's cellular
population Ownership pops at operator
(Note 1) percentage 12/31/98 (Note 2)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Majority-owned and
operated MSAs
- -------------------
Pine Bluff, AR 81,588 100.00% 81,588 SBC
Texarkana, AR/TX 137,764 89.00 122,610 AT&T
Alexandria, LA 143,311 100.00 143,311 Centennial
Monroe, LA 147,570 87.00 128,386 AT&T
Shreveport, LA 379,370 87.00 330,052 AT&T
Battle Creek, MI 195,400 97.00 189,538 Centennial
Benton Harbor, MI 161,753 97.00 156,900 Centennial
Grand Rapids, MI 770,152 97.00 747,047 AirTouch
Jackson, MI 156,316 97.00 151,627 Centennial
Kalamazoo, MI 308,144 97.00 298,900 Centennial
Lansing-E. Lansing, MI 512,390 97.00 497,018 AirTouch
Muskegon, MI 191,712 97.00 185,961 AirTouch
Saginaw-Bay City-
Midland, MI 404,426 91.70 370,859 AirTouch
Biloxi-Gulfport, MS (Note 4) 232,431 96.45 224,182 Cellular South
Jackson, MS (Note 4) 426,583 89.58 382,130 MCTA
Pascagoula, MS (Note 4) 130,979 89.22 116,862 Cellular South
Brownsville-
Harlingen, TX (Note 4) 329,824 78.74 259,700 SBC
McAllen-Edinburg-
Mission, TX (Note 4) 525,734 69.50 365,372 SBC
Appleton-Oshkosh-
Neenah, WI 500,164 98.85 494,401 U.S. Cellular
Eau Claire, WI 143,664 55.50 79,734 American Cellular
LaCrosse, WI 102,768 95.00 97,630 U. S. Cellular
- -----------------------------------------------------------
5,982,043 5,423,808
- -----------------------------------------------------------
Minority-owned MSAs (Note 3)
- ---------------------------
Little Rock, AR 555,272 36.00% 199,898
Lafayette, LA 262,964 49.00 128,852
Detroit, MI 4,761,992 3.20 152,289
Flint, MI 511,788 3.20 16,367
Rochester, MN 113,844 2.93 3,336
Austin, TX 1,016,912 35.00 355,919
Dallas-Ft. Worth, TX 4,630,120 0.50 23,151
Sherman-Denison, TX 102,618 0.50 513
Madison, WI 702,398 9.78 68,688
Milwaukee, WI 1,972,973 17.96 354,405
- -----------------------------------------------------------
14,630,881 1,303,418
- -----------------------------------------------------------
Total MSAs 20,612,924 6,727,226
- -----------------------------------------------------------
Operated RSAs
- -------------
Alaska 1 (Note 4) 85,056 100.00% 85,056 Mactel
Alaska 3 74,712 100.00 74,712 Mercury
Arkansas 2 87,646 82.00 71,870 SBC
Arkansas 3 103,724 82.00 85,054 SBC
Arkansas 11 66,228 89.00 58,943 SBC
Arkansas 12 185,325 80.00 148,260 SBC
Louisiana 1 112,083 87.00 97,512 AT&T
Louisiana 2 115,624 87.00 100,593 AT&T
Louisiana 3 B2 96,231 87.00 83,721 Centennial
Louisiana 4 72,615 100.00 72,615 Centennial
Michigan 1 196,408 100.00 196,408 American Cellular
Michigan 2 113,772 100.00 113,772 RFB
Michigan 3 164,586 42.84 70,509 Unitel
Michigan 4 135,657 100.00 135,657 RFB
Michigan 5 161,584 42.84 69,223 Unitel
Michigan 6 142,356 98.00 139,509 Centennial
Michigan 7 244,148 56.07 136,895 Centennial
Michigan 8 101,746 97.00 98,694 Allegan Cellular
Michigan 9 301,227 43.38 130,672 Centennial
Mississippi 2 (Note 4) 249,231 100.00 249,231 Bell South
Mobility
Mississippi 5 159,176 - -
Mississippi 6 (Note 4) 183,177 100.00 183,177 Cellular South
Mississippi 7 (Note 4) 181,661 100.00 181,661 MCTA
Texas 7 B6 58,013 89.00 51,632 AT&T
Wisconsin 1 112,351 42.21 47,421 American Cellular
Wisconsin 2 86,024 99.00 85,164 American Cellular
Wisconsin 5 95,903 - - American Cellular
Wisconsin 6 116,145 57.14 66,369 U.S. Cellular
Wisconsin 7 291,168 22.70 66,100 U.S. Cellular
Wisconsin 8 236,525 84.00 198,681 U.S. Cellular
- -----------------------------------------------------------
4,330,102 3,099,111
- -----------------------------------------------------------
Non-operated RSAs (Note 3)
- --------------------------
Michigan 10 137,398 26.00 35,723
Minnesota 7 172,206 2.93 5,046
Minnesota 8 67,467 2.93 1,977
Minnesota 9 134,073 2.93 3,928
Minnesota 10 230,077 2.93 6,741
Minnesota 11 205,949 2.93 6,034
Texas 16 334,056 9.60 32,069
Washington 5 60,311 8.47 5,109
Washington 8 137,237 7.36 10,095
Wisconsin 3 142,332 42.86 61,000
Wisconsin 4 119,763 25.00 29,941
Wisconsin 10 129,404 22.50 29,116
- -----------------------------------------------------------
1,870,273 226,779
- -----------------------------------------------------------
Total RSAs 6,200,375 3,325,890
- -----------------------------------------------------------
26,813,299 10,053,116
- -----------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
Notes:
1. Based on 1998 independent third-party population estimates.
2. Information provided to the best of the Company's knowledge. There is also at
least one PCS competitor in each of the operated MSAs and certain of the
operated RSAs.
3. Markets not operated by the Company.
4. Represents a non-wireline interest.
For information on certain cellular properties that the Company has agreed to
sell, see "-Recent acquisitions and dispositions" above.
Operations
A substantial number of the cellular systems in MSAs operated by the Company
are owned by limited partnerships in which the Company is a general partner
("MSA Partnerships"). Most of these partnerships are governed by partnership
agreements with similar terms, including, among other things, customary
provisions concerning capital contributions, sharing of profits and losses, and
dissolution and termination of the partnership. Most of these partnership
agreements vest complete operational control of the partnership with the general
partner. The general partner typically has the power to manage, supervise and
conduct the affairs of the partnership, make all decisions appropriate in
connection with the business purposes of the partnership, and incur obligations
and execute agreements on behalf of the partnership. The general partner also
may make decisions regarding the time and amount of cash contributions and
distributions, and the nature, timing and extent of construction, without the
consent of the other partners. The Company owns more than 50% of all of the MSA
Partnerships.
A substantial number of the cellular systems in RSAs operated by the Company
are also owned by limited or general partnerships in which the Company is either
the general or managing partner (the "RSA Partnerships"). These partnerships are
governed by partnership agreements with varying terms and provisions. In many of
these partnerships, the noncontrolling partners have the right to vote on major
issues such as the annual budget and system design. In a few of these
partnerships, the Company's management position is for a limited term (similar
to a management contract) and the other partners in the partnership have the
right to change managers, with or without cause. The Company owns less than 50%
of some of the RSA Partnerships.
The partnership agreements for both the MSA Partnerships and RSA
Partnerships generally contain provisions granting all partners a right of first
refusal in the event a partner desires to transfer a partnership interest. This
restriction on transfer can under certain circumstances make these partnership
interests more difficult to sell to a third party.
Revenue
The following table reflects the major revenue categories for the Company's
wireless operations as a percentage of wireless operating revenues in 1998, 1997
and 1996.
1998 1997 1996
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cellular access fees and toll revenues 74.2% 78.2 79.7
Cellular roaming 23.6 20.0 18.6
Equipment sales 2.2 1.8 1.7
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
100.0% 100.0 100.0
============================================================================
For further information on these revenue categories, see
"-Services, Customers and System Usage."
Regulation and Competition
As discussed below, the FCC and various state public utility commissions
regulate, among other things, the licensing, construction, operation,
interconnection arrangements, sale and acquisition of cellular telephone
systems.
Competition between providers of wireless communications service in each
market is conducted principally on the basis of price, services and enhancements
offered, the technical quality and coverage of the system, and the quality and
responsiveness of customer service. As discussed below, competition has
intensified in recent years in a substantial number of the Company's markets.
Under applicable law, the Company is required to permit the reselling of its
services. In certain larger markets and in certain market segments, competition
from resellers may be significant. There is also substantial competition for
sales agents. Certain of the Company's competitors have substantially greater
assets and resources than the Company.
Cellular licensing process. The term "MSA" means a Metropolitan Statistical
Area for which the FCC has granted a cellular operating license. The term "RSA"
means a Rural Service Area for which the FCC has granted a cellular operating
license. During the 1980's and early 1990's, the FCC awarded two 10-year
licenses to provide cellular service in each MSA and RSA market. Initially, one
license was reserved for companies offering local telephone service in the
market (the wireline carrier) and one license was available for firms
unaffiliated with the local telephone company (the non-wireline carrier). Since
mid-1986, the FCC has permitted telephone companies or their affiliates to
acquire control of non-wireline licenses in markets in which they do not hold
interests in the wireline license. The FCC has issued a decision that grants a
renewal expectancy during the license renewal period to incumbent licensees that
substantially comply with the terms and conditions of their cellular
authorizations and the FCC's regulations. The licenses for the MSA markets
operated by the Company were initially granted between 1984 and 1987, and
licenses for operated RSAs were initially granted between 1989 and 1991. Thus
far, the Company has received 10-year extensions of all of its licenses that
have become subject to renewal since their original grant dates.
The completion of an acquisition involving the transfer of control of a
cellular system requires prior FCC approval and, in certain cases, receipt of
other federal and state regulatory approvals. The acquisition of a minority
interest generally does not require FCC approval. Whenever FCC approval is
required, any interested party may file a petition to dismiss or deny the
application for approval of the proposed transfer.
In addition to regulation by the FCC, cellular systems are subject to
certain Federal Aviation Administration tower height regulations concerning the
siting and construction of cellular transmitter towers and antennas.
Cellular operators are also subject to state and local regulation in some
instances. Although the FCC has pre-empted the states from exercising
jurisdiction in the areas of licensing, technical standards and market
structure, certain states require cellular operators to be certified. In
addition, some state authorities regulate certain aspects of a cellular
operator's business, including certain aspects of pricing, the resale of long
distance service to its customers, the technical arrangements and charges for
interconnection with the landline network, and the transfer of interests in
cellular systems. The siting and construction of the cellular facilities may
also be subject to state or local zoning, land use and other local regulations.
Developments affecting wireless competition. Competition in the wireless
communications industry has increased due to continued and rapid technological
advances in the communications field, coupled with legislative and regulatory
changes.
Several recent FCC initiatives over the past several years have resulted in
the allocation of additional radio spectrum or the issuance of licenses for
emerging mobile communications technologies that are competitive with the
Company's cellular and telephone operations, including personal communication
services ("PCS"). Although there is no universally recognized definition of PCS,
the term is generally used to refer to wireless services to be provided by
licensees operating in the 1850 MHz to 1990 MHz radio frequency band using
microcells and high-capacity digital technology. In 1996 and early 1997 the FCC
auctioned up to six PCS licenses per market. Two 30MHz frequency blocks were
awarded for each of the 51 Rand McNally Major Trading Areas ("MTAs"), while one
30MHz and three 10MHz frequency blocks were awarded for each of the 493 Rand
McNally Basic Trading Areas ("BTAs").
PCS technology permits PCS operators to offer wireless voice, data, image
and multimedia services. The largest PCS providers commenced initial operations
in late 1996 and since then have aggressively expanded their operations. These
providers have initially focused on larger markets, and have generally marketed
PCS as being a competitive service to cellular. Many of these companies have
aggressively competed for customers on the basis of price, which has placed
downward pressure on cellular prices. There is at least one PCS competitor in
each of the Company's operated MSAs and certain of its operated RSAs.
In addition to PCS, users and potential users of cellular systems may find
their communication needs satisfied by other current and developing
technologies. Several years ago the FCC authorized the licensees of certain
specialized mobile radio service ("SMR") systems (which historically have
generally been used by taxicabs and tow truck operators) to configure their
systems into digital networks that operate in a manner similar to cellular
systems. Such systems are commonly referred to as enhanced specialized mobile
radio service ("ESMR") systems. The Company believes that ESMR systems are
operating in a few of its cellular markets. One well-established ESMR provider
has constructed a nationwide digital mobile communications system to compete
with cellular systems. Other similar communication services that have the
technical capability to handle wireless telephone calls may provide competition
in certain markets, although these services currently lack the subscriber
capacity of cellular systems. Paging or beeper services that feature text
message and data display as well as tones may be adequate for potential
subscribers who do not need to converse directly with the caller. Mobile
satellite systems, in which transmissions are between mobile units and
satellites, may ultimately be successful in obtaining market share from cellular
systems that communicate directly to land-based stations.
In recent years, several large cellular providers have merged with other
companies or formed joint ventures. Several of these joint ventures pooled their
resources to develop extensive PCS systems. Many current or potential
competitors of the Company have substantially greater financial and marketing
resources than the Company.
Although it is uncertain how PCS, SMR, ESMR, mobile satellites and other
emerging technologies will ultimately affect the Company, the Company
anticipates that it will continue to face increased competition in its operating
markets. However, management believes that providing digital services and
applying new microcellular technologies will permit its cellular systems to
provide services comparable with the emerging technologies described above,
although no assurances can be given that this will happen or that future
technological advances or legislative or regulatory changes will not create
additional sources of competition.
OTHER OPERATIONS
The Company provides long distance, call center, security monitoring, cable
television and interactive services in certain local and regional markets, as
well as certain printing and related services. The results of these operations,
which accounted for 4.9% and 3.2%, respectively, of the Company's consolidated
revenues and operating income during 1998, are reflected for financial reporting
purposes in the "Other operations" section in operating income.
Long distance. In 1996 the Company began marketing long distance service in
all of its equal access telephone operating areas. At December 31, 1998, the
Company provided long distance services to approximately 227,000 customers.
Approximately 65% of the Company's long distance revenues are derived from
service provided to residential customers. Although the Company owns and
operates long distance switches in LaCrosse, Wisconsin and San Marcos, Texas, it
anticipates that most of its future long distance service revenues will be
provided by reselling service purchased from other facilities-based long
distance providers. The Company intends to continue to expand its long distance
business, principally through reselling arrangements.
Call center. The Company provides certain operator services for retail and
wholesale markets. The retail market consists primarily of the hospitality and
payphone industries. The wholesale market consists of other independent
telephone companies and interexchange carriers.
PCS. In early 1997 the Company was awarded 12 PCS licenses, 11 of which are
in Michigan, in connection with the FCC's auctions of 10MHz PCS licenses. The
licenses cover areas with a population of approximately 4.0 million. As a result
of the PTI acquisition, the Company acquired PCS licenses that cover areas with
a population of approximately 4.1 million. In 1998, the Company began marketing
PCS service in select Michigan markets as a fixed wireless local loop
alternative to the LEC's service in these markets. Approximately $15 million of
the Company's 1999 capital expenditure budget is for development of the
Company's PCS networks.
Security monitoring. The Company offers 24-hour burglary and fire monitoring
services to approximately 6,000 customers in select markets in Louisiana,
Arkansas, Mississippi, Texas and Ohio. The Company plans to expand the
availability of this service to more of its markets in 1999.
Other. The Company, through one or more of its subsidiaries, provides
audiotext services; printing, database management and direct mail services; and
cable television services. In connection with its long-range plans to sell
capacity to other carriers in or near certain of its select markets, the Company
is currently constructing a $20 million 650-to 700-mile fiber optic ring
connecting several communities in southern and central Michigan. The Company
also holds minority equity investments in certain communications companies, and
is in the process of developing deployment plans for 32 Local Multipoint
Distribution System licenses acquired by the Company in 1998.
Certain service subsidiaries of the company provide installation and
maintenance services, materials and supplies, and managerial, technical and
accounting services to the telephone and wireless operating subsidiaries. In
addition, Century provides and bills management services to subsidiaries and in
certain instances makes interest-bearing advances to finance construction of
plant and purchases of equipment. These transactions are recorded by the
Company's regulated telephone subsidiaries at their cost to the extent permitted
by regulatory authorities. Intercompany profit on transactions with regulated
affiliates is limited to a reasonable return on investment and has not been
eliminated in connection with consolidating the results of operations of Century
and its subsidiaries. Such intercompany profit is reflected in operating income
in the "Other operations" segment.
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
This report on Form 10-K and other documents filed by the Company under the
federal securities laws include, and future oral or written statements of the
Company and its management may include, certain forward-looking statements,
including without limitation statements with respect to the Company's
anticipated future operating and financial performance (including the impact of
pending acquisitions), financial position and liquidity, growth opportunities
and growth rates, business prospects, regulatory and competitive outlook,
investment and expenditure plans, financing sources, pricing plans, strategic
alternatives, business strategies, and other similar statements of expectations
or objectives that are highlighted by words such as "expects," "anticipates,"
"intends," "plans," "believes," "projects," "seeks," "estimates," "should," and
"may," and variations thereof and similar expressions. Such forward-looking
statements are inherently speculative and are based upon several assumptions
concerning future events, many of which are outside of the Company's control.
The Company's forward-looking statements, and the assumptions upon which such
statements are based, are subject to uncertainties that could cause the
Company's actual results to differ materially from such statements. These
uncertainties include but are not limited to those set forth below:
o the effects of ongoing deregulation in the telecommunications industry as
a result of the 1996 Act and other similar federal and state legislation and
federal and state regulations enacted thereunder, including without limitation
(i) greater than anticipated interconnection requests or competition in the
Company's predominately rural local exchange telephone markets resulting
therefrom, (ii) greater than anticipated reductions in revenues received from
the Universal Service Fund or other current or future federal and state support
funds designed to compensate LECs that provide services in high-cost markets,
(iii) the final outcome of regulatory and judicial proceedings with respect to
interconnection agreements and access charge reforms and (iv) future regulatory
actions taken in response to the 1996 Act.
o the effects of greater than anticipated competition from PCS, SMR, ESMR,
satellite or other wireless companies, including without limitation competition
requiring new pricing or marketing strategies or new product offerings, and the
attendant risk that the Company will not be able to respond on a timely or
profitable basis.
o possible changes in the demand for the Company's products and services,
including without limitation (i) lower than anticipated demand for traditional
or premium telephone services or for additional access lines per household, (ii)
lower than anticipated demand for wireless telephone services, whether caused by
changes in economic conditions, technology, competition, health concerns or
otherwise, and (iii) reduced demand for the Company's access or billing and
collection services.
o the Company's ability to successfully introduce new offerings on a timely
and cost-effective basis, including without limitation the Company's ability to
(i) expand successfully its long distance and Internet offerings to new markets
(including those acquired in December 1997 in the PTI acquisition or to be
acquired in connection with future acquisitions), (ii) offer bundled service
packages on terms attractive to its customers, (iii) offer digital cellular
service and (iv) successfully initiate PCS and data services in its targeted
markets.
o the risks inherent in rapid technological change, including without
limitation (i) the lack of assurance that the Company's ongoing wireless network
improvements will be sufficient to meet or exceed the capabilities and quality
of competing networks, (ii) technological developments that could make the
Company's analog and digital wireless networks uncompetitive or obsolete, such
as the risk that the Time Division Multiple Access technology used by the
Company will be uncompetitive with Code Division Multiple Access or other
digital technologies, and (iii) the risk that technologies will not be developed
by the Company on a timely or cost-effective basis or perform according to
expectations.
o the Company's ability to effectively manage its growth, including without
limitation the Company's ability to (i) integrate newly-acquired operations into
the Company's operations, (ii) attract and retain technological and other key
personnel to work at the Company's Monroe, Louisiana headquarters or regional
offices, (iii) achieve projected economies of scale and cost savings, (iv) meet
pro forma cash flow projections developed by management in valuing
newly-acquired businesses and (v) implement necessary internal controls.
o the success and expense of the remediation efforts of the Company and its
vendors in achieving year 2000 compliance (as discussed in greater detail in
Item 7 of this report).
o regulatory limits on the Company's ability to change its prices for
telephone services in response to competitive pressures.
o any difficulties in the Company's ability to expand through additional
acquisitions, whether caused by financing constraints, a decrease in the pool of
attractive target companies, or competition for acquisitions from other
interested buyers.
o higher than anticipated wireless operating costs due to churn or to
fraudulent uses of the Company's networks.
o the lack of assurance that the Company can compete effectively against
better-capitalized competitors.
o the future unavailability of SFAS 71 to the Company's telephone
subsidiaries.
o the effects of more general factors, including without limitation:
. changes in general industry and market conditions and growth rates
. changes in interest rates or other general national, regional or local
economic conditions
. changes in legislation, regulation or public policy, including changes
in federal rural financing programs
. unanticipated increases in capital, operating or administrative costs,
or the impact of new business opportunities requiring significant
up-front investments
. the continued availability of financing in amounts, and on terms and
conditions,necessary to support the Company's operations
. changes in the Company's relationships with vendors
. changes in the Company's senior debt ratings
. unfavorable outcomes of regulatory or legal proceedings, including
rate proceedings
. changes in accounting policies or practices adopted voluntarily or as
required by generally accepted accounting principles.
For additional information, see the description of the Company's business
included above, as well as Item 7 of this report. Due to these uncertainties,
you are cautioned not to place undue reliance upon the Company's forward-looking
statements, which speak only as of the date hereof. The Company undertakes no
obligation to update or revise any of its forward-looking statements for any
reason.
OTHER MATTERS
The Company has certain obligations based on federal, state and local laws
relating to the protection of the environment. Costs of compliance through 1998
have not been material and the Company currently has no reason to believe that
such costs will become material.
For additional information concerning the business and properties of the
Company, see notes 2, 4, 6, and 18 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
set forth in Item 8 elsewhere herein.
Item 2. Properties.
The Company's properties consist principally of (i) telephone lines, central
office equipment, telephone instruments and related equipment, and land and
buildings related to telephone operations, and (ii) switching and cell site
equipment related to cellular telephone operations. As of December 31, 1998 and
1997, the Company's gross property, plant and equipment of approximately $4.3
billion and $3.8 billion, respectively, consisted of the following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31,
- --------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C>
Telephone operations
Cable and wire 47.7% 47.9
Central office equipment 27.9 27.9
General support 6.3 6.7
Information origination/termination
equipment 1.7 1.7
Construction in progress 1.5 1.4
Other .2 .2
- --------------------------------------------------------------
85.3 85.8
- --------------------------------------------------------------
Cellular operations
Cell site 7.4 7.4
General support 1.9 1.7
Construction in progress .6 .6
Other .1 .1
- --------------------------------------------------------------
10.0 9.8
- --------------------------------------------------------------
Other 4.7 4.4
- --------------------------------------------------------------
100.0% 100.0
==============================================================
</TABLE>
"Cable and wire" facilities consist primarily of buried cable and aerial
cable, poles, wire, conduit and drops. "Central office equipment" consists
primarily of switching equipment, circuit equipment and related facilities.
"General support" consists primarily of land, buildings, tools, furnishings,
fixtures, motor vehicles and work equipment. "Information
origination/termination equipment" consists primarily of premise equipment
(private branch exchanges and telephones) for official company use. "Cell site"
consists primarily of radio frequency channel equipment, switching equipment and
towers. "Construction in progress" includes property of the foregoing categories
that has not been placed in service because it is still under construction.
Most of the properties of the Company's telephone subsidiaries are subject
to mortgages securing the debt of such companies. The Company owns substantially
all of the central office buildings, local administrative buildings, warehouses,
and storage facilities used in its telephone operations. The Company leases most
of the offices used in its cellular operations; certain of its transmitter sites
are leased while others are owned by the Company. For further information on the
location and type of the Company's properties, see the descriptions of the
Company's telephone and cellular operations in Item 1.
Item 3. Legal Proceedings.
From time to time, the Company is involved in litigation incidental to its
business, including administrative hearings of state public utility commissions
relating primarily to rate making, actions relating to employee claims,
occasional grievance hearings before labor regulatory agencies and miscellaneous
third party tort actions. Currently, there are no material legal proceedings.
Item 4. Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders.
Not applicable.
Executive Officers of the Registrant
Information concerning Executive Officers, set forth at Item 10 in Part III
hereof, is incorporated in Part I of this Report by reference.
PART II
Item 5. Market for Registrant's Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters.
Century's common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange and is traded
under the symbol CTL. The following table sets forth the high and low sale
prices, along with the quarterly dividends, for each of the quarters indicated
(adjusted to reflect the March 1999 three-for-two stock split):
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Sale prices
---------------- Dividend per
High Low common share
---- --- ------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
1998:
First quarter $ 27-3/8 21-9/16 .0433
Second quarter $ 33-5/16 27-1/16 .0433
Third quarter $ 35-1/8 29-15/16 .0433
Fourth quarter $ 45-3/16 30-1/16 .0433
1997:
First quarter $ 14-7/8 12-3/4 .0411
Second quarter $ 15-1/16 12-11/16 .0411
Third quarter $ 19-9/16 14-11/16 .0411
Fourth quarter $ 22-7/16 18-1/4 .0411
</TABLE>
Common stock dividends during 1997 and 1998 were paid each quarter. As of
February 28, 1999, there were approximately 6,054 stockholders of record of
Century's common stock.
Item 6. Selected Financial Data.
The following table presents certain selected consolidated financial data as
of and for each of the years ended in the five-year period ended December 31,
1998:
Selected Income Statement Data
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
--------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
--------------------------------------------------
(Dollars, except per share amounts,and
shares expressed in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues
Telephone $ 1,091,610 530,597 451,538 419,242 391,265
Cellular 407,749 307,742 250,243 197,494 150,802
Other 77,726 63,182 47,896 28,104 22,534
-------------------------------------------------
Total operating revenues $ 1,577,085 901,521 749,677 644,840 564,601
=================================================
Operating income
Telephone $ 333,708 173,285 155,183 143,527 137,992
Cellular 130,580 88,081 67,914 57,009 31,443
Other 15,523 6,404 199 2,383 3,371
-------------------------------------------------
Total operating income $ 479,811 267,770 223,296 202,919 172,806
=================================================
Gain on sale or exchange
of assets (pre-tax) $ 49,859 169,640 815 6,782 15,877
=================================================
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077 114,776 100,238
================================================
Diluted earnings
per share * $ 1.64 1.87 .95 .87 .80
================================================
Dividends per
common share * $ .173 .164 .16 .147 .142
================================================
Average diluted shares
outstanding * 140,105 137,412 135,980 132,456 130,242
================================================
* Adjusted to reflect the March 1999 three-for-two stock split
</TABLE>
Selected Balance Sheet Data
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31,
------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Net property, plant
and equipment $ 2,351,453 2,258,563 1,149,012 1,047,808 947,131
Excess cost of net
assets acquired, net $ 1,956,701 1,767,352 532,410 493,655 441,436
Total assets $ 4,935,455 4,709,401 2,028,505 1,862,421 1,643,253
Long-term debt $ 2,558,000 2,609,541 625,930 622,904 518,603
Stockholders' equity $ 1,531,482 1,300,272 1,028,153 888,424 650,236
------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
The following table presents certain selected consolidated operating data as
of the end of each of the years in the five-year period ended December 31, 1998:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31,
------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Telephone access lines 1,346,567 1,203,650 503,562 480,757 454,963
Cellular units in service
in majority-owned markets 624,119 569,983 368,233 290,075 211,710
Long distance customers 226,730 171,962 110,560 46,608 27,632
------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
See Items 1 and 2 in Part I and notes 1, 2 and 6 of Notes to Consolidated
Financial Statements set forth in Item 8 elsewhere herein for additional
information.
Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition
and Results of Operations
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
OVERVIEW
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc., which operates under the trade name of
CenturyTel, and its subsidiaries (the "Company"), is a regional diversified
communications company engaged primarily in providing local exchange telephone
services and cellular telephone communications services. At December 31, 1998,
the Company's local exchange telephone subsidiaries operated over 1.3 million
telephone access lines primarily in rural, suburban and small urban areas in 21
states, and the Company's majority-owned and operated cellular entities had more
than 624,000 cellular subscribers. On December 1, 1997, the Company
significantly expanded its operations by acquiring Pacific Telecom, Inc. ("PTI")
for $1.503 billion cash. As a result of the acquisition, the Company acquired
(i) over 660,000 telephone access lines, (ii) over 88,000 cellular subscribers
and (iii) various wireless, cable television and other communications assets. On
December 1, 1998, the Company acquired from affiliates of Ameritech Corporation
("Ameritech") telephone operations serving 86,000 access lines in northern and
central Wisconsin and the related telephone directories for approximately $221
million cash. The operations of PTI are included in the Company's results of
operations beginning December 1, 1997 and the operations of the former Ameritech
properties are included in the Company's results of operations beginning
December 1, 1998. See Acquisitions and Note 2 of Notes to Consolidated Financial
Statements for additional information. During the three years ended December 31,
1998, the Company has acquired various other telephone and cellular operations,
the impact of which has not been material to the financial position and results
of operations of the Company.
The net income of the Company for 1998 was $228.8 million, compared to $256.0
million during 1997 and $129.1 million during 1996. Diluted earnings per share
for 1998 were $1.64 compared to $1.87 in 1997 and $.95 in 1996. Excluding gain
on sale or exchange of assets, the Company's net income (and diluted earnings
per share) for 1998, 1997 and 1996 was $198.2 million ($1.42), $149.6 million
($1.09) and $128.6 million ($.95), respectively.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars, except per share amounts,
and shares in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating income
Telephone $ 333,708 173,285 155,183
Cellular 130,580 88,081 67,914
Other 15,523 6,404 199
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
479,811 267,770 223,296
Gain on sale or exchange of
assets, net 49,859 169,640 815
Interest expense (167,552) (56,474) (44,662)
Income from unconsolidated
cellular entities 32,869 27,794 26,952
Minority interest (12,797) (5,498) (6,675)
Other income and expense 5,268 5,109 3,916
Income tax expense (158,701) (152,363) (74,565)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
================================================================================
Diluted earnings per share* $ 1.64 1.87 .95
================================================================================
Average diluted shares
outstanding* 140,105 137,412 135,980
================================================================================
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999. See Note 21 of
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
</TABLE>
The Company's operating income for 1998 was $479.8 million, an increase of
$212.0 million (79.2%) over 1997 operating income of $267.8 million. During 1998
the operating income of the Company's telephone and wireless segments increased
$160.4 million (92.6%) and $42.5 million (48.2%), respectively, while the
operating income of the Company's other operations increased $9.1 million
(142.4%). The Company's operating income for 1996 was $223.3 million.
Contributions to operating revenues and operating income by the Company's
telephone, wireless and other operations for each of the years in the three-year
period ended December 31, 1998 were as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues
Telephone operations 69.2% 58.9 60.2
Wireless operations 25.9% 34.1 33.4
Other operations 4.9% 7.0 6.4
Operating income
Telephone operations 69.6% 64.7 69.5
Wireless operations 27.2% 32.9 30.4
Other operations 3.2% 2.4 .1
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
As indicated by the chart above, the percentage of the Company's total
operating revenues and operating income contributed by its telephone operations
significantly increased during 1998 as a result of the Company's acquisition of
PTI on December 1, 1997.
In addition to historical information, management's discussion and analysis
includes certain forward-looking statements regarding events and financial
trends that may affect the Company's future operating results and financial
position. Such forward-looking statements are subject to uncertainties that
could cause the Company's actual results to differ materially from such
statements. Such uncertainties include but are not limited to: the effects of
ongoing deregulation in the telecommunications industry; the effects of greater
than anticipated competition in the Company's markets; possible changes in the
demand for the Company's products and services; the Company's ability to
successfully introduce new offerings on a timely and cost-effective basis; the
risks inherent in rapid technological change; the Company's ability to
effectively manage its growth, including integrating newly-acquired properties
into the Company's operations; the success and expense of the remediation
efforts of the Company and its vendors in achieving year 2000 compliance; and
the effects of more general factors such as changes in general market or
economic conditions or in legislation, regulation or public policy. These and
other uncertainties related to the business are described in greater detail in
Item 1 to the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December
31, 1998. You are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking
statements, which speak only as of the date hereof. The Company undertakes no
obligation to update any of its forward-looking statements for any reason.
TELEPHONE OPERATIONS
The Company conducts its telephone operations in rural, suburban and small
urban communities in 21 states. As of December 31, 1998, approximately 86% of
the Company's 1.3 million telephone access lines were in Wisconsin, Washington,
Alaska, Michigan, Louisiana, Colorado, Ohio, Oregon and Montana. In August 1998
the Company entered into a definitive agreement to sell all of its operations in
Alaska. This transaction is expected to close in the second quarter of 1999. As
of December 31, 1998, the Company had approximately 132,000 access lines in
Alaska. The operating revenues, expenses and income of the Company's telephone
operations for 1998, 1997 and 1996 are summarized below.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues
Local service $ 331,736 147,589 121,728
Network access 629,583 319,301 276,123
Other 130,291 63,707 53,687
- --------------------------------------------------------------------
1,091,610 530,597 451,538
- --------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating expenses
Plant operations 245,164 110,220 90,083
Customer operations 92,552 50,819 43,413
Corporate and other 157,293 80,551 67,066
Depreciation and amortization 262,893 115,722 95,793
- --------------------------------------------------------------------
757,902 357,312 296,355
- --------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating income $ 333,708 173,285 155,183
====================================================================
</TABLE>
Local service revenues
Local service revenues are derived from the provision of local exchange
telephone services in the Company's service areas. The $184.1 million (124.8%)
increase in such revenues in 1998 included $171.0 million from acquired
properties, of which $169.2 million was from the PTI properties; $10.7 million
due to the internal increase in the number of customer access lines; and $3.0
million due to the increased provision of custom calling features. The $25.9
million increase in revenues in 1997 included $17.4 million from acquired
properties, of which $15.0 million was from the PTI properties; $5.6 million due
to the internal increase in the number of customer access lines; and $2.8
million due to the increased provision of custom calling features. Internal
access line growth during 1998, 1997 and 1996 was 4.7%, 4.4% and 4.3%,
respectively.
Network access revenues
Network access revenues are primarily derived from charges to long distance
companies and other customers for access to the Company's local exchange carrier
("LEC") networks in connection with the completion of long distance telephone
calls. These access charges are based on tariffed access rates filed with the
Federal Communications Commission ("FCC") for interstate services and with the
respective state regulatory agency for intrastate services. Certain of the
Company's interstate network access revenues are based on access charges filed
directly with the FCC; the remainder of such revenues are derived under revenue
sharing arrangements with other LECs administered by the National Exchange
Carrier Association. Intrastate network access revenues are based on access
charges or are derived under revenue sharing arrangements with other LECs.
Network access revenues increased $310.3 million (97.2%) in 1998 and $43.2
million in 1997 due to the following factors:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1998 1997
increase increase
(decrease) (decrease)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
PTI acquisition $ 278,471 26,040
Increased recovery from the federal
Universal Service Fund ("USF") 8,329 11,314
Increased minutes of use 8,846 5,033
Acquisitions, excluding PTI 1,013 3,465
Partial recovery of increased operating
costs through revenue sharing arrangements
with other telephone companies and return
on rate base 10,440 2,454
Other, net 3,183 (5,128)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 310,282 43,178
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Included in "Other, net" for 1998 and 1997 were decreases of $1.8 million and
$3.8 million, respectively, in access revenues due to the reductions in
intrastate switched access rates mandated by the Louisiana Public Service
Commission ("LPSC") which were phased in from July 1995 through July 1997.
Other revenues
Other revenues include revenues related to (i) leasing, selling, installing,
maintaining and repairing customer premise telecommunications equipment and
wiring ("CPE services"), (ii) providing billing and collection services for long
distance carriers, (iii) participating in the publication of local directories
and (iv) providing Internet access. Acquisitions contributed $60.7 million
(which includes $60.3 million related to PTI) to the $66.6 million increase in
other revenues in 1998. Exclusive of acquisitions, revenues from the provision
of Internet access and CPE services increased $3.9 million and $3.5 million,
respectively, in 1998. Other revenues increased $10.0 million in 1997, of which
$4.6 million was attributable to the PTI acquisition. Revenues from CPE services
and the provision of Internet access contributed $3.5 million and $2.5 million,
respectively, of the remainder of the increase in other revenues in 1997.
Operating expenses
Plant operations expenses during 1998 and 1997 increased $134.9 million
(122.4%) and $20.1 million (22.4%), respectively. Expenses incurred by the PTI
and former Ameritech operations in 1998 accounted for $120.4 million of the 1998
increase. The remainder of the increase in 1998 was primarily due to an increase
in salaries and benefits. Expenses incurred by the PTI operations in 1997
accounted for $12.0 million of the 1997 increase. Exclusive of PTI, expenses
incurred in connection with providing Internet access to a larger number of
customers contributed $3.5 million to the 1997 increase and other acquisitions
accounted for $1.8 million of such increase.
Customer operations, corporate and other expenses increased $118.5 million
(90.2%) in 1998, of which $110.7 million was applicable to the PTI properties.
Exclusive of acquisitions, the remainder of the 1998 increase was due to a $4.3
million increase in salaries and benefits and a $2.0 million increase in
marketing expenses. Of the $20.9 million increase in these expenses in 1997,
$13.4 million was incurred by acquired properties (of which $11.2 million was
incurred by PTI). Exclusive of acquisitions, $1.7 million of the remaining
increase in 1997 expenses was due to an increase in marketing expenses, $1.6
million was due to higher operating taxes and $1.4 million was due to expenses
incurred in the increased provision of CPE services.
Depreciation and amortization increased $147.2 million (127.2%) and $19.9
million (20.8%) in 1998 and 1997, respectively. Approximately $136.6 million of
the 1998 increase was applicable to acquiring and operating PTI (of which $27.9
million represented amortization of goodwill) and $1.3 million was applicable to
the former Ameritech properties. Approx-imately $11.4 million of the 1997
increase was applicable to acquiring and operating PTI (of which $1.5 million
represented amortization of goodwill). Exclusive of acquisitions, depreciation
expense included nonrecurring additional depreciation charges approved by
regulators in certain jurisdictions which aggregated $6.2 million in 1998 and
$4.4 million in 1997. In addition, the Company obtained increased depreciation
rates in certain jurisdictions which increased depreciation expense by $1.1
million in 1998 and $4.4 million in 1997. The remaining increases in
depreciation and amortization in 1998 and 1997 were due to higher levels of
plant in service. The composite depreciation rate for the Company's regulated
telephone properties, including the additional depreciation charges, was 6.9%
for 1998, 7.4% for 1997 and 7.5% for 1996. The properties acquired in the PTI
acquisition historically have had a lower composite depreciation rate than the
Company's incumbent properties.
Other
For additional information regarding certain matters that have impacted or
may impact the Company's telephone operations, see Regulation and Competition.
Cellular Operations and Income From Unconsolidated Cellular Entities
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating income - cellular operations $ 130,580 88,081 67,914
Minority interest (12,635) (6,916) (7,062)
Income from unconsolidated cellular entities 32,869 27,794 26,952
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 150,814 108,959 87,804
==============================================================================
</TABLE>
The Company's cellular operations reflect 100% of the results of operations
of the cellular entities in which the Company has a majority ownership interest.
The minority interest owners' share of the income of such entities is reflected
in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income as an expense in "Minority
interest." See Minority Interest for additional information. The Company's share
of earnings from the cellular entities in which it has less than a majority
interest is accounted for using the equity method and is reflected in the
Company's Consolidated Statements of Income in "Income from unconsolidated
cellular entities." See Income from Unconsolidated Cellular Entities for
additional information.
Cellular Operations
All of the Company's cellular customers are located in Michigan, Louisiana,
Wisconsin, Mississippi, Texas, Alaska and Arkansas. The operating revenues,
expenses and income of the Company's cellular operations for 1998, 1997 and 1996
are summarized below.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues
Service revenues $ 398,661 302,156 246,037
Equipment sales 9,088 5,586 4,206
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
407,749 307,742 250,243
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating expenses
Cost of equipment sold 16,954 14,576 12,771
System operations 59,920 47,572 36,301
General, administrative
and customer service 80,827 62,258 52,891
Sales and marketing 57,466 54,128 46,793
Depreciation and amortization 62,002 41,127 33,573
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
277,169 219,661 182,329
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating income $ 130,580 88,081 67,914
=====================================================================
</TABLE>
Operating revenues
Service revenues include monthly service fees for providing access and
airtime to customers, service fees for providing airtime to other carriers'
customers roaming through the Company's service areas and toll revenue. Cellular
service revenues during 1998 increased to $398.7 million from $302.2 million in
1997 and $246.0 million in 1996.
Of the $96.5 million increase in service revenues in 1998 and the $56.1
million increase in 1997, $76.1 million and $11.8 million, respectively, was
attributable to acquisitions of properties. Excluding acquisitions, the
remainder of the increases in cellular service revenues were primarily
attributable to the increases in cellular usage in the Company's incumbent
markets due to the increased demand for wireless services. Exclusive of
acquisitions, local and toll revenues increased $9.4 million (4.0%) in 1998 and
$34.9 million (17.5%) in 1997 while roaming revenues increased $10.9 million
(18.5%) in 1998 and $12.6 million (27.1%) in 1997.
The following table further illustrates the growth in the Company's cellular
customer base in its majority-owned markets:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Customers at beginning of period 569,983 368,233 290,075
Gross units added internally 214,596 193,623 165,377
Disconnects 160,460 115,473 92,069
Net units added 54,136 78,150 73,308
Net effect of property acquisitions - 123,600 4,850
Customers at end of period 624,119 569,983 368,233
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
The average monthly service revenue per customer (including acquisitions)
declined to $57 during 1998 from $61 in 1997 and $63 in 1996 due to the
continued trend that a higher percentage of new subscribers tend to be lower
usage customers and to a reduction in rates. In addition, the properties
acquired in the PTI acquisition historically have had a lower average monthly
service revenue per customer than the Company's incumbent properties. The
average monthly service revenue per customer may further decline (i) as market
penetration increases and additional lower usage customers are activated and
(ii) as competitive pressures from current and future wireless communications
providers intensify. The Company is responding to such competitive pressures by,
among other things, modifying certain of its price plans and implementing
certain other plans and promotions, all of which are likely to result in lower
average revenue per customer. The Company will continue to focus on customer
service and attempt to stimulate cellular usage by promoting the availability of
certain enhanced services and by improving the quality of its service through
the construction of additional cell sites and other enhancements to its system.
Operating expenses
System operations expenses increased $12.3 million (26.0%) in 1998 primarily
due to $15.6 million of expenses attributable to acquisitions. Such increase was
partially offset by a $6.1 million decrease in the net amounts paid to other
carriers for cellular service provided to the Company's customers who roam in
the other carriers' service areas primarily due to a decrease in rates. The
$11.3 million (31.0%) increase in system operations expenses in 1997 included a
$4.7 million increase in the net amounts paid to other carriers for cellular
service provided to the Company's customers who roam in the other carriers'
service areas and $2.8 million of expenses incurred by acquired properties. The
remainder of the increase in system operations expenses in 1997 resulted
primarily from the operation of more cell sites.
The Company operated 615 cell sites at December 31, 1998 in entities in
which it had a majority interest, compared to 558 at December 31, 1997 and 354
at December 31,1996. In 1997, 155 cell sites were added through acquisitions.
General, administrative and customer service expenses increased $18.6 million
(29.8%) in 1998, of which $13.4 million was attributable to expenses of entities
acquired. The remainder of the 1998 increase was primarily due to a $2.1 million
increase in the provision for doubtful accounts and a $1.8 million increase in
customer service expenses. Of the $9.4 million (17.7%) increase in 1997
expenses, $3.0 million was applicable to acquired operations. The remainder of
the increase in 1997 was primarily due to a $2.4 million increase in customer
service and retention costs and a $2.4 million increase in billing costs.
Churn rate (the percentage of cellular customers that terminate service) is
an industry-wide concern. The Company faces substantial competition from other
wireless providers, including Personal Communication Services ("PCS"). A
significant portion of the churn in the Company's cellular markets is due to the
Company disconnecting service to customers for nonpayment. The Company's average
monthly churn rate was 2.23% in 1998, 2.31% in 1997 and 2.37% in 1996.
Sales and marketing expenses increased $3.3 million (6.2%) in 1998 primarily
due to $9.7 million of expenses of acquired entities, a $2.9 million increase in
costs incurred in selling products and services in retail locations and a $2.4
million increase in advertising expenses. Such increases were substantially
offset by a $10.6 million reduction in commissions paid to agents for selling
services to new customers primarily as a result of fewer cellular units being
added through this distribution channel during 1998 as compared to 1997. The
1997 increase in sales and marketing expenses of $7.3 million (15.7%) included a
$4.9 million increase in costs incurred in selling products and services in
retail locations and a $2.8 million increase applicable to operations acquired.
Depreciation and amortization increased $20.9 million (50.8%) in 1998 and
$7.6 million in 1997, of which $14.5 million and $2.1 million, respectively, was
attributable to acquisitions. The remainder of the 1998 and 1997 increases were
primarily due to higher levels of plant in service.
Other
For additional information regarding certain matters that have impacted or
may impact the Company's cellular operations, see Regulation and Competition.
Other Operations
Other operations include the results of operations of subsidiaries of the
Company which are not included in the telephone or cellular segments including,
but not limited to, the Company's non-regulated long distance and call center
operations and the Company's competitive access subsidiary (which was sold to
Brooks Fiber Properties, Inc. ("Brooks") in May 1997). The operating revenues,
expenses and income of the Company's other operations for 1998, 1997 and 1996
are summarized below.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues
Long distance $ 53,027 36,550 28,894
Call center 9,701 14,285 8,832
Competitive access - 2,499 2,730
Other 14,998 9,848 7,440
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
77,726 63,182 47,896
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating expenses
Cost of sales and operating expenses 58,544 54,132 45,042
Depreciation and amortization 3,659 2,646 2,655
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
62,203 56,778 47,697
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating income $ 15,523 6,404 199
==============================================================================
</TABLE>
The 1998 and 1997 increases of $16.5 million and $7.7 million, respectively,
in long distance revenues were attributable to the growth in the number of
customers. The number of long distance customers as of December 31, 1998, 1997
and 1996 was 226,700, 172,000 and 110,600, respectively. The $4.6 million
decrease in 1998 call center revenues was primarily due to the loss of two major
customers in the fourth quarter of 1997. The $5.5 million increase in call
center revenues in 1997 was primarily due to an increase in customers prior to
the loss of the two major customers in late 1997. The increases in other
revenues of $5.2 million in 1998 and $2.4 million in 1997 was primarily
attributable to the acquisition of cable television properties in the PTI
acquisition and the acquisition of two security businesses.
Operating expenses in 1998 increased due to (i) an increase of $13.6 million
in expenses of the Company's long distance operations due primarily to an
increase in customers and (ii) $6.6 million of operating expenses applicable to
acquisitions. Such increases were substantially offset by decreases in operating
expenses because (i) 1997 included $9.2 million of costs applicable to entities
sold during 1997 and (ii) the amount of intercompany profit with regulated
affiliates (the recognition of which in accordance with regulatory accounting
principles acts to offset operating expenses) increased $5.8 million as a result
of the acquisition of PTI.
In 1997 an increase in operating expenses of $11.7 million incurred by the
long distance and call center operations was partially offset by a decrease of
$4.1 million in operating expenses incurred by the Company's competitive access
subsidiary.
Certain of the Company's service subsidiaries provide managerial,
operational, technical and accounting services, along with materials and
supplies, to the Company's telephone subsidiaries. In accordance with regulatory
accounting, intercompany profit on transactions with regulated affiliates has
not been eliminated in connection with consolidating the results of operations
of the Company. When the regulated operations of the Company no longer qualify
for the application of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 71 ("SFAS
71"), "Accounting for the Effects of Certain Types of Regulation," such
intercompany profit will be eliminated in subsequent financial statements, the
primary result of which will be a decrease in operating expenses applicable to
the Company's telephone operations and an increase in operating expenses
applicable to the Company's other operations segment. The amount of intercompany
profit with regulated affiliates which was not eliminated was approximately
$14.4 million, $8.9 million and $7.7 million in 1998, 1997 and 1996,
respectively. For additional information applicable to SFAS 71, see Regulation
and Competition - Other Matters.
Gain on Sale or Exchange of Assets, Net
In 1998 the Company recorded net pre-tax gains aggregating $49.9 million
($30.5 million after-tax; $.22 per diluted share) primarily due to the
conversion of its investment in the common stock of Brooks into common stock of
MCIWorldCom, Inc. ("WorldCom"), the subsequent sale of 750,000 shares of
WorldCom stock, and the sale of minority interests in two non-strategic cellular
entities. See Note 14 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for
additional information.
In the second quarter of 1997, the Company sold its competitive access
subsidiary to Brooks in exchange for approximately 4.3 million shares of Brooks'
common stock and recorded a pre-tax gain of approximately $71 million ($46
million after-tax; $.34 per diluted share). In November 1997 the Company sold
approximately 3.8 million shares of Brooks' stock and recorded a pre-tax gain of
approximately $108 million ($66 million after-tax; $.48 per diluted share).
Interest Expense
Interest expense increased $111.1 million in 1998 primarily due to $89.7
million of interest expense on the borrowings used to finance the PTI and
Ameritech acquisitions and $23.2 million of interest expense applicable to PTI's
debt.
Interest expense increased $11.8 million in 1997 primarily due to $7.2
million of interest expense on the borrowings used to finance the PTI
acquisition and $3.5 million of interest expense applicable to PTI's debt.
Income From Unconsolidated Cellular Entities
Earnings from unconsolidated cellular entities, net of the amortization of
associated goodwill, increased $5.1 million (18.3%) in 1998 primarily due to
$7.3 million of earnings of unconsolidated cellular entities acquired in the PTI
acquisition. Such increase was partially offset by a $2.5 million decrease due
to the sale of the Company's minority interests in two non-strategic cellular
entities during the second quarter of 1998.
The improvement in profitability in 1997 of most of the cellular entities in
which the Company owns less than a majority interest was substantially offset by
a $2.4 million decrease in the Company's portion of the profits of a partnership
in which the Company has a significant ownership interest.
Minority Interest
Minority interest is the expense recorded by the Company to reflect the
minority interest owners' share of the earnings of the Company's majority-owned
and operated cellular entities and majority-owned subsidiaries. Of the $7.3
million increase in minority interest in 1998, $2.0 million was associated with
entities acquired in the PTI acquisition. The remainder of the increase was
primarily due to the increased profitability of the Company's majority-owned and
operated cellular entities.
The decrease in minority interest in 1997 of $1.2 million was due to the
effect of the Company's acquisition, during the second quarter of 1996, of an
additional 25% interest in a Louisiana cellular partnership which decreased the
minority interest percentage of such partnership.
Income Tax Expense
The Company's effective income tax rate was 41.0%, 37.3% and 36.6% in 1998,
1997 and 1996, respectively. Such increase in the effective income tax rate for
1998 was primarily due to the increase in non-deductible amortization of excess
cost of net assets acquired (goodwill) attributable to the PTI acquisition.
Acquisitions
On December 1, 1998, the Company acquired the assets of certain of
Ameritech's telephone operations and the related telephone directories in 19
telephone exchanges covering 21 communities in northern and central Wisconsin
for approximately $221 million cash. The operations acquired by the Company
include the telephone property and equipment that serves nearly 69,000
customers, or approximately 86,000 access lines, as well as the related nine
telephone directories. The Company provided initial financing for this
acquisition through its committed credit facilities and will ultimately finance
this transaction with proceeds from the sale of the Company's Alaska operations,
which the Company expects to close during the second quarter of 1999 for $415
million cash, subject to various adjustments.
On December 1, 1997, the Company acquired PTI in exchange for $1.503 billion
cash. To finance the acquisition, the Company borrowed $1.288 billion under its
committed credit facility and paid the remainder of the purchase price with
available cash, most of which consisted of the proceeds of the sale of Brooks'
common stock in November 1997. See Liquidity and Capital Resources - Financing
Activities for additional information. As a result of the acquisition, the
Company acquired (i) over 660,000 telephone access lines located in four
midwestern states, seven western states and Alaska, (ii) over 88,000 cellular
subscribers in two midwestern states and Alaska and (iii) various wireless,
cable television and other communications assets. For additional information,
see Note 2 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.
Accounting Pronouncements
In June 1997 the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 130 ("SFAS 130"), "Reporting
Comprehensive Income" and Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 131
("SFAS 131"), "Disclosures About Segments of an Enterprise and Related
Information." SFAS 130 established standards for reporting the components of
comprehensive income, which is defined to include all changes in equity during a
period except those resulting from investments by and distributions to
shareholders. SFAS 131 established standards for reporting information about
operating segments in annual financial statements and interim financial reports
to shareholders. The Company adopted both statements in the first quarter of
1998.
In February 1998 the FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards
No. 132, "Employers' Disclosures About Pensions and Other Postretirement
Benefits," which standardizes the disclosure requirements for pensions and other
postretirement benefits.
In March 1998 the Accounting Standards Executive Committee issued Statement
of Position 98-1 ("SOP 98-1"), "Accounting for the Costs of Computer Software
Developed or Obtained for Internal Use." SOP 98-1 requires that certain costs
related to the development or purchase of internal-use software be capitalized
and amortized over the estimated useful life of the software. The impact of SOP
98-1 on the Company's results of operations is not expected to be material. SOP
98-1 is effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years beginning
after December 15, 1998.
In June 1998 the FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No.
133 ("SFAS 133"), "Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging
Activities." SFAS 133 established accounting and reporting standards for
derivative instruments and for hedging activities by requiring that entities
recognize all derivatives as either assets or liabilities at fair value on the
balance sheet. Based on the Company's current use of derivatives, SFAS 133 is
not expected to materially impact the Company's financial position or results of
operations.
Inflation
The effects of increased costs historically have been mitigated by the
ability to recover certain costs applicable to the Company's regulated telephone
operations through the rate-making process. As operating expenses in the
Company's nonregulated lines of business increase as a result of inflation, the
Company, to the extent permitted by competition, recovers the costs by
increasing prices for its services and equipment. While the rate-making process
does not permit the Company to immediately recover the costs of replacing its
physical plant, the Company has historically been able to recapture these costs
over time. Possible future regulatory changes may alter the Company's ability to
recover increased costs in its regulated operations. For additional information
regarding the current regulatory environment, see Regulation and Competition.
Market Risk
The Company is not exposed to material future earnings or cash flow exposures
from changes in interest rates on long-term debt obligations since the majority
of the Company's long-debt obligations are fixed rate. At December 31, 1998, the
fair value of the Company's long-term debt was estimated to be $2.7 billion
based on the overall weighted average rate of the Company's long-term debt of
6.6% and an overall weighted maturity of 14 years compared to terms and rates
currently available in long-term financing markets. Market risk is estimated as
the potential decrease in fair value of the Company's long-term debt resulting
from a hypothetical increase of 66 basis points in interest rates (ten percent
of the Company's overall weighted average borrowing rate). Such an increase in
interest rates would result in approximately a $115.3 million decrease in fair
value of the Company's long-term debt. In early 1998 the Company utilized
interest rate hedge contracts to manage its interest rate risk related to the
issuance of $765.0 million of senior notes and debentures. During 1998 the
Company did not enter into any derivative financial instruments and is currently
not evaluating the future use of such financial instruments.
Year 2000 Readiness Disclosure
The Year 2000 issue concerns the inability of computer systems and certain
other equipment to properly recognize and process data that uses two digits
rather than four to designate particular years. The Company has initiated a Year
2000 Project Plan ("the Plan") to assess whether its systems that process date
sensitive information will perform satisfactorily leading up to and beyond
January 1, 2000. The goal of the Plan is to correct, prior to January 1, 2000,
any Year 2000-related problem with critical systems, the failure of which could
have a material adverse effect on the Company's operations. The Plan includes
steps to (i) identify each critical system element that requires date code
remediation, (ii) establish a plan to remediate such systems, (iii) implement
all required remediations and (iv) selectively test the remediated systems.
Thus far, the identification phase has identified Year 2000 issues in the
following critical Company-owned systems: (i) switching and transmission
hardware and software used by the Company to route and deliver telephone calls;
(ii) network support systems, including customer service systems and (iii)
billing and collection systems used by the Company to invoice and process most
of its customer payments. In addition, the Company (i) receives critical
services from providers of utilities and other services to facilities that house
employees and switching, transmission and other equipment and (ii) is dependent
upon outside vendors for, among other things, the provision of critical network
components and cellular billing services. The Company is also critically reliant
upon the systems of other telecommunications carriers with which the Company's
systems interconnect for the routing and delivery of telephone calls. The
Company has also identified potential Year 2000-related liability with respect
to telephone equipment manufactured by unaffiliated parties that the Company has
sold or leased to its customers ("Customer Premises Equipment" or "CPE"). The
identification and planning phases of the Plan are materially complete as they
relate to Company-owned systems. As they relate to third party vendors, other
telecommunications carriers and CPE customers, the identification and planning
phases are on-going and are expected to be materially complete by first quarter
1999.
Based on work completed under the Plan to date, the Company currently intends
to take the following additional steps under its Plan with respect to
Company-owned systems, third-party vendors, other telecommunications carriers,
and CPE customers:
o The Company generally plans to remediate Company-owned switching,
transmission, billing and collection and other critical systems through the
revision or replacement of current system components. Necessary changes to
Company-owned systems are in process and are expected to be completed by
mid-year 1999. The selective testing and verification of such changes are
expected to be completed during 1999. Due to the large number of system
components requiring remediation, the Company does not intend to test every
remediated system but will rely upon the results of selective testing to
determine the effectiveness of remediation efforts.
o With respect to critical services provided by utilities and other third
parties, the Company has contacted all such suppliers during 1998. Thus
far, a majority of those suppliers who have responded have indicated that
their systems and service delivery mechanisms are Year 2000 compliant or
can be made so through currently available modifications. The Company plans
to continue monitoring all third-party remediation efforts and to make
contingency plans for the delivery of such services as necessary.
o The Year 2000 compliance status of other telecommunications carriers with
which the Company's switching systems interconnect is not yet known. The
Company is making inquiries with these carriers to determine their
compliance status and expects to obtain the results of compliance tests
during first quarter 1999, although there can be no assurance that carriers
will supply this information.
o Finally, the Company is in the process of obtaining Year 2000 compliance
information from CPE manufacturers and plans to provide this information to
the Company's business customers in early 1999. The Company plans to work
with CPE manufacturers to encourage the development of remedies for Year
2000 problems in such equipment and to continue working with its customers
to identify Year 2000 problems in CPE. However, there can be no assurance
that CPE manufacturers or customers will cooperate with the Company's
efforts to address these problems.
While the Company currently believes that it will be able to remediate and
selectively test Company-owned systems in time to minimize any detrimental
effect on its operations, there can be no assurance that such steps will be
successful. Failure by the Company to timely and effectively remediate its
systems, or the failure of critical vendors and suppliers and other
telecommunications carriers to remediate affected systems, could have a material
adverse impact on the Company's business, financial condition, results of
operations and prospects. Because the impact of Year 2000 issues on the Company
is materially dependent on the mitigation efforts of parties outside the
Company's control, the Company cannot assess with certainty the magnitude of any
such potential adverse impact. However, based upon risk assessment work
conducted thus far, the Company believes that the most reasonably likely worst
case scenario of the failure by the Company, its suppliers or other
telecommunications carriers with which the Company interconnects to resolve Year
2000 issues would be an inability by the Company (i) to provide
telecommunications services to the Company's customers, (ii) to route and
deliver telephone calls originating from or terminating with other
telecommunications carriers, (iii) to timely and accurately process service
requests and (iv) to timely and accurately bill its customers. In addition to
lost earnings, these failures could also result in loss of customers due to
service interruptions and billing errors, substantial claims by customers and
increased expenses associated with stabilizing operations and executing
mitigation plans.
Contingency planning to maintain and restore service in the event of natural
disasters, power failures and systems-related problems is a routine part of the
Company's operations. The Company believes that such contingency plans will
assist the Company in responding to the failure by outside service providers to
successfully address Year 2000 issues. In addition, the Company is currently
identifying and considering various Year 2000-specific contingency plans,
including identification of alternate vendors and service providers and manual
alternatives to system operations. These Year 2000-specific contingency plans
are expected to be materially completed during the first quarter of 1999, but
their review and development will continue during 1999.
Although the total costs to implement the Plan cannot be precisely estimated,
the Company incurred costs of $4.2 million during 1998 (none of which was
related to hardware costs) and anticipates spending an aggregate of
approximately $32.1 million during 1999 (which includes $20.9 million of
hardware costs.) These costs will be expensed as incurred, unless new systems
are purchased that should be capitalized in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles. Some of the costs represent ongoing investment in systems
upgrades, the timing of which is being accelerated in order to facilitate Year
2000 compliance. In some instances, such upgrades will position the Company to
provide more and better-quality services to its customers than they currently
receive. The Company expects to fund these costs with cash provided by
operations. Cost estimates and statements of the Company's plans discussed above
are forward-looking statements that are derived using numerous assumptions of
future events, many of which are outside the Company's control, including the
availability and future cost of trained personnel and various other resources,
third party modification plans, the absence of systems requiring remediation
that have not yet been discovered, and other factors.
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
Excluding cash used for acquisitions, the Company relies on cash provided by
operations to provide substantially all of its cash needs. The Company's
operations have historically provided a stable source of cash flow which has
helped the Company continue its long-term program of capital improvements.
Operating activities
Net cash provided by operating activities was $467.8 million, $297.3 million
and $264.7 million in 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. The Company's
accompanying consolidated statements of cash flows identify major differences
between net income and net cash provided by operating activities for each of
those years. For additional information relating to the telephone operations,
cellular operations and other operations of the Company, see Results of
Operations.
Investing activities
Net cash used in investing activities was $375.6 million, $1.503 billion and
$241.8 million in 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. Cash used for acquisitions
was $225.6 million during 1998 compared to $1.544 billion during 1997 and $46.3
million during 1996. See Results of Operations - Acquisitions for additional
information. Capital expenditures for 1998 were $233.2 million for telephone
operations, $49.5 million for cellular operations and $28.2 million for
corporate and other operations. Capital expenditures during 1997 and 1996 were
$181.2 million and $222.9 million, respectively. Proceeds from the sale of
assets were $132.3 million in 1998 and $202.7 million in 1997.
Financing activities
Net cash used in financing activities in 1998 was $112.4 million. Net cash
provided by financing activities was $1.223 billion during 1997, of which $1.288
billion was related to the acquisition of PTI. Net cash used in financing
activities was $23.0 million during 1996. In December 1997 the Company filed a
shelf registration statement with the United States Securities and Exchange
Commission registering $1.5 billion of senior unsecured debt securities,
preferred stock, common stock and warrants, under which the Company issued $665
million of senior debt securities in January 1998 concurrent with the issuance
of the remaining $100 million of senior debt securities under its predecessor
shelf registration statement. The net proceeds of approximately $758 million
were used to reduce the bank indebtedness incurred by the Company in connection
with its December 1997 acquisition of PTI. In addition, the Company paid
approximately $40 million in 1998 to settle numerous interest rate hedge
contracts that had been entered into in anticipation of these debt issuances.
In December 1997 after giving consideration to the PTI acquisition, Standard
& Poor's assigned Century's senior unsecured debt a rating of BBB+ and Moody's
reaffirmed its rating of Baa1.
Other
Budgeted capital expenditures for 1999 total $215 million for telephone
operations, $70 million for cellular operations and $60 million for corporate
and other operations. The Company anticipates that capital expenditures in its
telephone operations will continue to include the installation of fiber optic
cable and the upgrading of its plant and equipment, including its digital
switches, to provide enhanced services. Capital expenditures in the cellular
operations are expected to continue to focus on constructing additional cell
sites (which will provide additional capacity and expanded areas where hand-held
cellular phones may be used) and providing digital service. Capital expenditures
for corporate and other operations include $20 million for construction of the
Company's fiber network in Michigan and $15 million for continued expansion of
the Company's PCS operations.
In April 1998 the Company acquired 32 Local Multipoint Distribution System
licenses in the FCC's A and B band auctions for an aggregate of $9.7 million.
The licenses acquired cover geographic areas with a combined population of
approximately 10.6 million. The Company has not finalized capital expenditure or
deployment plans for these systems.
The Company continually evaluates the possibility of acquiring additional
telecommunications operations and expects to continue its long-term strategy of
pursuing the acquisition of attractive communications properties in exchange for
cash, securities or both. Over the past few years, the amount of communications
properties available to be purchased by the Company has increased substantially.
The Company may require additional financing in connection with any such
acquisitions. Approximately 3.8 million shares of Century common stock and
200,000 shares of Century preferred stock remain available for future issuance
in connection with acquisitions under an acquisition shelf registration
statement.
As of December 31, 1998, the Company's telephone subsidiaries had available
for use $135.1 million of commitments for long-term financing from the Rural
Utilities Service and the Company had $332.6 million of undrawn committed bank
lines of credit. The Company also has access to debt and equity capital markets,
including its shelf registration statement mentioned above.
The following table reflects the Company's debt to total capitalization
percentage and ratio of earnings to fixed charges as of and for the years ended
December 31:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
1998 1997 1996
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Debt to total capitalization percentage 63.0% 67.2 38.6
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges 2.25 7.80 5.10
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges
excluding gain on sale or exchange
of assets 1.96 4.87 5.09
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
REGULATION AND COMPETITION
The communications industry continues to undergo various fundamental
regulatory, competitive and technological changes that make it difficult to
determine the form or degree of future regulation and competition affecting the
Company's telephone and cellular operations. These changes may have a
significant impact on the future financial performance of all communications
companies.
Events affecting the communications industry
In 1996 the United States Congress enacted the Telecommunications Act of 1996
(the "1996 Act"), which obligates LECs to permit competitors to interconnect
their facilities to the LEC's network and to take various other steps that are
designed to promote competition. The 1996 Act provides certain exemptions for
rural LECs such as those operated by the Company. Under the FCC's August 1996
order implementing most of the 1996 Act's interconnection provisions, rural LECs
have the burden of proving the availability of these exemptions.
Prior to and since the enactment of the 1996 Act, the FCC and a number of
state legislative and regulatory bodies have taken steps to foster local
exchange competition. Coincident with this recent movement toward increased
competition has been the gradual reduction of regulatory oversight of LECs.
These cumulative changes have led to the continued growth of various companies
providing services that compete with LECs' services. Wireless services entities
are also expected to increasingly compete with LECs.
The 1996 Act authorized the establishment of federal and state universal
service funds to provide support to eligible telecommunications carriers. In May
1997 the FCC adopted an order on universal service, as mandated by the 1996 Act.
In the order, the FCC ruled that rural telephone companies which are designated
eligible telecommunications carriers will continue to receive universal service
funding. Each of the Company's LECs has been so designated by its respective
state regulatory agency. As a result, the Company's LECs will continue to
receive payments under the federal support mechanisms currently in effect until
the FCC adopts funding support mechanisms based on forward-looking economic
costs, which it is required to do, but no earlier than January 2001.
As part of its universal service order, the FCC also established a new
program in January 1998 to provide up to $2.25 billion of discounted
telecommunications services annually to schools and libraries. In addition, the
FCC established a $400 million annual fund to provide discounted
telecommunications services for rural health care providers. All communications
carriers providing interstate telecommunications services, including the
Company's LECs and its cellular and long distance operations, are required to
contribute to these programs. The FCC has stated that LECs will recover their
funding contributions in their rates for interstate services. The Company's
contribution by its cellular and long distance operations for 1998, which was
passed on to its customers, was approximately $3.1 million.
In an access charge reform order adopted in May 1997, the FCC changed its
system of interstate access charges to make them compatible with the
deregulatory framework established by the 1996 Act. Such changes are primarily
applicable to price-cap companies. The Company's telephone subsidiaries
determine interstate revenues under rate of return regulation and are,
therefore, only minimally impacted by the access charge reform order. In July
1998 the FCC issued a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking to amend the access charge
rules for rate of return companies in a manner similar to that adopted for price
cap companies, subject to reviewing whether differences exist between price cap
companies and rate of return companies that would require different rules in
order to achieve the goal of fostering an efficient, competitive marketplace.
Comments were filed with the FCC in August 1998; the FCC has not yet issued a
final ruling on this matter.
In 1998 the FCC created a federal-state joint board to review jurisdictional
separations procedures through which the costs of regulated telecommunications
services are allocated to the interstate and intrastate jurisdictions.
In recent years the FCC has allocated additional frequency spectrum for
wireless technologies that compete or are expected to compete with cellular,
including PCS and mobile satellite services. The FCC has also authorized certain
specialized mobile radio service licensees to operate in a manner competitive
with cellular systems.
In September 1998 the FCC initiated a proceeding to represcribe the
authorized rate of return for interstate access services provided by LECs. The
FCC periodically represcribes this rate of return to ensure that the service
rates filed by incumbent LECs subject to rate of return regulation continue to
be just and reasonable. It is uncertain whether or by how much the FCC may lower
the authorized rate of return.
Competition to provide traditional telephone or wireless services is expected
to initially affect large urban areas to a greater extent than rural, suburban
and small urban areas such as those in which the Company's operations are
located. The Company does not believe such competition is likely to materially
affect it in the near term. The Company further believes that it may benefit
from having the opportunity to observe the effects of these developments in
large urban markets. The Company will continue to monitor ongoing changes in
regulation, competition and technology and consider which developments provide
the most favorable opportunities for the Company to pursue.
Recent events affecting the Company
During 1998 the Company's revenues from the USF increased approximately $62.3
million (of which $58.8 million was applicable to the PTI properties) to $127.6
million after increasing $16.1 million during 1997. Although the Company
anticipates that it may experience a reduction in its federal support revenues
at some point in the future, management believes it is premature to assess or
estimate the ultimate impact thereof. There can be no assurance, however, that
such impact will not be material.
During the last few years, several states in which the Company has
substantial operations took legislative or regulatory steps to further introduce
competition into the LEC business. While the Company is aware of only a few
companies which have requested authorization to provide local exchange service
in the Company's service areas, it is anticipated that similar action may be
taken by others in the future.
In June 1997 the Louisiana Public Service Commission ("LPSC") adopted a
Consumer Price Protection Plan (the "Consumer Plan"), effective July 1997, which
froze the local rates and access rates that can be charged by the Company's LECs
operating in Louisiana. Although the Consumer Plan has no specified term, the
LPSC is required to review it by mid-2000. The Company's Louisiana LECs have the
option to propose a new plan at any time if the LPSC determines that (i)
effective competition exists or (ii) unforeseen events threaten the LEC's
ability to provide adequate service or impair its financial health. Certain
other states have implemented various forms of alternative regulation plans, the
impact of which has not been material either individually or in the aggregate to
the results of operations of the Company.
Certain long distance carriers continue to request that the Company reduce
intrastate access tariffed rates for certain of its LECs. There is no assurance
that these requests will not result in reduced intrastate access revenues in the
future.
The Company anticipates that regulatory changes and competitive pressures may
result in future revenue reductions in its telephone operations. However, the
Company anticipates that such reductions may be minimized by increases in
revenues attributable to the continued demand for enhanced services and new
product offerings. While the Company expects its telephone revenues to continue
to grow, its internal telephone revenue growth rate may slow during upcoming
periods.
Other matters
The Company's regulated telephone operations are subject to the provisions of
SFAS 71, under which the Company is required to account for the economic effects
of the rate-making process, including the recognition of depreciation of plant
and equipment over lives approved by regulators. The ongoing applicability of
SFAS 71 to the Company's regulated telephone operations is being monitored due
to the changing regulatory, competitive and legislative environments. When the
regulated operations of the Company no longer qualify for the application of
SFAS 71, the net adjustments required will result in a material, extraordinary,
noncash charge against earnings. While the amount of such charge cannot be
precisely estimated at this time, management believes that the noncash,
after-tax, extraordinary charge would be between $350 million and $400 million.
See Note 12 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional
information.
The Company has certain obligations based on federal, state and local laws
relating to the protection of the environment. Costs of compliance through 1998
have not been material, and the Company currently has no reason to believe that
such costs will become material.
Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk.
The Company is not exposed to material future earnings or cash flow
exposures from changes in interest rates on long-term obligations since the
majority of the Company's long-term obligations are fixed rate. At December 31,
1998, the Company estimates that the fair value of the Company's long-term debt
was $2.7 billion which was determined by comparing the overall weighted average
rate of the Company's long-term debt of 6.6% and an overall weighted maturity of
14 years to terms and rates currently available in long-term financing markets.
Market risk is estimated as the potential decrease in fair value of the
Company's long-term debt resulting from a hypothetical increase of 66 basis
points in interest rates (ten percent of the Company's overall weighted average
borrowing rate). Such an increase in interest rates would result in
approximately a $115.3 million decrease in fair value of the Company's long-term
debt. In late 1997 and early 1998 the Company utilized interest rate hedge
contracts to manage its interest rate risk related to its January 1998 issuance
of $765.0 million of senior notes and debentures. During 1998 the Company did
not enter into any derivative financial instruments and is not currently
evaluating the future use of such financial instruments.
Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
Report of Management
The Shareholders
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.:
Management has prepared and is responsible for the Company's consolidated
financial statements. The consolidated financial statements have been prepared
in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and necessarily
include amounts determined using our best judgments and estimates with
consideration given to materiality.
The Company maintains internal control systems and related policies and
procedures designed to provide reasonable assurance that the accounting records
accurately reflect business transactions and that the transactions are in
accordance with management's authorization. The design, monitoring and revision
of the systems of internal control involve, among other things, our judgment
with respect to the relative cost and expected benefits of specific control
measures. Additionally, the Company maintains an internal auditing function
which independently evaluates the effectiveness of internal controls, policies
and procedures and formally reports on the adequacy and effectiveness thereof.
The Company's consolidated financial statements have been audited by KPMG
LLP, independent certified public accountants, who have expressed their opinion
with respect to the fairness of the consolidated financial statements. Their
audit was conducted in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards,
which includes the consideration of the Company's internal controls to the
extent necessary to form an independent opinion on the consolidated financial
statements prepared by management.
The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors is composed of directors who
are not officers or employees of the Company. The Committee meets periodically
with the independent certified public accountants, internal auditors and
management. The Committee considers the audit scope and discusses internal
control, financial and reporting matters. Both the independent and internal
auditors have free access to the Committee.
/s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- -------------------------
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
Independent Auditors' Report
The Board of Directors
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.:
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc. and subsidiaries as listed in Item 14a(i). In connection with
our audits of the consolidated financial statements, we also have audited the
financial statement schedules as listed in Item 14a(ii). These consolidated
financial statements and financial statement schedules are the responsibility of
the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these
consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules based on our
audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above
present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 1998 and 1997,
and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years
in the three-year period ended December 31, 1998, in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles. Also in our opinion, the related financial
statement schedules, when considered in relation to the basic consolidated
financial statements taken as a whole, present fairly, in all material respects,
the information set forth therein.
/s/ KPMG LLP
- -------------
KPMG LLP
Shreveport, Louisiana
January 28, 1999, except as to Note 21 which is as of February 23, 1999
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Income
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands, except
per share amounts,)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
OPERATING REVENUES
Telephone $ 1,091,610 530,597 451,538
Cellular 407,749 307,742 250,243
Other 77,726 63,182 47,896
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total operating revenues 1,577,085 901,521 749,677
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATING EXPENSES
Cost of sales and
operating expenses 768,720 474,256 394,360
Depreciation and amortization 328,554 159,495 132,021
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total operating expenses 1,097,274 633,751 526,381
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATING INCOME 479,811 267,770 223,296
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE)
Gain on sale or exchange of
assets, net 49,859 169,640 815
Interest expense (167,552) (56,474) (44,662)
Income from unconsolidated
cellular entities 32,869 27,794 26,952
Minority interest (12,797) (5,498) (6,675)
Other income and expense 5,268 5,109 3,916
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total other income (expense) (92,353) 140,571 (19,654)
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAX EXPENSE 387,458 408,341 203,642
Income tax expense 158,701 152,363 74,565
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
NET INCOME $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
============================================================================
BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE* $ 1.67 1.89 .96
============================================================================
DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE* $ 1.64 1.87 .95
============================================================================
DIVIDENDS PER COMMON SHARE* $ .173 .164 .16
============================================================================
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999. See Note 21.
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
</TABLE>
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other comprehensive income,
net of tax:
Unrealized holding gains arising
during period, net of tax of
$8,509 and $6,404 15,802 11,893 -
Reclassification adjustment for
gains included in net income,
net of tax of $11,027 (20,478) - -
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other comprehensive income,
net of tax (4,676) 11,893 -
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comprehensive income $ 224,081 267,871 129,077
============================================================================
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
</TABLE>
Century Telephone Enterprises, INC.
Consolidated Balance Sheets
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31,
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
ASSETS
<S> <C> <C>
CURRENT ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents $ 5,742 26,017
Accounts receivable
Customers, less allowance of
$4,155 and $5,954 130,289 143,613
Other 55,109 83,659
Materials and supplies, at average cost 23,709 21,994
Other 11,389 8,197
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total current assets 226,238 283,480
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NET PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 2,351,453 2,258,563
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INVESTMENTS AND OTHER ASSETS
Excess cost of net assets acquired,
less accumulated amortization
of $133,135 and $84,132 1,956,701 1,767,352
Other 401,063 400,006
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total investments and other assets 2,357,764 2,167,358
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL ASSETS $ 4,935,455 4,709,401
==============================================================================
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Current maturities of long-term debt $ 53,010 55,244
Accounts payable 87,627 83,378
Accrued expenses and other current liabilities
Salaries and benefits 36,900 38,225
Taxes 33,411 74,898
Interest 36,926 20,821
Other 24,249 25,229
Advance billings and customer deposits 32,721 24,213
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total current liabilities 304,844 322,008
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LONG-TERM DEBT 2,558,000 2,609,541
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEFERRED CREDITS AND OTHER LIABILITIES 541,129 477,580
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
Common stock, $1.00 par value, authorized
175,000,000 shares, issued and outstanding
138,082,926* and 91,103,674 shares 138,083 91,104
Paid-in capital 451,535 469,586
Unrealized holding gain on investments,
net of taxes 7,217 11,893
Retained earnings 932,611 728,033
Unearned ESOP shares (6,070) (8,450)
Preferred stock - non-redeemable 8,106 8,106
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total stockholders' equity 1,531,482 1,300,272
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY $ 4,935,455 4,709,401
==============================================================================
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999. See Note 21.
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
</TABLE>
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
Adjustments to reconcile net income
to net cash provided by
operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 328,554 159,495 132,021
Income from unconsolidated
cellular entities (32,869) (27,794) (26,952)
Minority interest 12,797 5,498 6,675
Deferred income taxes 17,713 16,230 7,935
Gain on sales of assets (49,859) (169,640) (815)
Changes in current assets and
current liabilities:
Accounts receivable (15,227) 7,649 (4,353)
Accounts payable 4,249 (25,440) 5,103
Other accrued taxes (34,908) 58,205 1,285
Other current assets and other
current liabilities, net 15,033 7,263 6,220
Increase (decrease) in other
noncurrent liabilities (1,706) 2,173 4,305
Other, net (4,760) 7,702 4,151
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash provided by operating
activities 467,774 297,319 264,652
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Acquisitions, net of cash acquired (225,569) (1,543,814) (46,327)
Payments for property, plant
and equipment (310,919) (181,225) (222,885)
Proceeds from sales of assets 132,307 202,705 -
Investment in unconsolidated personal
communications services entity - - 18,900
Distributions from unconsolidated
cellular entities 26,515 16,825 15,648
Purchase of life insurance
investment, net (2,786) (12,962) (5,944)
Proceeds from note receivable - 22,500 1,667
Other, net 4,807 (7,156) (2,850)
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash used in investing
activities (375,645) (1,503,127) (241,791)
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Proceeds from issuance of
long-term debt 957,668 1,312,546 59,649
Payments of long-term debt (1,015,015) (79,203) (57,021)
Payment of hedge contracts (40,237) - -
Notes payable, net - - (14,199)
Proceeds from issuance of
common stock 15,033 14,156 10,089
Payment of debt issuance costs (6,625) - -
Cash dividends (24,179) (22,671) (21,775)
Other, net 951 (1,405) 258
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash provided by (used in)
financing activities (112,404) 1,223,423 (22,999)
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net increase (decrease) in cash
and cash equivalents (20,275) 17,615 (138)
Cash and cash equivalents at
beginning of year 26,017 8,402 8,540
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT
END OF YEAR $ 5,742 26,017 8,402
===========================================================================
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
</TABLE>
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars and shares in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
COMMON STOCK
Balance at beginning of year $ 91,104 59,859 59,114
Issuance of common stock for acquisitions 28 75 257
Conversion of convertible securities into
common stock 169 237 33
Issuance of common stock through
dividend reinvestment, incentive and
benefit plans 754 565 455
Three-for-two stock split 46,028 30,368 -
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 138,083 91,104 59,859
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PAID-IN CAPITAL
Balance at beginning of year 469,586 474,607 453,584
Issuance of common stock for
acquisitions 1,059 3,241 8,201
Conversion of convertible securities
into common stock 3,131 4,998 163
Issuance of common stock through
dividend reinvestment, incentive
and benefit plans 14,279 13,591 9,676
Amortization of unearned compensation
and other 9,508 3,517 2,983
Three-for-two stock split (46,028) (30,368) -
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 451,535 469,586 474,607
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNREALIZED HOLDING GAIN ON
INVESTMENTS, NET OF TAXES
Balance at beginning of year 11,893 - -
Change in unrealized holding gain on
investments, net of taxes (4,676) 11,893 -
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 7,217 11,893 -
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RETAINED EARNINGS
Balance at beginning of year 728,033 494,726 387,424
Net income 228,757 255,978 129,077
Cash dividends declared
Common stock - $.173, $.164 and
$.16 per share* (23,771) (22,211) (21,355)
Preferred stock (408) (460) (420)
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 932,611 728,033 494,726
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UNEARNED ESOP SHARES
Balance at beginning of year (8,450) (11,080) (13,960)
Release of ESOP shares 2,380 2,630 2,880
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year (6,070) (8,450) (11,080)
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PREFERRED STOCK - NON-REDEEMABLE
Balance at beginning of year 8,106 10,041 2,262
Issuance of preferred stock
for acquisitions - - 7,975
Conversion of preferred stock into
common stock - (1,935) (196)
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 8,106 8,106 10,041
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY $1,531,482 1,300,272 1,028,153
===============================================================================
COMMON SHARES OUTSTANDING
Balance at beginning of year 91,104 59,859 59,114
Issuance of common stock for
acquisitions 28 75 257
Conversion of convertible securities
into common stock 169 237 33
Issuance of common stock through
dividend reinvestment, incentive
and benefit plans 754 565 455
Three-for-two stock split 46,028 30,368 -
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance at end of year 138,083 91,104 59,859
===============================================================================
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999. See Note 21.
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.
</TABLE>
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
December 31, 1998
(1) Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
Principles of consolidation - The consolidated financial statements of Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and its subsidiaries (the "Company") include the
accounts of Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. ("Century") and its
majority-owned subsidiaries and partnerships. The Company's regulated telephone
operations are subject to the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting
Standards No. 71, "Accounting for the Effects of Certain Types of Regulation."
Investments in cellular entities where the Company does not own a majority
interest are accounted for using the equity method of accounting.
Estimates - The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and
disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the
reporting period. Actual results may differ from those estimates.
Revenue recognition - Revenues are recognized when earned. Certain of the
Company's telephone subsidiaries participate in revenue sharing arrangements
with other telephone companies for interstate revenue and for certain intrastate
revenue. Such sharing arrangements are funded by toll revenue and/or access
charges within state jurisdictions and by access charges in the interstate
market. Revenues earned through the various sharing arrangements are initially
recorded based on the Company's estimates.
Property, plant and equipment - Telephone plant is stated substantially at
original cost. Normal retirements of telephone plant are charged against
accumulated depreciation, along with the costs of removal, less salvage, with no
gain or loss recognized. Renewals and betterments of plant and equipment are
capitalized while repairs, as well as renewals of minor items, are charged to
operating expense. Depreciation of telephone plant is provided on the straight
line method, using class or overall group rates acceptable to regulatory
authorities; such rates range from 1.8% to 25%.
Non-telephone property is stated at cost and, when sold or retired, a gain or
loss is recognized. Depreciation of such property is provided on the straight
line method over estimated service lives ranging from three to 30 years.
Impairment of long-lived assets and excess cost of net assets acquired
(goodwill) - The carrying value of long-lived assets, including allocated
goodwill, is reviewed for impairment at least annually, or whenever events or
changes in circumstances indicate that such carrying value may not be
recoverable, by assessing the recoverability of such carrying value through
estimated undiscounted future net cash flows expected to be generated by the
assets or the acquired business. The excess cost of net assets acquired of
substantially all of the Company's acquisitions accounted for as purchases is
being amortized over 40 years.
Affiliated transactions - Certain service subsidiaries of Century provide
installation and maintenance services, materials and supplies, and managerial,
technical and accounting services to subsidiaries. In addition, Century provides
and bills management services to subsidiaries and in certain instances makes
interest bearing advances to finance construction of plant and purchases of
equipment. These transactions are recorded by the Company's telephone
subsidiaries at their cost to the extent permitted by regulatory authorities.
Intercompany profit on transactions with regulated affiliates is limited to a
reasonable return on investment and has not been eliminated in connection with
consolidating the results of operations of Century and its subsidiaries.
Intercompany profit on transactions with nonregulated affiliates has been
eliminated.
Income taxes - Century files a consolidated federal income tax return with its
eligible subsidiaries. The Company uses the asset and liability method of
accounting for income taxes under which deferred tax assets and liabilities are
established for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between
the financial statement carrying amounts of assets and liabilities and their
respective tax bases. Investment tax credits related to telephone plant have
been deferred and are being amortized as a reduction of federal income tax
expense over the estimated useful lives of the assets giving rise to the
credits.
Derivative financial instruments - During 1997 the Company entered into certain
interest rate hedge contracts in anticipation of a public debt issuance,
utilizing such hedge contracts to manage interest rate exposure. The hedge
contracts were treated as off-balance sheet financial instruments. In connection
with the settlement of these contracts, all losses related to these transactions
have been deferred and amortized as interest expense over the life of the
underlying debt issuance. Such contracts were settled in 1998. See Note 6 for
additional information. The Company does not utilize derivative financial
instruments for trading or other speculative purposes.
Earnings per share - During 1997 the Company adopted Statement of Financial
Accounting Standards No. 128 ("SFAS 128"), "Earnings per Share." SFAS 128
established requirements for the computation of basic earnings per share and
diluted earnings per share and was effective for financial statements issued for
periods ending after December 15, 1997. Earnings per share amounts for prior
periods have been restated to conform with SFAS 128.
Stock compensation - The Company accounts for employee stock compensation plans
in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, "Accounting for
Stock Issued to Employees" as allowed by Financial Accounting Standards No. 123,
"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation."
Cash equivalents - The Company considers short-term investments with a maturity
at date of purchase of three months or less to be cash equivalents.
(2) Acquisitions
On December 1, 1997, Century acquired Pacific Telecom, Inc. ("PTI") in
exchange for $1.503 billion cash. To finance the acquisition, which was
accounted for as a purchase, Century borrowed $1.288 billion under its $1.6
billion senior unsecured credit facility (the "Senior Credit Facility") dated
August 28, 1997 with NationsBank of Texas, N.A. and a syndicate of other
lenders. Century paid the remainder of the PTI acquisition price with available
cash.
As a result of the acquisition, the Company acquired (i) telephone access
lines located in four midwestern states, seven western states and Alaska, (ii)
cellular subscribers in two midwestern states and Alaska and (iii) various
wireless, cable television and other communications assets.
The following pro forma information represents the consolidated results of
operations of the Company as if the PTI acquisition had been consummated as of
January 1, 1997 and 1996.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands, except
per share amounts)
(unaudited)
<S> <C> <C>
Operating revenues $ 1,392,268 1,245,036
Net income 256,992 120,632
Diluted earnings per share 1.87 .89
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
The pro forma information is not necessarily indicative of the operating
results that would have occurred if the PTI acquisition had been consummated as
of January 1 of each respective period, nor is it necessarily indicative of
future operating results. The actual results of operations of PTI have been
included in the Company's consolidated financial statements only from the date
of acquisition.
On December 1, 1998, the Company acquired the assets of certain local
telephone and directory operations in parts of northern and central Wisconsin
from affiliates of Ameritech Corporation ("Ameritech"), in exchange for
approximately $221 million cash. The assets included (i) access lines and
related property and equipment in 21 predominantly rural communities in
Wisconsin and (ii) Ameritech's directory publishing operations that relate to
nine telephone directories.
(3) Investments and Other Assets
Investments and other assets at December 31, 1998 and 1997 were composed of
the following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
Excess cost of net assets acquired, less
accumulated amortization $ 1,956,701 1,767,352
Investments in unconsolidated cellular entities 118,016 189,363
Cash surrender value of life insurance
contracts, net 84,976 78,658
Marketable equity securities 29,496 40,570
Deferred hedge contracts 38,027 -
Other 130,548 91,415
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 2,357,764 2,167,358
================================================================================
</TABLE>
As a result of the purchase of PTI, the Company recorded approximately $1.2
billion of excess cost of net assets acquired in 1997.
Goodwill amortization of $47.8 million, $16.6 million and $12.8 million for
1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively, is included in "Depreciation and
amortization" in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income.
Included in investments in unconsolidated cellular entities at December 31,
1997 was approximately $67.0 million of costs allocated to licenses from
acquisitions made by PTI prior to Century's acquisition of PTI. Upon
finalization of the PTI purchase price allocation, such costs were assigned to
excess cost of net assets acquired.
The Company's investments in marketable equity securities are classified as
available for sale and are reported at fair value with unrealized holding gains
and losses reported, net of taxes, as a separate component of stockholders'
equity. As of December 31, 1998, gross unrealized holding gains of the Company's
marketable equity securities were $11.1 million.
(4) Property, Plant and Equipment
Net property, plant and equipment at December 31, 1998 and 1997 was composed
of the following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
Telephone, at original cost
Cable and wire $ 2,046,638 1,843,002
Central office 1,197,438 1,070,477
General support 269,431 256,203
Information origination/termination 73,984 65,304
Construction in progress 66,241 53,382
Other 6,520 7,492
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3,660,252 3,295,860
Accumulated depreciation (1,661,315) (1,375,835)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1,998,937 1,920,025
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cellular, at cost
Cell site 316,706 284,599
General support 82,618 66,400
Construction in progress 23,733 23,664
Other 5,927 5,555
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
428,984 380,218
Accumulated depreciation (178,569) (133,357)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
250,415 246,861
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Corporate and other, at cost
General support 180,359 148,883
Other 20,063 20,537
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200,422 169,420
Accumulated depreciation (98,321) (77,743)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
102,101 91,677
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net property, plant and equipment $ 2,351,453 2,258,563
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Depreciation expense was $280.5 million, $142.6 million and $118.9 million in
1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. The composite depreciation rate for telephone
properties was 6.9% for 1998, 7.4% for 1997 and 7.5% for 1996.
(5) Investments in Unconsolidated Cellular Entities
The Company's share of earnings from cellular entities in which it does not
own a majority interest was $34.1 million, $29.4 million and $28.2 million in
1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively, and is included, net of $1.2 million, $1.6
million and $1.3 million of amortization of goodwill attributable to such
investments, in "Income from unconsolidated cellular entities" in the Company's
Consolidated Statements of Income. Over 74% of the 1998 income from
unconsolidated cellular entities was attributable to the following investments.
Ownership interest
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lafayette MSA Limited Partnership 49%
GTE Mobilnet of Austin Limited Partnership 35%
Milwaukee SMSA Limited Partnership 18%
Alltel Cellular Associates of Arkansas Limited Partnership 36%
Detroit SMSA Limited Partnership 3%
Michigan RSA #9 Limited Partnership 43%
Cellular North Michigan Network General Partnership 43%
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following summarizes the unaudited combined assets, liabilities and
equity, and the unaudited combined results of operations, of the cellular
entities in which the Company's investments (as of December 31, 1998 and 1997)
were accounted for by the equity method.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
(unaudited)
<S> <C> <C>
Assets
Current assets $ 293,339 322,863
Property and other noncurrent assets 759,665 767,123
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 1,053,004 1,089,986
================================================================================
Liabilities and equity
Current liabilities $ 109,787 157,492
Noncurrent liabilities 25,099 25,413
Equity 918,118 907,081
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 1,053,004 1,089,986
================================================================================
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
(unaudited)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Results of operations
Revenues $ 1,281,803 1,277,524 985,788
Operating income $ 430,859 419,246 338,554
Net income $ 435,744 395,990 339,040
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
At December 31, 1998, $59.0 million of the Company's consolidated retained
earnings represented undistributed earnings of unconsolidated cellular entities.
(6) Long-Term Debt
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
Century
5.61%* Senior Credit Facility, due through 2002 $ 752,063 1,535,000
6.875% senior notes, due 2028 425,000 -
6.30% senior notes, due 2008 240,000 -
6.15% senior notes, due 2005 100,000 -
8.25% senior notes, due 2024 100,000 100,000
7.20% senior notes, due 2025 100,000 100,000
6.39%* notes payable to banks, due 2002 40,000 30,000
7.75% senior notes, due 2004 50,000 50,000
6.55% senior notes, due 2005 50,000 50,000
9.38% senior notes, due through 2003 18,900 21,200
6.64%* Employee Stock Ownership Plan commitment,
due in installments through 2004 6,070 8,450
9.85%* notes, due in installments through 2006 266 304
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Century 1,882,299 1,894,954
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Subsidiaries
First mortgage debt
5.97%* notes, payable to agencies of the United
States government and cooperative lending
associations, due in installments through 2025 341,817 348,971
7.98% notes, due through 2002 5,871 5,969
Other debt
7.21%* unsecured medium-term notes,
due through 2008 335,667 360,678
7.43%* notes, due in installments through 2020 29,301 40,805
6.50% note, due in installments through 2001 9,308 12,040
6.15%* capital lease obligations, due
through 2003 6,747 1,368
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total subsidiaries 728,711 769,831
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total long-term debt 2,611,010 2,664,785
Less current maturities 53,010 55,244
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Long-term debt, excluding current maturities $ 2,558,000 2,609,541
================================================================================
* weighted average interest rate at December 31, 1998
</TABLE>
The approximate annual debt maturities for the five years subsequent to
December 31, 1998 are as follows: 1999 - $53.0 million; 2000 - $62.6 million;
2001 - $144.5 million; 2002 - $735.0 million; and 2003 - $67.5 million.
Short-term borrowings of $40.0 million at December 31, 1998 were classified
as long-term debt on the accompanying balance sheet as the Company had adequate
committed amounts available under long-term revolving facilities.
Certain of the Company's loan agreements contain various restrictions, among
which are limitations regarding issuance of additional debt, payment of cash
dividends, reacquisition of the Company's capital stock and other matters. At
December 31, 1998, all of the consolidated retained earnings reflected on the
balance sheet was available for the declaration of dividends.
The transfer of funds from certain consolidated subsidiaries to Century is
restricted by various loan agreements. Subsidiaries which have loans from
government agencies and cooperative lending associations, or have issued first
mortgage bonds, generally may not loan or advance any funds to Century, but may
pay dividends if certain financial ratios are met. At December 31, 1998,
restricted net assets of subsidiaries were $604.4 million. Subsidiaries'
retained earnings in excess of amounts restricted by debt covenants totaled
$726.1 million.
Most of the Company's telephone property, plant and equipment is pledged to
secure the long-term debt of subsidiaries.
On January 15, 1998, Century issued $100 million of 7-year, 6.15% senior
notes (Series E); $240 million of 10-year, 6.3% senior notes (Series F); and
$425 million of 30-year, 6.875% debentures (Series G) under its shelf
registration statements. The net proceeds of approximately $758 million
(excluding payment obligations of approximately $40 million related to interest
rate hedging effected in connection with the offering) were used to reduce the
bank indebtedness incurred under the Senior Credit Facility. In addition, the
Senior Credit Facility's committed amount was reduced from $1.6 billion to $880
million in accordance with its terms. This facility carries floating rate
interest based upon London InterBank Offered Rates for short-term periods.
In mid-January 1998 the Company settled numerous interest rate hedge
contracts that had been entered into in anticipation of the above-mentioned debt
issuances. The amounts paid by the Company upon settlement of the hedge
contracts aggregated approximately $40 million, which is being amortized as
interest expense over the lives of the underlying debt instruments. The
effective weighted average interest rate of the debt (after giving consideration
to these payment obligations) is 7.15%. In March 1998 the Company paid
approximately $250,000 upon settlement of its remaining interest rate hedge
contracts.
Century's telephone subsidiaries had approximately $135.1 million in
commitments for long-term financing from the Rural Utilities Service available
at December 31, 1998. Approximately $332.6 million of additional borrowings were
available to the Company through committed lines of credit with various banks.
(7) Deferred Credits and Other Liabilities
Deferred credits and other liabilities at December 31, 1998 and 1997 were
composed of the following:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
Deferred federal and state income taxes $ 332,151 272,290
Accrued postretirement benefit costs 109,000 99,429
Minority interest 44,970 47,695
Regulatory liability - income taxes 17,380 22,856
Deferred investment tax credits 3,939 6,355
Other 33,689 28,955
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 541,129 477,580
================================================================================
</TABLE>
(8) Postretirement Benefits
The Company sponsors defined benefit health care plans that provide
postretirement benefits to substantially all retired full-time employees.
Net periodic postretirement benefit cost for 1998, 1997 and 1996 included the
following components:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Service cost $ 5,519 2,578 2,354
Interest cost 10,744 5,047 4,212
Expected return on plan assets (3,250) (458) -
Amortization of unrecognized actuarial losses 430 292 475
Amortization of unrecognized prior service cost 121 121 121
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net periodic postretirement benefit cost $ 13,564 7,580 7,162
================================================================================
</TABLE>
The following is a reconciliation for the benefit obligation and the plan
assets.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Change in benefit obligation
Benefit obligation at beginning of year $ 152,632 59,157 60,128
Service cost 5,519 2,578 2,354
Interest cost 10,744 5,047 4,212
Participant contributions 298 119 96
Acquisition - 80,166 -
Actuarial (gain) loss 9,720 7,789 (5,420)
Benefits paid (6,590) (2,224) (2,213)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Benefit obligation at end of year $ 172,323 152,632 59,157
================================================================================
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Change in plan assets (primarily listed
stocks and bonds)
Fair value of plan assets at beginning
of year $ 34,618 - -
Return on assets 4,080 - -
Employer contributions 749 - -
Acquisition - 34,618 -
Benefits paid (3,648) - -
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fair value of plan assets at end of year $ 35,799 34,618 -
================================================================================
</TABLE>
The following table sets forth the amounts recognized as liabilities for
postretirement benefits at December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Benefit obligation $ (172,323) (152,632) (59,157)
Fair value of plan assets 35,799 34,618 -
Unamortized prior service cost 1,060 1,182 1,303
Unrecognized net actuarial loss 23,972 14,622 6,986
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Accrued benefit cost $ (111,492) (102,210) (50,868)
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Assumptions used in accounting for postretirement benefits as of December 31,
1998 and 1997 were:
1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weighted average assumptions
Discount rate 6.5-6.75% 7.0
Expected return on plan assets 10.0% 10.0
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For measurement purposes, a 6.0-7.4% annual rate in the per capita cost of
covered health care benefits was assumed for 1999 and beyond. A
one-percentage-point change in assumed health care cost rates would have the
following effects:
1-Percentage 1-Percentage
Point Increase Point Decrease
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
Effect on total of service and
interest cost components $ 1,012 (934)
Effect on postretirement
benefit obligation $ 9,884 (9,089)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(9) Stockholders' Equity
Common stock - At December 31, 1998, unissued shares of Century common stock
were reserved as follows:
December 31, 1998
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(In thousands)
Incentive compensation program 6,488
Acquisitions 4,825
Employee stock purchase plan 1,016
Conversion of convertible preferred stock 511
Other employee benefit plans 3,849
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16,689
================================================================================
Under Century's Articles of Incorporation each share of common stock
beneficially owned continuously by the same person since May 30, 1987 generally
entitles the holder thereof to ten votes per share. All other shares entitle the
holder to one vote per share. At December 31, 1998, the holders of 12.6 million
shares of common stock were entitled to ten votes per share.
Preferred stock - As of December 31, 1998, Century had 2.0 million shares of
preferred stock, $25 par value per share, authorized. At December 31, 1998 and
1997, there were 324,238 shares of outstanding preferred stock. Holders of
outstanding Century preferred stock are entitled to receive cumulative
dividends, receive preferential distributions equal to $25 per share plus unpaid
dividends upon Century's liquidation and vote as a single class with the holders
of common stock.
Shareholders' Rights Plan - In 1996 the Board of Directors declared a dividend
of one preference share purchase right for each common share outstanding. Such
rights become exercisable if and when a potential acquiror takes certain steps
to acquire 15% or more of Century's common stock. Upon the occurrence of such an
acquisition, each right held by shareholders other than the acquiror may be
exercised to receive that number of shares of common stock or other securities
of Century (or, in certain situations, the acquiring company) which at the time
of such transaction will have a market value of two times the exercise price of
the right.
Stock split - On February 25, 1998, Century's Board of Directors declared a
three-for-two common stock split effected as a 50% stock dividend in March 1998.
An amount equal to the par value of the additional common shares issued pursuant
to the stock split was reflected as a transfer from paid-in-capital to common
stock on the consolidated financial statements for 1997. See Note 21 for
additional information concerning a stock split in early 1999.
(10) Earnings Per Share
Basic earnings per share amounts are determined on the basis of the weighted
average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings
per share give effect to all potential dilutive common shares that were
outstanding during the period.
The following is a reconciliation of the numerators and denominators of the
basic and diluted earnings per share computations:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars, except per share
amounts, and shares in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Income (Numerator):
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
Dividends applicable to preferred stock (408) (460) (420)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net income applicable to common stock for
computing basic earnings per share 228,349 255,518 128,657
Dividends applicable to preferred stock 408 460 420
Interest on convertible securities,
net of taxes 372 480 579
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net income as adjusted for purposes of
computing diluted earnings per share $ 229,129 256,458 129,656
================================================================================
Shares (Denominator):
Weighted average number of shares
outstanding during period 137,568 135,637 134,147
Employee Stock Ownership Plan shares
not committed to be released (558) (653) (747)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weighted average number of shares
outstanding during period for computing
basic earnings per share 137,010 134,984 133,400
Incremental common shares attributable
to dilutive securities:
Conversion of convertible securities 1,274 1,676 1,958
Shares issuable under stock option plan 1,821 752 622
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of shares as adjusted for purposes
of computing diluted earnings per share 140,105 137,412 135,980
================================================================================
Basic earnings per share* $ 1.67 1.89 .96
================================================================================
Diluted earnings per share* $ 1.64 1.87 .95
================================================================================
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999.
</TABLE>
The weighted average number of options to purchase shares of common stock
that were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share because
the exercise price of the option was greater than the average market price of
the common stock was 3,000, 1,099,000 and 1,415,000 for 1998, 1997 and 1996,
respectively.
(11) Stock Option Program
Century has an incentive compensation program which allows the Board of
Directors, through a subcommittee to the Compensation Committee, to grant
incentives to employees in any one or a combination of the following forms:
incentive and non-qualified stock options; stock appreciation rights; restricted
stock; and performance shares. As of December 31, 1998, Century had reserved 6.5
million shares of common stock which may be issued under the incentive
compensation program.
Under the program, options have been granted to employees at a price either
equal to or exceeding the then-current market price and all of the options
expire ten years after the date of grant.
During 1998 the Company granted 121,667 options (the "1998 Options") at
market price. The weighted average fair value of each of the 1998 Options was
estimated as of the date of grant to be $8.88 using an option-pricing model with
the following assumptions: dividend yield - .5%; expected volatility - 20%;
risk-free interest rate - 4.8%; and expected option life - seven years.
During 1997 the Company granted 1,293,909 options (the "1997 Options") at
market price. The weighted average fair value of each of the 1997 Options was
estimated as of the date of grant to be $5.68 using an option-pricing model with
the following assumptions: dividend yield - .8%; expected volatility - 25%;
risk-free interest rate - 6.5%; and expected option life - eight years.
Stock option transactions during 1998, 1997 and 1996 were as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Number Average
of options price
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C>
Outstanding December 31, 1995 5,929,196 $ 11.32
Exercised (657,906) 8.32
Forfeited (28,239) 13.01
- ---------------------------------------------------------
Outstanding December 31, 1996 5,243,051 12.11
Exercised (889,173) 10.18
Granted 1,293,909 13.51
Forfeited (38,856) 13.39
- ---------------------------------------------------------
Outstanding December 31, 1997 5,608,931 12.73
Exercised (937,985) 11.41
Granted 121,667 26.25
Forfeited (12,000) 13.33
- ---------------------------------------------------------
Outstanding December 31, 1998 4,780,613 13.35
=========================================================
Exercisable December 31, 1997 4,712,532 12.59
=========================================================
Exercisable December 31, 1998 4,188,660 13.13
=========================================================
</TABLE>
The following tables summarize certain information about Century's stock
options at December 31, 1998.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Options outstanding
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weighted average
Range of remaining contractual Weighted average
exercise prices Number of options life outstanding exercise price
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
$ 9.63-12.30 2,271,662 3.5 years $ 11.04
13.33-17.64 2,391,554 7.1 14.87
23.03-26.05 67,133 9.1 25.88
26.98-31.54 50,264 9.1 28.96
---------
9.63-31.54 4,780,613 7.3 13.35
=========
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Options exercisable
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Range of Number of Weighted average
exercise prices options exercisable exercise price
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C>
$ 9.63-12.30 2,271,662 $ 11.04
13.33-17.64 1,861,935 15.27
23.03-26.05 31,655 26.05
26.98-31.54 23,408 28.65
---------
9.63-31.54 4,188,660 13.13
=========
</TABLE>
The Company applies Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, "Accounting
for Stock Issued to Employees," in accounting for its program. Accordingly, no
compensation cost has been recognized for the program. If compensation cost for
Century's program had been determined consistent with SFAS 123, the Company's
net income and earnings per share on a pro forma basis for 1998, 1997 and 1996
would have been as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands,
except per share amounts)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net income
As reported $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
Pro forma $ 227,113 252,773 129,077
Diluted earnings per share
As reported $ 1.64 1.87 .95
Pro forma $ 1.62 1.84 .95
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
(12) Accounting for the Effects of Regulation
The Company's regulated telephone operations are subject to the provisions of
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 71 ("SFAS 71"), "Accounting for
the Effects of Certain Types of Regulation." Actions of a regulator can provide
reasonable assurance of the existence of an asset, reduce or eliminate the value
of an asset and impose a liability on a regulated enterprise. Such regulatory
assets and liabilities are required to be recorded and, accordingly, reflected
in the balance sheet of an entity subject to SFAS 71.
The Company's consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 1998 included
regulatory assets of approximately $5.9 million and regulatory liabilities of
approximately $16.0 million exclusive of (i) property, plant and equipment, (ii)
accumulated depreciation and (iii) deferred income taxes and deferred investment
tax credits associated with regulatory assets and liabilities. The $5.9 million
of regulatory assets included assets established in connection with
postretirement benefits ($1.0 million), income taxes ($2.1 million) and deferred
financing costs ($2.7 million). The $16.0 million of regulatory liabilities was
established in connection with the adoption of Statement of Financial Accounting
Standards No. 109, "Accounting For Income Taxes." Net deferred income tax assets
related to the regulatory assets and liabilities quantified above were $3.5
million.
Property, plant and equipment of the Company's regulated telephone operations
has been depreciated using generally the straight line method over lives
approved by regulators. Such depreciable lives have generally exceeded the
depreciable lives used by nonregulated entities. In addition, in accordance with
regulatory accounting, retirements of regulated telephone property have been
charged to accumulated depreciation, along with the costs of removal, less
salvage, with no gain or loss recognized. These accounting policies have
resulted in accumulated depreciation being significantly less than if the
Company's telephone operations had not been regulated.
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 101 ("SFAS 101"), "Regulated
Enterprises - Accounting for the Discontinuance of Application of FASB Statement
No. 71," specifies the accounting required when an enterprise ceases to meet the
criteria for application of SFAS 71. SFAS 101 requires the elimination of the
effects of any actions of regulators that have been recognized as assets and
liabilities in accordance with SFAS 71 but would not have been recognized as
assets and liabilities by enterprises in general, along with an adjustment of
certain accumulated depreciation accounts to reflect the difference between
recorded depreciation and the amount of depreciation that would have been
recorded had the Company's telephone operations not been subject to rate
regulation. SFAS 101 further provides that the carrying amounts of property,
plant and equipment are to be adjusted only to the extent the assets are
impaired and that impairment shall be judged in the same manner as for
enterprises in general. Deferred tax liabilities and deferred investment tax
credits will be impacted based on the change in the temporary differences for
property, plant and equipment and accumulated depreciation.
The ongoing applicability of SFAS 71 to the Company's regulated telephone
operations is being monitored due to the changing regulatory, competitive and
legislative environments, and it is possible that changes in regulation,
legislation or competition or in the demand for regulated services or products
could result in the Company's telephone operations no longer being subject to
SFAS 71 in the near future. When the regulated operations of the Company no
longer qualify for the application of SFAS 71, the net adjustments required will
result in a material, noncash charge against earnings which will be reported as
an extraordinary item. While the effect of implementing SFAS 101 cannot be
precisely estimated at this time, management believes that the noncash,
after-tax, extraordinary charge would be between $350 million and $400 million.
For regulatory purposes, the accounting and reporting of the Company's telephone
subsidiaries will not be affected by the discontinued application of SFAS 71.
(13) Income Taxes
The tax effects of temporary differences that gave rise to significant
portions of the deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities at December 31,
1998 and 1997 were as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
Deferred tax assets
Postretirement benefit costs $ 38,023 35,826
Regulatory support 15,509 15,681
Net operating loss carry forwards of an
acquired subsidiary 6,716 8,013
Regulatory liability 6,230 8,000
Long-term debt 3,382 3,957
Other employee benefits 8,812 8,281
Other 9,609 8,788
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gross deferred tax assets 88,281 88,546
Less valuation allowance (6,716) (8,013)
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net deferred tax assets 81,565 80,533
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Deferred tax liabilities
Property, plant and equipment, primarily
due to depreciation differences (288,365) (303,500)
Excess cost of net assets acquired (8,500) (7,177)
Basis difference in assets to be sold (66,998) (3,382)
Deferred debt costs (13,309) -
Customer base (11,381) -
Marketable equity securities (8,928) (11,840)
Intercompany profits (3,128) (3,112)
Other (13,107) (23,812)
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gross deferred tax liabilities (413,716) (352,823)
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net deferred tax liability $(332,151) (272,290)
===========================================================================
</TABLE>
Income tax expense for the years ended December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996 was
as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Federal
Current $ 117,490 122,861 60,530
Deferred 18,048 14,768 7,390
State
Current 25,015 13,272 6,100
Deferred (1,852) 1,462 545
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 158,701 152,363 74,565
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Income tax expense was allocated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Net tax expense in the consolidated
statements of income $ 158,701 152,363 74,565
Stockholders' equity, primarily for
compensation expense for tax purposes in
excess of amounts recognized
for financial reporting purposes (6,579) (2,554) (1,866)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ 152,122 149,809 72,699
================================================================================
</TABLE>
The following is a reconciliation from the statutory federal income tax rate
to the Company's effective income tax rate:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Percentage of pre-tax income)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Statutory federal income tax rate 35.0% 35.0 35.0
State income taxes, net of federal income
tax benefit 3.9 2.3 2.1
Amortization of nondeductible excess cost
of net assets acquired 3.3 1.1 1.8
Amortization of investment tax credits (.6) (.4) (1.1)
Amortization of regulatory liability (.6) (.5) (.9)
Other, net - (.2) (.3)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Effective income tax rate 41.0% 37.3 36.6
================================================================================
</TABLE>
(14) Sale or Exchange of Assets
In connection with the first quarter 1998 acquisition of Brooks Fiber
Properties, Inc. ("Brooks") by MCIWorldCom, Inc. ("WorldCom"), the Company's
551,000 shares of Brooks' common stock were converted into approximately 1.0
million shares of WorldCom common stock. The Company recorded such conversion at
fair value which resulted in a pre-tax gain of approximately $22.8 million
($14.8 million after-tax; $.11 per diluted share). In the second quarter of
1998, the Company sold 750,000 shares of WorldCom common stock for $35.6 million
cash and recorded a pre-tax gain of $8.7 million ($5.7 million after tax; $.04
per diluted share).
In the second quarter of 1998, the Company sold its minority interests in two
non-strategic cellular entities for approximately $31.0 million cash which
resulted in a pre-tax gain of $21.8 million ($12.3 million after-tax; $.09 per
diluted share). Additionally, in the second quarter the Company wrote off its
minority investment in a start-up company.
During the second quarter of 1998, the Company also sold various other
properties that were acquired in the PTI acquisition, including, but not limited
to, the Company's submarine cable operations. The Company utilized the proceeds
from these transactions to reduce its debt associated with the acquisition of
PTI. In accordance with purchase accounting, no gain or loss was recorded upon
the disposition of these assets.
In May 1997 the Company sold its majority-owned competitive access subsidiary
to Brooks in exchange for approximately 4.3 million shares of Brooks' common
stock. The Company recorded a pre-tax gain of approximately $71 million ($46
million after-tax; $.34 per diluted share). In November 1997 the Company sold
approximately 3.8 million shares of Brooks' common stock for $202.7 million cash
and recorded a pre-tax gain of approximately $108 million ($66 million
after-tax; $.48 per diluted share).
(15) Retirement and Savings Plans
Century sponsors an Outside Directors' Retirement Plan and a Supplemental
Executive Retirement Plan to provide directors and officers, respectively, with
supplemental retirement, death and disability benefits. In addition, as of
December 31, 1998, the bargaining unit employees of a subsidiary are provided
benefits under a defined benefit pension plan and substantially all of the
employees of PTI are covered under a separate defined benefit pension plan.
The following table sets forth the combined plans' funded status and amounts
recognized in the Company's consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 1998,
1997 and 1996.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Benefit obligation $ (217,747) (200,554) (20,473)
Fair value of plan assets 278,678 237,618 22,158
Unrecognized transition (asset)/obligation (2,136) (1,550) 2,519
Unamortized prior service cost 1,053 - -
Unrecognized net actuarial (gain)/loss (57,981) (37,731) 1
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Prepaid (accrued) benefit cost $ 1,867 (2,217) 4,205
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Net periodic pension cost for 1998, 1997 and 1996 included the following
components:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Service cost $ 5,361 793 466
Interest cost 13,225 2,508 1,382
Expected return on plan assets (22,925) (5,715) (2,273)
Recognized net gains (2,688) - -
Net amortization and deferral (300) 2,459 933
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net periodic pension (benefit) cost $ (7,327) 45 508
================================================================================
</TABLE>
The following is a reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances for
the benefit obligation and the plan assets for the retirement and savings plans.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Change in benefit obligation
Benefit obligation at beginning of year $ 200,554 20,473 19,420
Service cost 5,361 793 466
Interest cost 13,225 2,508 1,382
Plan amendments 227 - -
Acquisition - 175,165 -
Actuarial loss 8,683 2,548 95
Benefits paid (10,303) (933) (890)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Benefit obligation at end of year $ 217,747 200,554 20,473
================================================================================
Change in plan assets (primarily listed
stocks and bonds)
Fair value of plan assets at
beginning of year $ 237,618 22,158 18,098
Return on plan assets 50,720 4,237 2,274
Employer contributions 643 807 2,676
Acquisition - 211,349 -
Benefits paid (10,303) (933) (890)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fair value of plan assets at end
of year $ 278,678 237,618 22,158
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Assumptions used in accounting for the pension plans as of December 1998 and
1997 were:
1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Discount rates 6.5-6.75% 7.0
Expected long-term rate of return on assets 8.0-10.0% 8.0-10.0
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Century sponsors an Employee Stock Bonus Plan ("ESBP") and an Employee Stock
Ownership Plan ("ESOP"). These plans cover most employees with one year of
service with the Company and are funded by Company contributions determined
annually by the Board of Directors.
The Company contributed $3.7 million, $2.8 million and $1.9 million to the
ESBP during 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. At December 31, 1998, the ESBP
owned 5.9 million shares of Century common stock.
The Company's contributions to the ESOP approximate the ESOP's debt service
less dividends received by the ESOP applicable to unallocated shares. The ESOP
shares initially were pledged as collateral for its debt. As the debt is repaid,
shares are released from collateral based on the percentage of principal payment
to outstanding debt before applying the principal payment. As of each year end,
such released shares are allocated to active employees.
The ESOP had outstanding debt of $570,000 at December 31, 1998 which was
applicable to shares purchased prior to 1993. Interest incurred by the ESOP on
such debt was $148,000, $274,000 and $430,000 in 1998, 1997, and 1996,
respectively. The Company contributed and expensed $1.5 million, $1.8 million
and $2.1 million during 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively, with respect to such
shares. Dividends on unallocated ESOP shares used for debt service by the ESOP
were $69,000 in 1998, $126,000 in 1997 and $189,000 in 1996. The number of ESOP
shares as of December 31, 1998 and 1997 which were purchased prior to 1993 were
as follows:
December 31, 1998 1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(In thousands)
Allocated shares 3,153 3,297
Unreleased shares 77 320
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3,230 3,617
================================================================================
The Company accounts for shares purchased subsequent to December 31, 1992 in
accordance with Statement of Position 93-6 ("SOP 93-6"). Accordingly, as shares
are released from collateral, the Company reports compensation expense equal to
the current market price of the shares and the shares become outstanding for
earnings per share computations. Dividends on allocated ESOP shares are recorded
as a reduction of retained earnings; dividends on unallocated ESOP shares are
recorded as a reduction of debt. ESOP compensation expense applicable to shares
purchased subsequent to 1992 was $2.9 million for 1998, $1.5 million for 1997
and $1.4 million for 1996. The fair value of unreleased ESOP shares accounted
for under SOP 93-6 was $23.2 million, $13.5 million and $9.7 million at December
31, 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. ESOP shares purchased subsequent to 1992
totaled 937,913, of which 422,060 were allocated and 515,853 were unreleased as
of December 31, 1998.
Century also sponsors a qualified profit sharing plan pursuant to Section
401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code (the "401(k) Plan") which is available to
substantially all employees of the Company. The Company's matching contributions
to the 401(k) Plan were $8.5 million in 1998, $2.8 million in 1997 and $2.3
million in 1996.
(16) Supplemental Cash Flow Disclosures
The Company paid interest of $151.4 million, $48.8 million and $45.1 million
during 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively. Income taxes paid were $185.9 million
in 1998, $79.3 million in 1997 and $64.1 million in 1996.
In addition to the acquisitions of PTI and the Ameritech properties,
Century has consummated the acquisitions of various telephone and cellular
operations, along with certain other assets, during the three years ended
December 31, 1998. In connection with these acquisitions, the following assets
were acquired, liabilities assumed, and common and preferred stock issued:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Property, plant and equipment $ 75,043 1,106,558 4,963
Excess cost of net assets acquired 145,880 1,204,284 53,220
Other investments 5,028 119,356 -
Notes payable - (199,824) -
Long-term debt - (527,937) (3,273)
Deferred credits and other liabilities - (246,196) (171)
Other assets and liabilities, excluding
cash and cash equivalents (382) 90,889 8,021
Common stock issued - (3,316) (8,458)
Preferred stock issued - - (7,975)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Decrease in cash due to acquisitions $ 225,569 1,543,814 46,327
================================================================================
</TABLE>
During the second quarter of 1998, the Company sold various properties
acquired in the PTI acquisition; a portion of its WorldCom stock; and certain
cellular operations. See Note 14 for additional information.
In May 1997 the Company sold its majority-owned competitive access subsidiary
in exchange for approximately 4.3 million shares of publicly-traded common
stock. In November 1997 approximately 85% of such stock was sold. In addition,
the Company has consummated the disposition of various cellular operations,
along with certain other assets, during the three years ended December 31, 1998.
In connection with these dispositions, the following assets were sold,
liabilities eliminated, assets received and gain recognized:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Property, plant and equipment $ - (38,481) 900
Excess cost of net assets acquired - (597) -
Marketable equity securities (21,923) 13,795 -
Other assets and liabilities, (60,525) (7,782) (85)
Gain on sale of assets (49,859) (169,640) (815)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Increase in cash due to dispositions $ (132,307) (202,705) -
================================================================================
</TABLE>
(17) Fair Value of Financial Instruments
The following table presents the carrying amounts and estimated fair values
of certain of the Company's financial instruments at December 31, 1998 and 1997.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Carrying Fair
amount value
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
December 31, 1998
- -----------------
Financial assets
Investments
Marketable equity securities $ 29,496 29,496 (2)
Other $ 29,813 29,813 (1)
Financial liabilities
Long-term debt (including current
maturities) $ 2,611,010 2,708,680 (3)
Other $ 32,721 32,721 (1)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
December 31, 1997
- -----------------
Financial assets
Investments
Marketable equity securities $ 40,570 40,570 (2)
Other $ 22,455 24,036 (1)
Financial liabilities
Long-term debt (including
current maturities) $ 2,664,785 2,677,348 (3)
Other $ 24,213 24,213 (1)
Off-balance sheet financial instruments
Interest rate hedge contracts $ - (16,061)(4)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Fair value was estimated by the Company.
(2) Fair value was based on quoted market prices.
(3) Fair value was estimated by discounting the scheduled payment streams to
present value based upon rates currently offered to the Company for
similar debt.
(4) Fair value represents the estimated amounts the Company would have to pay to
settle these contracts. See Note 6 for additional information related to the
settlement of these contracts.
</TABLE>
Cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, notes payable, accounts payable
and accrued expenses - The carrying amount approximates the fair value due to
the short maturity of these instruments.
(18) Business Segments
The Company has two reportable segments: telephone and cellular. The
Company's reportable segments are strategic business units that offer different
products and services.
The Company's telephone operations are conducted in rural, suburban and
small urban communities in 21 states. Approximately 86% of the Company's
telephone access lines are in Wisconsin, Washington, Alaska, Michigan,
Louisiana, Colorado, Ohio, Oregon and Montana. The Company's cellular customers
are located in Michigan, Louisiana, Wisconsin, Mississippi, Texas, Arkansas and
Alaska.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Depreciation
Operating and Operating
revenues amortization income
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Year ended December 31, 1998
- ----------------------------
Telephone $1,091,610 262,893 333,708
Cellular 407,749 62,002 130,580
Other segments 77,726 3,659 15,523
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total $1,577,085 328,554 479,811
================================================================================
Year ended December 31, 1997
- ----------------------------
Telephone $ 530,597 115,722 173,285
Cellular 307,742 41,127 88,081
Other segments 63,182 2,646 6,404
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total $ 901,521 159,495 267,770
================================================================================
Year ended December 31, 1996
- ----------------------------
Telephone $ 451,538 95,793 155,183
Cellular 250,243 33,573 67,914
Other segments 47,896 2,655 199
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total $ 749,677 132,021 223,296
================================================================================
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Operating income $ 479,811 267,770 223,296
Gain on sale or exchange of assets, net 49,859 169,640 815
Interest expense (167,552) (56,474) (44,662)
Income from unconsolidated cellular entities 32,869 27,794 26,952
Minority interest (12,797) (5,498) (6,675)
Other income and expense 5,268 5,109 3,916
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income before income tax expense $ 387,458 408,341 203,642
================================================================================
Year ended December 31, 1998 1997 1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
Capital expenditures
Telephone $ 233,190 115,854 110,147
Cellular 49,538 39,102 83,679
Other segments 28,191 26,269 29,059
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total $ 310,919 181,225 222,885
================================================================================
Identifiable assets
Telephone $3,674,148 3,379,376 1,174,317
Cellular 1,097,789 989,729 644,587
Other segments 163,518 340,296 209,601
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total assets $4,935,455 4,709,401 2,028,505
================================================================================
</TABLE>
Other accounts receivable are primarily amounts due from various long
distance carriers, principally AT&T, and several large local exchange operating
companies.
(19) Commitments and Contingencies
Construction expenditures and investments in vehicles, buildings and other
work equipment during 1999 are estimated to be $215 million for telephone
operations, $70 million for cellular operations and $60 million for corporate
and other operations.
The Company is involved in various claims and legal actions arising in the
ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the ultimate
disposition of these matters will not have a material adverse effect on the
Company's consolidated financial position or results of operations.
(20) Pending Dispositions
In August 1998 the Company entered into a definitive agreement to sell the
stock of the entities conducting the Company's Alaska operations to ALEC
Acquisition Corporation for $415 million cash, subject to various adjustments.
Proceeds from this transaction will be used to reduce debt. The Alaska
transaction is anticipated to close in the second quarter of 1999, subject to
regulatory approvals and various closing conditions.
In January 1999 the Company signed definitive asset purchase agreements to
sell all of the operations of the Brownsville and McAllen, Texas, cellular
markets to Western Wireless Corporation for $95 million cash, subject to various
adjustments. The Company is the majority owner in these markets and, therefore,
will receive its proportionate share of the sale proceeds (approximately $39
million after-tax.) The transaction is expected to close in the second quarter
of 1999, subject to regulatory approvals and various closing conditions.
(21) Subsequent Event
On February 23, 1999, Century's Board of Directors declared a three-for-two
common stock split effected as a 50% stock dividend in March 1999. All per share
data included in this report has been restated to reflect this stock split. An
amount equal to the par value of the additional common shares issued pursuant to
the stock split has been reflected as a transfer from paid-in-capital to common
stock on the consolidated financial statements for 1998.
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Consolidated Quarterly Income Information
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
First Second Third Fourth
quarter quarter quarter quarter
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
1998 (unaudited)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Operating revenues $ 371,720 388,378 401,949 415,038
Operating income $ 110,132 121,488 128,184 120,007
Net income $ 57,694 64,191 54,678 52,194
Diluted earnings per share* $ .41 .46 .39 .37
1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Operating revenues $ 198,985 210,576 218,351 273,609
Operating income $ 57,698 62,405 69,815 77,852
Net income $ 33,135 83,176 41,433 98,234
Diluted earnings per share* $ .24 .61 .30 .71
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999. See Note 21 of Notes to
Consolidated Financial Statements.
</TABLE>
Diluted earnings per share for both the first quarter and second quarter of
1998 included $.11 of net gain on sale or exchange of assets. See Note 14 for
additional information.
Diluted earnings per share for the second quarter and fourth quarter of 1997
included $.34 and $.44 per share, respectively, of gain on sale of assets. The
fourth quarter of 1997 includes one month of results of operations of Pacific
Telecom, Inc.
Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting
and Financial Disclosure.
None.
PART III
Item 10. Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant.
The name, age and office(s) held by each of the Registrant's executive
officers are shown below. Each of the executive officers listed below serves at
the pleasure of the Board of Directors, except Mr. Williams who has entered into
an employment agreement with the Registrant. The agreement's initial term has
lapsed, but the agreement remains in effect from year to year, subject to the
right of Mr. Williams or the Company to terminate such agreement.
Name Age Office(s) held with Century
- ---- --- ---------------------------
Clarke M. Williams 77 Chairman of the Board
of Directors
Glen F. Post, III 46 Vice Chairman of the Board of
Directors, President and
Chief Executive Officer
W. Bruce Hanks 44 Executive Vice President
and Chief Operating Officer
David D. Cole 41 Senior Vice President -
Operational Support
Kenneth R. Cole 51 Senior Vice President -
Operations
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr. 47 Senior Vice President and
Principal Financial
and Accounting Officer
Harvey P. Perry 54 Senior Vice President, General
Counsel and Secretary
Each of the Registrant's executive officers has served as an officer of the
Registrant and one or more of its subsidiaries in varying capacities for more
than the past five years. Mr. Hanks has served as Executive Vice President and
Chief Operating Officer since November 1998, as Senior Vice President -
Corporate Development and Strategy from October 1996 to October 1998 and as
President - Telecommunications Services or a comparable position from 1989 to
1996. Mr. David D. Cole has served as Senior Vice President Operational Support
since November 1998, as President - Wireless Group from October 1996 to October
1998 and as Vice President from 1990 to 1996. Mr. Kenneth R. Cole has served as
Senior Vice President - Operations since November 1998, as President - Telephone
Group from January 1995 to October 1998 and Vice President from 1983 to 1994.
The balance of the information required by Item 10 is incorporated by
reference to the Registrant's definitive proxy statement relating to its 1999
annual meeting of stockholders (the "Proxy Statement"), which Proxy Statement
will be filed pursuant to Regulation 14A within 120 days after the end of the
last fiscal year.
Item 11. Executive Compensation.
The information required by Item 11 is incorporated by reference to the Proxy
Statement.
Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management.
The information required by Item 12 is incorporated by reference to the Proxy
Statement.
Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions.
The information required by Item 13 is incorporated by reference to the Proxy
Statement.
PART IV
Item 14. Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules, and Reports on Form 8-K.
a. Financial Statements
(i) Consolidated Financial Statements:
Independent Auditors' Report on Consolidated Financial
Statements and Financial Statement Schedules
Consolidated Statements of Income for the years ended
December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the years
ended December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996
Consolidated Balance Sheets - December 31, 1998 and 1997
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years
ended December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity for the
years ended December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
Consolidated Quarterly Income Information (unaudited)
(ii) Schedules:*
I Condensed Financial Information of Registrant
II Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
* Those schedules not listed above are omitted as not
applicable or not required.
b. Reports on Form 8-K.
(i) The following item was reported in a Form 8-K filed December 3, 1998.
Item 5. Other Events - News release announcing the acquisition
of certain of Ameritech's telephone operations and
related directories in Wisconsin.
(ii) The following items were reported in a Form 8-K filed December
10, 1998.
Item 2. News release announcing third quarter result of
operations.
c. Exhibits:
3(i) Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of
Registrant, dated as of December 2, 1996, (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 3(i) to Registrant's Annual Report on
Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996).
3(ii) Registrant's Bylaws, as amended through October 7, 1998
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3(ii) of the
Company's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter
ended September 30, 1998).
4.1 Note Purchase Agreement, dated September 1, 1989, between
Registrant, Teachers Insurance and Annuity Association of
America and the Lincoln National Life Insurance Company
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.23 to Registrant's
Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended
September 30, 1989).
4.2 Rights Agreement, dated as of August 27, 1996, between
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and Society National
Bank, as Rights Agent, including the form of Rights
Certificate (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1 of
Registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K filed August 30,
1996).
4.3 Form of common stock certificate of the Registrant
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to Registrant's
Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June
30, 1993).
4.4 Indenture dated as of March 31, 1994 between the Company
and Regions Bank (formerly First American Bank & Trust of
Louisiana), as Trustee (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.1 of the Company's Registration Statement on Form
S-3, Registration No. 33-52915).
4.5 Resolutions designating the terms and conditions of the
Company's 7-3/4% Senior Notes, Series A, due 2004 and
8-1/4% Senior Notes, Series B, due 2024 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 4.1 to Registrant's Quarterly Report
on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 1994).
4.6 Resolutions designating the terms and conditions of the
Company's 6.55% Senior Notes, Series C, due 2005 and 7.2%
Senior Notes, Series D, due 2025 (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.27 to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K
for the year ended December 31, 1995).
4.7 Form of Senior Notes described in 4.5 and 4.6 above
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Company's
Registration Statement on Form S-3, Registration No.
33-52915).
4.8 Competitive Advance and Revolving Credit Facility
Agreement, dated as of August 28, 1997, among Registrant,
the lenders named therein, and NationsBank of Texas, N.A.
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to Registrant's
Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended
September 30, 1997).
4.9 Resolutions designating the terms and conditions of the
Company's 6.15% Senior Notes, Series E, due 2005; 6.30%
Senior Notes, Series F, due 2008; and 6.875% Debentures,
Series G, due 2028, (incorporated by reference to exhibit
4.9 to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1997).
4.10 Form of Board Resolution to be used in designating and
authorizing the terms and conditions of any series of
Senior Debt Securities issuable under the Company's shelf
registration statement (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.3 of the Company's Registration Statement on Form
S-3, Registration No. 333-42013).
4.11 Form of Senior Debt Securities described in 4.9 above
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Company's
Registration Statement on Form S-3, Registration No.
333-42013).
4.12 First Supplemental Indenture, dated as of November 2, 1998,
to Indenture between CenturyTel of the Northwest, Inc. and
The First National Bank of Chicago (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registrant's Quarterly Report
on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 1998).
10.1 Employee Benefit Plans
(a) Registrant's Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust,
as amended and restated December 30, 1994 (incorporated
by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1995), amendment thereto dated January 26, 1996
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1(a) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995) and amendment thereto dated
July 15, 1996 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.2 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for
the quarter ended June 30, 1996), and amendment thereto
dated December 31, 1996 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.5 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form
10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 1997), and
amendment thereto dated March 18, 1997 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.6 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1997), and amendments thereto dated January 1, 1997
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1997), and amendment thereto
dated December 29, 1998, included elsewhere herein.
(b) Registrant's Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and Trust, as
amended and restated December 30, 1994 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1995), amendment thereto dated July 11, 1995
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1995), amendment thereto dated
January 26, 1996 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.1(b) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for
the year ended December 31, 1995) and amendment thereto
dated July 15, 1996 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form
10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 1996), and
amendment thereto dated December 31, 1996 (incorporated
by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1997), and amendments thereto dated January 1, 1997
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1997), and amendment thereto
dated December 29, 1998, included elsewhere herein.
(c) Registrant's Dollars & Sense Plan and Trust, as amended
and restated, effective January 1, 1998 and amendment
thereto dated December 29, 1998, both included
elsewhere herein.
(d) Registrant's Restated Supplemental Executive Retirement
Plan, generally effective as of November 16, 1995
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1(d) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995) and amendment thereto dated
November 21, 1996 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.1(d) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for
the year ended December 31, 1996).
(e) Registrant's 1983 Restricted Stock Plan, dated February
21, 1984, as amended and restated as of November 16,
1995 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1(e) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995) and amendment thereto dated
November 21, 1996, (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1(e) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form
10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996), and
amendment thereto dated February 25, 1997 (incorporated
by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1997).
(f) Registrant's Key Employee Incentive Compensation Plan,
dated January 1, 1984, as amended and restated as of
November 16, 1995 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.1(f) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for
the year ended December 31, 1995) and amendment thereto
dated November 21, 1996 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1 (f) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form
10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996), and
amendment thereto dated February 25, 1997 (incorporated
by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1997).
(g) Registrant's 1988 Incentive Compensation Program as
amended and restated August 22, 1989 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 19.8 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30,
1989) and amendment thereto dated November 21, 1996
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1(g) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1996).
(h) Form of Stock Option Agreement entered into in 1988 by
the Registrant, pursuant to 1988 Incentive Compensation
Program, with certain of its officers (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.10 to Registrant's Annual
Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31,
1988) and amendment thereto (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.6 to Registrant's Registration No.
33-31314).
(i) Registrant's 1990 Incentive Compensation Program, dated
March 15, 1990 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
19.1 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for
the quarter ended June 30, 1990) and amendment thereto
dated November 21, 1996 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1(i) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form
10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996).
(j) Form of Stock Option Agreement entered into in 1990 by
the Registrant, pursuant to 1990 Incentive Compensation
Program, with certain of its officers (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 19.3 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30,
1990) and amendment thereto dated as of May 22, 1995
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended September 30, 1995).
(k) Form of Stock Option Agreement entered into in 1992 by
the Registrant, pursuant to 1990 Incentive Compensation
Program, with certain of its officers and employees
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.17 to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1992) and amendment thereto dated as
of May 22, 1995 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.2 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for
the quarter ended September 30, 1995).
(l) Registrant's 1995 Incentive Compensation Plan approved
by Registrant's shareholders on May 11, 1995
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to
Registration No. 33-60061) and amendment thereto dated
November 21, 1996 (incorporated by Reference to Exhibit
10.1 (l) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for
the year ended December 31, 1996), and amendment
thereto dated February 25, 1997 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1997).
(m) Form of Stock Option Agreement, pursuant to 1995
Incentive Compensation Plan and dated as of May 22,
1995, entered into by Registrant and its officers
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1995).
(n) Form of Stock Option Agreement, pursuant to 1995
Incentive Compensation Plan and dated as of June 23,
1995, entered into by Registrant and certain key
employees (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1995).
(o) Form of Performance Share Agreement Under the 1990
Incentive Compensation Program, entered into in 1993
with certain of its officers and employees
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 28.1 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended March 31, 1993) and amendment thereto
dated as of May 22, 1995 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.3 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form
10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 1995).
(p) Registrant's Restated Supplemental Defined Contribution
Plan, dated as of November 16, 1995 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.1(q) to Registrant's Annual
Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31,
1995), amendment thereto dated July 15, 1996
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1996) and amendment thereto
dated November 21, 1996 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.1 (p) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form
10-K for the year ended December 31, 1996).
(q) Registrant's Amended and Restated Supplemental Dollars
& Sense Plan, effective as of January 1, 1999, included
elsewhere herein.
(r) Registrant's Amended and Restated Salary Continuation
(Disability) Plan for Officers, dated November 26, 1991
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.16 of
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1991).
(s) Registrant's Restated Outside Directors' Retirement
Plan, dated as of November 16, 1995 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.1(t) to Registrant's Annual
Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31,
1995).
(t) Registrant's Restated Deferred Compensation Plan for
Outside Directors, dated as of November 16, 1995
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1(u) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995).
(u) Form of Stock Option Agreement, pursuant to 1995
Incentive Compensation Plan and dated as of February
24, 1997, entered into by Registrant and its officers
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended June 30, 1997).
(v) Registrant's Chairman/Chief Executive Officer
Short-Term Incentive Program (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 10.6 to Registrant's Quarterly Report on
Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 1997).
(w) Amended and Restated Restricted Stock and Performance
Share Agreement, pursuant to 1995 Incentive
Compensation Plan, dated as of February 24, 1998
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended March 31, 1998).
(x) Form of Restricted Stock and Performance Share
Agreement, pursuant to 1995 Incentive Compensation
Plan, dated as of February 24, 1998 (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.3 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31,
1998).
(y) Registrant's Supplemental Defined Benefit Plan,
effective as of January 1, 1999, included elsewhere
herein.
(z) Registrant's Amended and Restated Retirement Plan,
effective as of January 1, 1999, included elsewhere
herein.
10.2 Employment, Severance and Related Agreements
(a) Employment Agreement, dated May 24, 1993, by and
between Clarke M. Williams and Registrant (incorporated
by reference to Exhibit 19.1 to Registrant's Quarterly
Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30,
1993) and amendment thereto dated as of February 27,
1996 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2(a) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995).
(b) Form of Amended and Restated Severance Agreement, by
and between Registrant and each of its executive
officers other than Clarke M. Williams, dated as of
November 16, 1995 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
10.2(b) to Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for
the year ended December 31, 1995).
(c) Form of Amended and Restated Severance Agreement, by
and between Registrant and three of its officers who
are not executive officers, dated as of November 16,
1995 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2(c) to
Registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 1995).
(d) Agreement, dated December 31, 1994, by and between Jim
D. Reppond and Registrant (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.24 to Registrant's Annual Report on Form
10-K for the year ended December 31, 1994).
(e) Consulting Agreement, dated as of July 2, 1996, by and
between Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and Jim D.
Reppond (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended September 30, 1996).
10.3 Other Agreements
(a) Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of June 11, 1997, by
and among PacifiCorp Holdings, Inc., Pacific Telecom,
Inc., Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and Century
Cellunet, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
2.1 to Registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K filed
June 24, 1997) and amendment thereto, dated November 5,
1997 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.2 to
Registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K dated December
1, 1997 and filed December 11, 1997).
(b) Purchase Agreement by and among ALEC Acquisition
Corporation, CenturyTel of the Northwest, Inc. and
CenturyTel Wireless, Inc., dated August 14, 1998
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to
Registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the
quarter ended September 30, 1998).
21 Subsidiaries of the Registrant, included elsewhere herein.
23 Independent Auditors' Consent, included elsewhere herein.
27 Financial Data Schedule, included elsewhere herein.
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities
Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on
its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
Date: March 15, 1999 By: /s/ Clarke M. Williams
----------------------
Clarke M. Williams
Chairman of the Board
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this
report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the
Registrant and in the capacities and on the date indicated.
/s/ Clark M. Williams
- ------------------------- Chairman of the Board
Clarke M. Williams of Directors March 15, 1999
Vice Chairman of the
/s/ Glen F. Post, III Board of Directors,
- ------------------------- President, and Chief
Glen F. Post, III Executive Officer March 15, 1999
/s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr. Senior Vice President
- ------------------------- and Principal Financial
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr and Accounting Officer March 15, 1999
/s/ Harvey P. Perry Senior Vice President,
- ------------------------ General Counsel,
Harvey P. Perry Secretary and Director March 15, 1999
/s/ W. Bruce Hanks Executive Vice President,
- ------------------------ Chief Operating Officer
W. Bruce Hanks and Director March 15, 1999
/s/ William R. Boles, Jr.
- ------------------------
William R. Boles, Jr. Director March 15, 1999
/s/ Virginia Boulet
- ------------------------
Virginia Boulet Director March 15,1999
/s/ Ernest Butler, Jr.
- -------------------------
Ernest Butler, Jr. Director March 15, 1999
/s/ Calvin Czeschin
- ------------------------
Calvin Czeschin Director March 15, 1999
/s/ James B. Gardner
- ------------------------
James B. Gardner Director March 15, 1999
/s/ R. L. Hargrove, Jr.
- ------------------------
R. L. Hargrove, Jr. Director March 15, 1999
/s/ Johnny Hebert
- ------------------------
Johnny Hebert Director March 15, 1999
/s/ F. Earl Hogan
- ------------------------
F. Earl Hogan Director March 15, 1999
/s/ C. G. Melville, Jr.
- ------------------------
C. G. Melville, Jr. Director March 15, 1999
/s/ Jim D. Reppond
- ------------------------
Jim D. Reppond Director March 15, 1999
<PAGE>
SCHEDULE I - CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF REGISTRANT
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
(Parent Company)
STATEMENTS OF INCOME
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
REVENUES $ 16,055 9,666 6,520
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPENSES
Operating expenses 15,788 9,088 6,071
Depreciation and amortization 31,842 9,401 7,286
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total expenses 47,630 18,489 13,357
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATING LOSS (31,575) (8,823) (6,837)
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE)
Gain on sales of assets 28,085 172,537 -
Loss on investment - - (1,100)
Interest expense (131,309) (49,738) (36,709)
Interest income 40,005 28,697 28,884
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total other income (expense) (63,219) 151,496 (8,925)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INCOME (LOSS) BEFORE INCOME TAXES AND
EQUITY IN SUBSIDIARIES' EARNINGS (94,794) 142,673 (15,762)
Income tax benefit (expense) 21,857 (55,591) 4,467
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INCOME (LOSS) BEFORE EQUITY IN
SUBSIDIARIES' EARNINGS (72,937) 87,082 (11,295)
Equity in subsidiaries' earnings 301,694 168,896 140,372
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NET INCOME $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
==============================================================================
</TABLE>
See accompanying notes to condensed financial information of registrant.
SCHEDULE I - CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF REGISTRANT
(continued)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
(Parent Company)
BALANCE SHEETS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
December 31,
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C>
ASSETS
CURRENT ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents $ 6,540 28,300
Receivables from subsidiaries 142,912 76,931
Other receivables 23,906 792
Prepayments and other 259 28
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total current assets 173,617 106,051
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property and equipment 1,162 1,236
Accumulated depreciation (676) (744)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net property, plant and equipment 486 492
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INVESTMENTS AND OTHER ASSETS
Investments in subsidiaries (at equity) 3,170,861 2,706,066
Receivables from subsidiaries 514,366 655,398
Other investments 42,418 75,546
Deferred charges 58,073 5,878
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total investments and other assets 3,785,718 3,442,888
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL ASSETS $ 3,959,821 3,549,431
==============================================================================
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Current maturities of long-term debt $ 30,046 11,486
Payables to subsidiaries 365,517 218,993
Accrued interest 27,711 11,088
Other accrued liabilities 23,475 41,628
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total current liabilities 446,749 283,195
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LONG-TERM DEBT 1,852,253 1,883,467
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PAYABLES TO SUBSIDIARIES 32,406 46,371
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEFERRED CREDITS AND OTHER LIABILITIES 96,931 36,126
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
Common stock, $1.00 par value, authorized
175,000,000 shares, issued and outstanding
138,082,926* and 91,103,674 shares 138,083 91,104
Paid-in capital 451,535 469,586
Unrealized holding gain on investments,
net of taxes 7,217 11,893
Retained earnings 932,611 728,033
Unearned ESOP shares (6,070) (8,450)
Preferred stock - non-redeemable 8,106 8,106
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total stockholders' equity 1,531,482 1,300,272
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY $ 3,959,821 3,549,431
==============================================================================
* Adjusted to reflect stock split in early 1999.
</TABLE>
See accompanying notes to condensed financial information of registrant.
SCHEDULE I - CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF REGISTRANT
(Continued)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
(Parent Company)
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended December 31,
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C>
OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Net income $ 228,757 255,978 129,077
Adjustments to reconcile net income
to net cash provided by (used in)
operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 31,842 9,401 7,286
Deferred income taxes 12,902 8,068 2,934
Earnings of subsidiaries (301,694) (168,896) (140,372)
Gain on sale of assets (28,085) (172,537) -
Changes in current assets and
current liabilities:
Other receivables (23,114) 11,615 (2,639)
Other accrued liabilities (40,535) 35,754 329
Other current assets and
liabilities, net 37,754 8,412 3,998
Other, net 9,724 958 3,297
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash provided by (used in)
operating activities (72,449) (11,247) 3,910
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Acquisitions (225,569) (1,283,291) (46,327)
Capital contributions to subsidiaries - (16,634) (20,179)
Dividends received from subsidiaries 116,906 117,499 473
Receivables from subsidiaries 303,221 (235,772) (45,945)
Payables to subsidiaries (90,319) 9,738 97,908
Proceeds from sales of assets 40,778 202,705 -
Investment in unconsolidated personal
communications services entity - - 18,900
Note receivable - 22,500 1,667
Other, net (28,046) (14,959) (4,425)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash provided by (used in)
investing activities 116,971 (1,198,214) 2,072
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 950,000 1,297,435 47,500
Payments of long-term debt (960,274) (52,214) (42,357)
Payment of hedge contracts (40,237) - -
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 15,033 14,156 10,089
Payment of debt issuance costs (6,625)
Cash dividends paid (24,179) (22,671) (21,775)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net cash provided by (used in)
financing activities (66,282) 1,236,706 (6,543)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net increase (decrease) in cash and
cash equivalents (21,760) 27,245 (561)
Cash and cash equivalents at
beginning of year 28,300 1,055 1,616
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT END OF YEAR $ 6,540 28,300 1,055
==============================================================================
See accompanying notes to condensed financial information of registrant.
</TABLE>
SCHEDULE I - CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF REGISTRANT
(continued)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
(Parent Company)
NOTES TO CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION OF REGISTRANT
(A) LONG-TERM DEBT
The approximate annual debt maturities for the five years subsequent to
December 31, 1998 are as follows:
1999 - $ 30.0 million
2000 - $ 37.4 million
2001 - $ 56.6 million
2002 - $ 688.8 million
2003 - $ 3.8 million
(B) GUARANTEES
As of December 31, 1998, Century has guaranteed a promissory note for a
subsidiary of $2.0 million, as well as the applicable interest and premium.
(C) DIVIDENDS FROM SUBSIDIARIES
Dividends paid to Century by consolidated subsidiaries were $116.9 million,
$117.5 million and $472,800 during 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively.
(D) INCOME TAXES AND INTEREST PAID
Income taxes paid by Century (including amounts reimbursed from
subsidiaries) were $162.0 million, $71.8 million and $56.0 million during 1998,
1997, and 1996 respectively.
Interest paid by Century was $114.7 million, $42.4 million and $37.3
million during 1998, 1997 and 1996, respectively.
(E) AFFILIATED TRANSACTIONS
Century provides and bills management services to subsidiaries and in
certain instances makes interest bearing advances to finance construction of
plant and purchases of equipment. Century recorded intercompany interest income
of $39.7 million, $26.6 million and $26.4 million in 1998, 1997 and 1996,
respectively.
(F) SUBSEQUENT EVENT
On February 23, 1999, Century's Board of Directors declared a three-for-two
common stock split effected as a 50% stock dividend in March 1999. An amount
equal to the par value of the additional common shares issued pursuant to the
stock split has been reflected as a transfer from paid-in-capital to common
stock on the Condensed Financial Information of Registrant for 1998.
SCHEDULE II - VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
For the years ended December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Additions
Balance at charged to Deductions Balance
beginning costs and from Other at end
Description of period expenses allowance(1) changes(2) of period
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Dollars in thousands)
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Year ended December 31, 1998
Allowance for
doubtful accounts $ 5,954 13,951 (15,775) 25 4,155
Year ended December 31, 1997
Allowance for
doubtful accounts $ 3,327 11,838 (9,975) 764 5,954
Year ended December 31, 1996
Allowance for
doubtful accounts $ 2,768 10,155 (9,662) 66 3,327
(1) Customers' accounts written-off, net of recoveries.
(2) Allowance for doubtful accounts at the date of acquisition of
purchased subsidiaries, net of allowance for doubtful accounts at
the date of disposition of subsidiaries sold.
</TABLE>
Exhibit 10.1(a)
AMENDMENT TO THE
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST
STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF OUACHITA
BE IT KNOWN, that on this 29th day of December , 1998, before me, a Notary
Public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the Parish of Ouachita, State
of Louisiana, therein residing, and in the presence of the undersigned
witnesses:
PERSONALLY CAME AND APPEARED:
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC., represented herein by its Senior Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer, R. Stewart Ewing, Jr., as Settlor and
Employer, which hereby executes the following amendment to the Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust, such amendment to be
effective immediately:
The last sentence of Section 2.1 of the Plan is hereby deleted and the
following is inserted in lieu thereof:
In addition, Employees of the following are not eligible to participate
in the Plan:
Century Business Communications, Inc.
Century Interactive Communications, Inc.
CenturyTel Security Systems, Inc. (and any predecessors thereto)
Employees of CenturyTel of Pecoco, Inc.(formerly Pecoco, Inc.) and its
subsidiaries are eligible to participate in the Plan as of April 27, 1997.
Employees of CenturyTel of the Northwest, Inc.(formerly Pacific Telecom, Inc.)
and Pacific Telecom Cellular, Inc., their subsidiaries, and their Affiliates
prior to the acquisition of Pacific Telecom, Inc. by Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc.or an Affiliate thereof are eligible to participate in the
Plan as of January 1, 1999.
THUS DONE AND SIGNED on the day first above shown, in the presence of the
undersigned competent witnesses, who hereunto sign their names with the said
appearer and me, Notary, after reading of the whole.
WITNESSES: CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
/s/ Ray B. Finney BY: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- --------------------- -----------------------------
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr. Senior Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer
/s/ Jeffrey S. Glover
---------------------
/s/ Kathy Tettleton
-------------------
NOTARY PUBLIC
ACCEPTANCE OF AMENDMENTS BY TRUSTEE
STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF OUACHITA
On this 29th day of December, 1998.
BEFORE ME, a Notary Public, and in the presence of the undersigned
competent witnesses, personally came and appeared:
REGIONS BANK OF LOUISIANA
which declared that it is appearing herein for the purpose of accepting and it
does hereby accept the Amendments to the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust adopted by the Settlor on the 29th day
of December, 1998.
THUS DONE AND SIGNED at Monroe, Louisiana, on the date first above
written. THUS DONE AND SIGNED at Monroe, Louisiana, on the date first
above written.
WITNESSES: REGIONS BANK OF LOUISIANA, TRUSTEE
/s/ Twana Pulliam By: /s/ Kevin Rodgers
- ----------------------- -------------------------------
Kevin Rodgers, Vice President
/s/Lani Ingram-Schyard
- -----------------------
/s/ Lisa K. McGivney
--------------------
NOTARY PUBLIC
Exhibit 10.1(b)
AMENDMENT TO THE
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
STOCK BONUS PLAN, PAYSOP AND TRUST
STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF OUACHITA
BE IT KNOWN, that on this 29th day of December, 1998, before me, a
Notary Public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the Parish of
Ouachita, State of Louisiana, therein residing, and in the presence of the
undersigned witnesses:
PERSONALLY CAME AND APPEARED:
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC., represented herein by its Senior
Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, R. Stewart Ewing, Jr., as Settlor
and Employer, which hereby executes the following amendment to the Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and Trust, such
amendment to be effective immediately:
The last sentence of Section 2.1 of the Plan is hereby deleted and the
following is inserted in lieu thereof:
In addition, Employees of the following are not eligible to participate
in the Plan:
Century Business Communications, Inc.
Century Interactive Communications, Inc.
CenturyTel Security Systems, Inc. (and any predecessors thereto)
Employees of CenturyTel of Pecoco, Inc. (formerly Pecoco, Inc.) and its
subsidiaries are eligible to participate in the Plan as of April 27, 1997.
Employees of CenturyTel of the Northewest, Inc. (formerly Pacific Telecom,
Inc.) and Pacific Telecom Cellular, Inc., their subsidiaries, and their
Affiliates prior to the acquisition of Pacific Telecom, Inc. by Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. or an Affiliate thereof are eligible to
participate in the Plan as of January 1, 1999.
THUS DONE AND SIGNED on the day first above shown, in the presence of
the undersigned competent witnesses, who hereunto sign their names with the
said appearer and me, Notary, after reading of the whole.
WITNESSES: CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
/s/ Ray B. Finney BY: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- ---------------------- --------------------------------
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr. Senior Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer
/s/ Jeffrey S. Glover
- ----------------------
/s/ Kathy Tettleton
-------------------
NOTARY PUBLIC
ACCEPTANCE OF AMENDMENTS BY TRUSTEE
STATE OF LOUISIANA
PARISH OF OUACHITA
On this 29th day of December, 1998.
BEFORE ME, a Notary Public, and in the presence of the undersigned
competent witnesses, personally came and appeared:
REGIONS BANK OF LOUISIANA
which declared that it is appearing herein for the purpose of accepting and it
does hereby accept the Amendments to the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and Trust adopted by the Settlor on the 29th day of
December, 1998.
THUS DONE AND SIGNED at Monroe, Louisiana, on the date first above
written.
WITNESSES: REGIONS BANK OF LOUISIANA, TRUSTEE
/s/ Twana Pulliam By: /s/ Kevin Rodgers
- ----------------------- -------------------------------
Kevin Rodgers, Vice President
/s/Lani Ingram-Schyard
- -----------------------
/s/ Lisa K. McGivney
--------------------
NOTARY PUBLIC
Exhibit 10.1(c)
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense Plan and Trust
As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 1998
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. (the "Company") previously established the
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense Plan (the "Plan"), for the
exclusive benefit of eligible employees of the Company and its participating
affiliates. The Plan is intended to constitute a qualified profit sharing plan,
as described in Code section 401(a), which includes a qualified cash or deferred
arrangement, as described in Code section 401(k). Effective July 1, 1993, the
San Marcos Telephone Company, Inc. and SM Telecorp Companies Retirement Plan was
merged into the Plan. Effective January 10, 1998, assets from the PacifiCorp K
Plus Employee Savings Plan attributable to participants thereunder who
immediately prior to the date of transfer are employees of Pacific Telecom, Inc.
were transferred to the Plan.
The provisions of the Plan and Trust relating to the Trustee constitute the
trust agreement which is entered into by and between Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc. and Merrill Lynch Trust Company, FSB. The Trust is intended to
be tax exempt, as described in Code section 501(a).
The Plan is intended to comply with the qualification requirements of the Small
Business Job Protection Act of 1996 (the "SBJPA") and is intended to comply in
operation therewith. To the extent that the Plan, as set forth below, is
subsequently determined to be insufficient to comply with such requirements and
any regulations issued under the SBJPA, the Plan shall later be amended to so
comply.
The Plan constitutes an amendment and restatement of the Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense Plan effective January 1, 1998, which was
originally established effective as of May 1, 1986, and its related trust
agreement.
The Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense Plan and Trust, as set
forth in this document, is hereby amended and restated effective as of January
1, 1998. The Plan and Trust were last restated generally effective April 1, 1992
and amended five times thereafter including a change in trustee amendment.
Date: 12/31 , 1998 Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
-------------
By: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
------------------------------
Title: Sr. Vice President and C.F.O.
The trust agreement set forth in those provisions of the Plan and Trust which
relate to the Trustee is hereby executed.
Date: 2/25, 1999 Merrill Lynch Trust Company, FSB
-------------
By: /s/ Robin Hopkins
--------------------------
Title: Assistant Vice President
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 DEFINITIONS............................................................1
-----------
2 ELIGIBILITY...........................................................11
-----------
2.1 Eligibility....................................................11
2.2 Ineligible Employees...........................................11
2.3 Ineligible, Terminated or Former Participants..................11
3 PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS.............................................12
-------------------------
3.1 Employee Pre-Tax Contribution Election.........................12
3.2 Changing a Contribution Election...............................12
3.3 Revoking and Resuming a Contribution Election..................12
3.4 Contribution Percentage Limits.................................12
3.5 Refunds When Contribution Dollar Limit Exceeded................13
3.6 Timing, Posting and Tax Considerations.........................13
4 ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS AND TRANSFERS FROM AND TO OTHER QUALIFIED
------------------------------------------------------------------
PLANS.................................................................14
-----
4.1 Rollover Contributions.........................................14
4.2 Transfers From and To Other Qualified Plans....................14
5.1 Employer Match Contributions...................................16
6 ACCOUNTING............................................................18
----------
6.1 Individual Participant Accounting..............................18
6.2 Sweep Account is Transaction Account...........................18
6.3 Trade Date Accounting and Investment Cycle.....................18
6.4 Accounting for Investment Funds................................18
6.5 Payment of Fees and Expenses...................................18
6.6 Accounting for Participant Loans...............................19
6.7 Error Correction...............................................19
6.8 Participant Statements.........................................20
6.9 Special Accounting During Conversion Period....................20
6.10 Accounts for Alternate Payees..................................20
7 INVESTMENT FUNDS AND ELECTIONS........................................21
------------------------------
7.1 Investment Funds...............................................21
7.2 Responsibility for Investment Choice...........................21
7.3 Investment Fund Elections......................................22
7.4 Default if No Valid Investment Election........................22
7.5 Investment Fund Election Change Fees...........................22
8 VESTING...............................................................23
-------
8.1 Fully Vested Accounts..........................................23
9 PARTICIPANT LOANS.....................................................24
-----------------
9.1 Participant Loans Permitted....................................24
9.2 Loan Application, Note and Security............................24
9.3 Spousal Consent................................................24
9.4 Loan Approval..................................................24
9.5 Loan Funding Limits, Account Sources and Funding Order.........24
9.6 Maximum Number of Loans........................................25
9.7 Source and Timing of Loan Funding..............................25
9.8 Interest Rate..................................................25
9.9 Loan Payment...................................................25
9.10 Loan Payment Hierarchy.........................................26
9.11 Repayment Suspension...........................................26
9.12 Loan Default...................................................26
9.13 Call Feature...................................................26
10 IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS................................................27
----------------------
10.1 In-Service Withdrawals Permitted...............................27
10.2 In-Service Withdrawal Application and Notice...................27
10.3 Spousal Consent................................................27
10.4 In-Service Withdrawal Approval.................................27
10.5 Payment Form and Medium........................................27
10.6 Source and Timing of In-Service Withdrawal Funding.............28
10.7 Hardship Withdrawals...........................................28
10.8 After-Tax Account Withdrawals..................................29
10.9 Rollover Account Withdrawals...................................30
10.10 Disabled Participant Withdrawals...............................30
10.11 Over Age 59 1/2Withdrawals.....................................31
11 DISTRIBUTIONS ONCE EMPLOYMENT ENDS OR BY REASON OF A
------------------------------------------------------------------
PARTICIPANT'S REQUIRED BEGINNING DATE.................................32
-------------------------------------
11.1 Benefit Information, Notices and Election......................32
11.2 Spousal Consent................................................33
11.3 Payment Form and Medium........................................33
11.4 Distribution of Small Amounts..................................33
11.5 Source and Timing of Distribution Funding......................33
11.6 Latest Commencement Permitted..................................34
11.7 Payment Within Life Expectancy.................................34
11.8 Incidental Benefit Rule........................................35
11.9 Payment to Beneficiary.........................................35
11.10 Beneficiary Designation........................................35
12 ADP AND ACP TESTS.....................................................37
-----------------
12.1 Contribution Limitation Definitions............................37
12.2 ADP and ACP Tests..............................................40
12.3 Correction of ADP and ACP Tests for
Plan Years Commencing After December 31, 1996..................40
12.4 Multiple Use Test..............................................42
12.5 Correction of Multiple Use Test................................42
12.6 Adjustment for Investment Gain or Loss.........................42
12.7 Testing Responsibilities and Required Records..................42
12.8 Separate Testing...............................................42
13 MAXIMUM CONTRIBUTION AND BENEFIT LIMITATIONS..........................44
--------------------------------------------
13.1 "Annual Addition" Defined......................................44
13.2 Maximum Annual Addition........................................44
13.3 Avoiding an Excess Annual Addition.............................44
13.4 Correcting an Excess Annual Addition...........................44
13.5 Correcting a Multiple Plan Excess..............................45
13.6 "Defined Benefit Fraction" Defined.............................45
13.7 "Defined Contribution Fraction" Defined........................45
13.8 Combined Plan Limits and Correction............................46
14 TOP HEAVY RULES.......................................................47
---------------
14.1 Top Heavy Definitions..........................................47
14.2 Special Contributions..........................................48
14.3 Adjustment to Combined Limits for Different Plans..............49
15 PLAN ADMINISTRATION...................................................50
-------------------
15.1 Plan Delineates Authority and Responsibility...................50
15.2 Fiduciary Standards............................................50
15.3 Company is ERISA Plan Administrator............................50
15.4 Administrator Duties...........................................51
15.5 Advisors May be Retained.......................................51
15.6 Delegation of Administrator Duties.............................52
15.7 Committee Operating Rules......................................52
16 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTMENTS.............................................53
-------------------------
16.1 Trust Agreement................................................53
16.2 Investment Funds...............................................53
16.3 Authority to Hold Cash.........................................54
16.4 Trustee to Act Upon Instructions...............................54
16.5 Administrator Has Right to
Vote Registered Investment Company Shares......................54
16.6 Custom Fund Investment Management .............................54
16.7 Master Custom Fund.............................................55
16.8 Authority to Segregate Assets..................................55
16.9 Investment in Company Stock....................................56
16.10 Voting, Tendering and Exchanging Company Stock.................56
16.11 Registration and Disclosure for Company Stock..................58
17 TRUST ADMINISTRATION..................................................59
--------------------
17.1 Trustee to Construe Trust......................................59
17.2 Trustee To Act As Owner of Trust Assets........................59
17.3 United States Indicia of Ownership.............................59
17.4 Tax Withholding and Payment....................................60
17.5 Trust Accounting...............................................60
17.6 Valuation of Certain Assets....................................60
17.7 Legal Counsel..................................................61
17.8 Fees and Expenses..............................................61
17.9 Trustee Duties and Limitations.................................61
18 RIGHTS, PROTECTION, CONSTRUCTION AND JURISDICTION.....................62
-------------------------------------------------
18.1 Plan Does Not Affect Employment Rights.........................62
18.2 Compliance With USERRA.........................................62
18.3 Limited Return of Contributions................................62
18.4 Assignment and Alienation......................................63
18.5 Facility of Payment............................................63
18.6 Reallocation of Lost Participant's Accounts....................63
18.7 Suspension of Certain Plan Provisions During Conversion
Period.........................................................63
18.8 Suspension of Certain Plan Provisions During Other Periods.....64
18.9 Claims Procedure...............................................64
18.10 Construction...................................................65
18.11 Jurisdiction and Severability..................................65
18.12 Indemnification by Employer....................................65
19 AMENDMENT, MERGER, DIVESTITURES AND TERMINATION.......................66
-----------------------------------------------
19.1 Amendment......................................................66
19.2 Merger.........................................................66
19.3 Divestitures...................................................66
19.4 Plan Termination and Complete Discontinuance of
Contributions..................................................67
19.5 Amendment and Termination Procedures...........................67
19.6 Termination of Employer's Participation........................68
19.7 Replacement of the Trustee.....................................68
19.8 Final Settlement and Accounting of Trustee.....................68
APPENDIX A - MAPPING OF ACCOUNTS............................................70
APPENDIX B - INVESTMENT FUNDS...............................................71
APPENDIX C - PAYMENT OF PLAN FEES AND EXPENSES..............................73
APPENDIX D - LOAN INTEREST RATE.............................................74
1 DEFINITIONS
-----------
When capitalized, the words and phrases below have the following meanings
unless different meanings are clearly required by the context:
1.1 "Account". The records maintained by the Administrator for
purposes of accounting for a Participant's interest in the
Plan. "Account" may refer to one or all of the following
accounts which have been created on behalf of a Participant to
hold amounts attributable to specific types of Contributions
under the Plan, amounts transferred from the ESOP and amounts
transferred from Predecessor Plans in accordance with Section
4.2:
(a) "Employee Pre-Tax Account". An account created to hold
amounts attributable to Employee Pre-Tax Contributions and,
if applicable, amounts transferred from the Predecessor Plans
as set forth on Appendix A.
(b) "After-Tax Account". An account created to hold amounts
attributable to amounts transferred from the Predecessor
Plans as set forth on Appendix A.
(c) "Rollover Account". An account created to hold amounts
attributable to Rollover Contributions and, if applicable,
amounts transferred from the Predecessor Plans as set forth
on Appendix A.
(d) "ESOP Transfer Account". An account created to hold amounts
attributable to amounts transferred from the ESOP on behalf
of participants thereunder pursuant to the diversification
requirements of Code section 401(a)(28).
(e) "Employer Match Account". An account created to hold amounts
attributable to Employer Match Contributions (identified as
basic Employer Match Contributions in Section 5) and, if
applicable, amounts transferred from the Predecessor Plans as
set forth on Appendix A.
(f) "Additional Match Account". An account created to hold
amounts attributable to Employer Match Contributions
(identified as additional Employer Match Contributions in
Section 5) and, if applicable, amounts transferred from the
Predecessor Plans as set forth on Appendix A.
(g) "Discretionary Match Account". An account created to hold
amounts attributable to Employer Match Contributions
(identified as discretionary Employer Match Contributions in
Section 5) and, if applicable, amounts transferred from the
Predecessor Plans as set forth on Appendix A.
(h) "Prior Match Account". An account created to hold amounts
attributable to amounts transferred from the Predecessor
Plans as set forth on Appendix A.
1.2 "ACP" or "Average Contribution Percentage". The percentage
calculated in accordance with Section 12.1.
1.3 "Administrator". The Company, which may delegate all or a portion
of the duties of the Administrator under the Plan to a Committee in
accordance with Section 15.6.
1.4 "ADP" or "Average Deferral Percentage". The percentage calculated
in accordance with Section 12.1.
1.5 "Alternate Payee". Any spouse, former spouse, child or other
dependent (as defined in Code section 152) of a Participant who is
recognized by a domestic relations order as having a right to
receive all, or a portion, of the Participant's Account under the
Plan.
1.6 "Beneficiary". The person or persons who is to receive benefits
under the Plan after the death of the Participant pursuant to the
"Beneficiary Designation" paragraph in Section 11.
1.7 "Code". The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. Reference to
any specific Code section shall include such section, any valid
regulation promulgated thereunder, and any comparable provision of
any future legislation amending, supplementing or superseding such
section.
1.8 "Committee". If applicable, the committee which has been appointed
by the Administrator to administer the Plan in accordance with
Section 15.6.
1.9 "Company". Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. or any successor
by merger, purchase or otherwise.
1.10 "Company Stock". Shares of voting common stock, $1.00 par
value, issued by the Company.
1.11 "Compensation". The sum of a Participant's Taxable Income and
salary reductions, if any, pursuant to Code section 125, 402(e)(3),
402(h)(1)(B), 403(b), 457 or, for Plan Years commencing after
December 31, 1996, 408(p)(2)(A)(i).
For purposes of determining benefits under the Plan, Compensation
is limited to $150,000 per Plan Year (as adjusted for cost of
living increases pursuant to Code sections 401(a)(17) and 415(d)).
For Plan Years commencing before January 1, 1997, for purposes of
the preceding sentence, in the case of an HCE who is a 5% Owner or
one of the 10 most highly compensated Employees, (i) such HCE and
such HCE's family group (as defined below) shall be treated as a
single employee and the Compensation of each family group member
shall be aggregated with the Compensation of such HCE, and (ii) the
limitation on Compensation shall be allocated among such HCE and
his or her family group members in proportion to each individual's
Compensation before the application of this sentence. For purposes
of this Section, the term "family group" shall mean an Employee's
spouse and lineal descendants who have not attained age 19 before
the close of the year in question.
For purposes of determining HCEs and key employees and for Plan
Years commencing after December 31, 1997, for purposes of Section
13.2, Compensation for the entire Plan Year shall be used. For
purposes of determining ADP and ACP, Compensation shall be limited
to amounts paid to an Eligible Employee while a Participant.
1.12 "Contribution". An amount contributed to the Plan by the Employer
or an Eligible Employee, and allocated by contribution type to
Participants' Accounts, as described in Section 1.1.
Specific types of contribution include:
(a) "Employee Pre-Tax Contribution". An amount contributed by an
eligible Participant in conjunction with his or her Code
section 401(k) salary deferral election which shall be
treated as made by the Employer on the eligible Participant's
behalf.
(b) "Rollover Contribution". An amount contributed by an Eligible
Employee which originated from another employer's or an
Employer's qualified plan.
(c) "Employer Match Contribution". An amount contributed by the
Employer on an eligible Participant's behalf based upon the
amount contributed by the eligible Participant.
1.13 "Contribution Dollar Limit". The annual limit placed on each
Participant's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions, which shall be $7,000
per calendar year (as adjusted for cost of living increases
pursuant to Code sections 402(g)(5) and 415(d)). For purposes of
this Section, a Participant's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions shall
include (i) any employer contribution under a qualified cash or
deferred arrangement (as defined in Code section 401(k)) to the
extent not includible in gross income for the taxable year under
Code section 402(e)(3) (determined without regard to Code section
402(g)), (ii) any employer contribution to the extent not
includible in gross income for the taxable year under Code section
402(h)(1)(B) (determined without regard to Code section 402(g)),
(iii) any employer contribution to purchase an annuity contract
under Code section 403(b) under a salary reduction agreement
(within the meaning of Code section 3121(a)(5)(D)) and (iv) for
calendar years commencing after December 31, 1996, any elective
employer contribution under Code section 408(p)(2)(A)(i).
1.14 "Conversion Period". The period of converting the prior accounting
system of any plan and trust which is merged, in whole or in part,
into the Plan and Trust, to the accounting system described in
Section 6.
1.15 "Direct Rollover". An Eligible Rollover Distribution that is paid
by the Plan directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan for the benefit
of a Distributee.
1.16 "Disability" or "Disabled". A medical condition which renders a
Participant unable to perform each of the material duties of his or
her regular occupation and which is likely to incapacitate the
Participant continuously and permanently as evidenced by
presentation of medical evidence satisfactory to the Administrator.
1.17 "Disabled Participant". The Plan status of a Participant during
any period he or she is Disabled.
1.18 "Distributee". A Participant, a Beneficiary (if he or she is the
surviving spouse of a Participant) or an Alternate Payee under a
QDRO (if he or she is the spouse or former spouse of a
Participant).
1.19 "Effective Date". The date upon which the provisions of this
document become effective. This date is January 1, 1998, unless
stated otherwise. In general, the provisions of this document only
apply to Participants who are Employees on or after the Effective
Date. However, investment and distribution provisions apply to all
Participants with Account balances to be invested or distributed
after the Effective Date.
1.20 "Eligible Employee". An Employee of an Employer who is recorded as
an Employee by the Employer's payroll records, except any Employee:
(a) whose compensation and conditions of employment are covered
by a collective bargaining agreement to which the Employer is
a party unless the agreement calls for the Employee's
participation in the Plan; or
(b) who is a temporary Employee hired specifically to fill
temporary or occasional needs.
1.21 "Eligible Retirement Plan". An individual retirement account
described in Code section 408(a), an individual retirement annuity
described in Code section 408(b), an annuity plan described in Code
section 403(a), or a qualified trust described in Code section
401(a), that accepts a Distributee's Eligible Rollover
Distribution, except that, if the Distributee is the surviving
spouse of a Participant, an Eligible Retirement Plan is an
individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity.
1.22 "Eligible Rollover Distribution". A distribution of all or any
portion of the balance to the credit of a Distributee, excluding
(i) a distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal
periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the
life (or life expectancy) of the Distributee or the joint lives (or
joint life expectancies) of the Distributee and the Distributee's
designated Beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or
more; (ii) a distribution to the extent such distribution is
required under Code section 401(a)(9); and (iii) the portion of a
distribution that is not includible in gross income (determined
without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation
with respect to Employer securities).
1.23 "Employee". An individual who is:
(a) a common-law employee of any Related Company, or
(b) a Leased Employee.
1.24 "Employer". The Company and any other Related Company which adopts
the Plan with the approval of the Company.
1.25 "ERISA". The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as
amended. Reference to any specific ERISA section shall include such
section, any valid regulation promulgated thereunder, and any
comparable provision of any future legislation amending,
supplementing or superseding such section.
1.26 "ESOP". The Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Employee Stock
Ownership Plan.
1.27 "Former Participant". The Plan status of an individual after he or
she is determined to be a Terminated Participant and his or her
Account is distributed or forfeited.
1.28 "HCE" or "Highly Compensated Employee". An Employee described as a
Highly Compensated Employee in Section 12.
1.29 "Ineligible". The Plan status of an individual who is (1) an
Employee of a Related Company which is not then an Employer, (2) an
Employee of an Employer, but not an Eligible Employee, or (3) not
an Employee.
1.30 "Ineligible Participant". The Plan status of a Participant who is
(1) an Employee of a Related Company which is not then an Employer,
or (2) an Employee of an Employer, but not an Eligible Employee.
1.31 "Investment Fund". An investment fund as described in Section 16.2.
The Investment Funds authorized by the Administrator to be offered
under the Plan as of the Effective Date are set forth in Appendix
B.
1.32 "Leased Employee". An individual, not otherwise an Employee, who,
pursuant to an agreement between a Related Company and a leasing
organization, has performed, on a substantially full-time basis,
for a period of at least 12 months, services of any type
historically performed by Employees in the business field of the
Related Company, unless:
(a) the individual is covered by a money purchase pension plan
maintained by the leasing organization and meeting the
requirements of Code section 414(n)(5)(B), and
(b) such individuals do not constitute more than 20% of all
Non-Highly Compensated Employees of all Related Companies
(within the meaning of Code section 414(n)(5)(C)(ii)).
For Plan Years commencing after December 31, 1996, "services under
the primary direction or control of the Related Company" shall be
substituted for the preceding reference to "services of any type
historically performed by Employees in the business field of the
Related Company".
1.33 "Leave of Absence". A period during which an individual is deemed
to be an Employee, but is absent from active employment, provided
that the absence:
(a) was authorized by a Related Company; or
(b) was due to military service in the United States armed forces
and the individual returns to active employment within the
period during which he or she retains employment rights under
federal law.
1.34 "Loan Account". The record maintained for purposes of accounting
for a Participant's loan and payments of principal and interest
thereon.
1.35 "NHCE" or "Non-Highly Compensated Employee". An Employee described
as a Non-Highly Compensated Employee in Section 12.
1.36 "Normal Retirement Date". The date of a Participant's 65th
birthday.
1.37 "Owner". A person with an ownership interest in the capital,
profits, outstanding stock or voting power of a Related Company
within the meaning of Code section 318 or 416 (which exclude
indirect ownership through a qualified plan).
1.38 "PacifiCorp Stock". Shares of common stock of PacifiCorp, its
predecessor(s), or its successors or assigns, or any corporation
with or into which said corporation may be merged, consolidated or
reorganized, or to which a majority of its assets may be sold.
1.39 "Participant". The Plan status of an Eligible Employee after he or
she completes the eligibility requirements and enters the Plan as
described in Section 2.1 and any individual for whom assets have
been transferred from a predecessor plan merged, in whole or in
part, with the Plan. A Participant's participation continues until
his or her employment with all Related Companies ends and his or
her Account is distributed or forfeited.
1.40 "Pay". The Taxable Income paid to an Eligible Employee by an
Employer while he or she is a Participant during the current period
plus any salary credit or salary reduction pursuant to Code
sections 125 and 402(3)(e) and excluding (i) overtime, (ii)
completion bonuses and Christmas bonuses, (iii) restricted stock
awards under the Restricted Stock Plan or the Key Employee
Incentive Compensation Plan and (iv) reimbursements or other
expense allowances, cash and non-cash fringe benefits, moving
expenses, deferred compensation and welfare benefits.
Pay is limited to $150,000 per Plan Year (as adjusted for cost of
living increases pursuant to Code sections 401(a)(17) and 415(d)).
1.41 "Plan". The Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense
Plan set forth in this document, as from time to time amended.
1.42 "Plan Year". The annual accounting period of the Plan and Trust
which ends on each December 31.
1.43 "Predecessor Plans". Plans that have been merged, in whole or in
part, into the Plan, which plans, are as follows:
(a) San Marcos Telephone Company, Inc. and SM Telecorp Companies
Retirement Plan, a qualified profit sharing plan, as
described in Code section 401(a), which included a qualified
cash or deferred arrangement, as described in Code section
401(k), merged, in whole, herein effective July 1, 1993; and
(b) PacifiCorp K Plus Employee Savings Plan, a qualified profit
sharing plan, as described in Code section 401(a), which
includes a qualified cash or deferred arrangement, as
described in Code section 401(k), merged, in part, herein
effective January 10, 1998.
1.44 "QDRO". A domestic relations order which the Administrator has
determined to be a qualified domestic relations order within the
meaning of Code section 414(p).
1.45 "Related Company". With respect to any Employer, that Employer and
any corporation, trade or business which is, together with that
Employer, a member of the same controlled group of corporations, a
trade or business under common control, or an affiliated service
group within the meaning of Code sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o),
except that for purposes of Section 13 "within the meaning of Code
sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o), as modified by Code section
415(h)" shall be substituted for the preceding reference to "within
the meaning of Code sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o)".
1.46 "Required Beginning Date". The latest date benefit payments
shall commence to a Participant.
(a) For calendar years commencing before January 1, 1997, such
date shall mean:
(1) with regard to a Participant who (i) attained age 70
1/2 in 1996, (ii) did not terminate employment with
all Related Companies before January 1, 1997, and
(iii) is or was not a 5% Owner, the April 1 that next
follows the later of (i) the calendar year in which
the Participant attained age 70 1/2, or (ii) if the
Participant elects to apply this clause (ii), the
calendar year in which the Participant terminates
employment with all Related Companies (and any such
election must be made prior to January 1, 1998); and
(2) with regard to a Participant who attained age 70 1/2
before January 1, 1996 or, in 1996 if (i) he or she
terminated employment with all Related Companies
before January 1, 1997 or (ii) is or was a 5% Owner,
the April 1 that next follows the calendar year in
which the Participant attains age 70 1/2.
A Participant shall be considered a 5% Owner for this purpose
if such Participant is a 5% Owner as defined in Code section
416(i) (determined in accordance with Code section 416 but
without regard to whether the Plan is top-heavy) at any time
during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year
in which the Participant attains age 66 1/2 or in any
subsequent Plan Year.
(b) For calendar years commencing after December 31, 1996, such
date shall mean:
(1) with regard to a Participant who attained age 70 1/2
in 1997 or thereafter, the April 1 that next follows
the calendar year in which he or she attained age 70
1/2, except that if the Participant (i) did not
terminate employment with all Related Companies before
January 1 of the calendar year following the calendar
year in which he or she attained age 70 1/2, (ii) is
not a 5% Owner, such date shall instead mean the April
1 that next follows the later of (i) the calendar year
in which the Participant attained age 70 1/2, or (ii)
if the Participant elects to apply this clause (ii),
the calendar year in which the Participant terminates
employment with all Related Companies (and any such
election must be made prior to the April 1 of the
calendar year following the calendar year in which he
or she attained age 70 1/2); and
(2) with regard to a Participant who is a 5% Owner, the
April 1 that next follows the calendar year in which
the Participant attains age 70 1/2.
A Participant shall be considered a 5% Owner for this purpose
if such Participant is a 5% Owner with respect to the Plan
Year ending in the calendar year in which the Participant
attains age 70 1/2.
1.47 "Settlement Date". For each Trade Date, the Trustee's next
business day.
1.48 "Spousal Consent". The written consent given by a spouse to a
Participant's Beneficiary designation. The spouse's consent must
acknowledge the effect on the spouse of the Participant's
designation, and be duly witnessed by a Plan representative or
notary public. Spousal Consent shall be valid only with respect to
the spouse who signs the Spousal Consent and only for the
particular choice made by the Participant which requires Spousal
Consent. A Participant may revoke (without Spousal Consent) a prior
designation that required Spousal Consent at any time before
payments begin. Spousal Consent also means a determination by the
Administrator that there is no spouse, the spouse cannot be
located, or such other circumstances as may be established under
Code section 417(a)(2)(B).
1.49 "Sweep Account". The subsidiary Account for each Participant
through which all transactions are processed, which is invested in
interest bearing deposits (which may include interest bearing
deposits of the Trustee) and/or money market type assets or funds.
1.50 "Sweep Date". The cut off date and time for receiving instructions
for transactions to be processed on the next Trade Date.
1.51 "Taxable Income". Compensation in the amount reported by the
Employer or a Related Company as "Wages, tips, other compensation"
on Form W-2, or any successor method of reporting under Code
section 6041(d).
1.52 "Terminated Participant". The Plan status of a Participant who is
not an Employee and with respect to whom the Administrator has
reported to the Trustee that the Participant's employment has
terminated with all Related Companies.
1.53 "Trade Date". Each day the Investment Funds are valued, which is
normally every day the assets of such Investment Funds are traded.
1.54 "Trust". The legal entity created by those provisions of this
document which relate to the Trustee. The Trust is part of the Plan
and holds the Plan assets which are comprised of the aggregate of
Participants' Accounts and any unallocated funds invested in
interest bearing deposits (which may include interest bearing
deposits of the Trustee) and/or money market type assets or funds,
pending allocation to Participants' Accounts or disbursement to pay
Plan fees and expenses.
1.55 "Trustee". Merrill Lynch Trust Company, FSB, a federal savings
bank, chartered under the laws of the United States.
1.56 "USERRA". The Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment
Rights Act of 1994, as amended.
2 ELIGIBILITY
2.1 Eligibility
All Participants as of January 1, 1998 shall continue their
eligibility to participate. Each other Eligible Employee shall
become a Participant on the first day of employment as an Eligible
Employee.
2.2 Ineligible Employees
If an Employee completes the above eligibility requirements, but is
Ineligible at the time participation would otherwise begin (if he
or she were not Ineligible), he or she shall become a Participant
on the first subsequent date on which he or she is an Eligible
Employee.
2.3 Ineligible, Terminated or Former Participants
An Ineligible, Terminated or Former Participant may not make or
share in any Contributions, other than such Contributions due to be
made on his or her behalf after the date he or she became an
Ineligible, Terminated or Former Participant for periods prior to
such date, nor may an Ineligible or Terminated Participant be
eligible for a new Plan loan (except as described in Section 9.1),
during the period he or she is an Ineligible or Terminated
Participant, but he or she shall continue to participate for all
other purposes. An Ineligible, Terminated or Former Participant
shall automatically become an active Participant on the date he or
she again becomes an Eligible Employee.
3 PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS
3.1 Employee Pre-Tax Contribution Election
Upon becoming a Participant, an Eligible Employee may elect to
reduce his or her Pay by an amount which does not exceed the
Contribution Dollar Limit or the limits described in the
Contribution Percentage Limits paragraph of this Section 3, and
have such amount contributed to the Plan by the Employer as a
Employee Pre-Tax Contribution. The election shall be made in such
manner and with such advance notice as prescribed by the
Administrator and may be limited to a whole percentage of Pay. In
no event shall an Employee's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions under
the Plan and comparable contributions to all other plans, contracts
or arrangements of all Related Companies exceed the Contribution
Dollar Limit for the Employee's taxable year beginning in the Plan
Year.
3.2 Changing a Contribution Election
A Participant who is an Eligible Employee may change his or her
Employee Pre-Tax Contribution election as of any January 1, April
1, July 1 or October 1 in such manner and with such advance notice
as prescribed by the Administrator, and such election change shall
be effective with the first payroll period commencing after such
date. A Participant's Contribution election made as a percentage of
Pay shall automatically apply to Pay increases or decreases.
3.3 Revoking and Resuming a Contribution Election
A Participant may revoke his or her Employee Pre-Tax Contribution
election at any time in such manner and with such advance notice as
prescribed by the Administrator, and such revocation shall be
effective with the first payroll period commencing after such date.
A Participant who is an Eligible Employee may resume Employee
Pre-Tax Contributions by making a new election at the same time in
which a Participant may change his or her election in such manner
and with such advance notice as prescribed by the Administrator,
and such election shall be effective with the first payroll period
commencing after such date.
3.4 Contribution Percentage Limits
The Administrator may establish and change from time to time, in
writing, without the necessity of amending the Plan and Trust, the
minimum, if applicable, and maximum Employee Pre-Tax Contribution
percentages, prospectively or retrospectively (for the current Plan
Year), for all Participants. In addition, the Administrator may
establish any lower percentage limits for Highly Compensated
Employees as it deems necessary to satisfy the tests described in
Section 12. As of the Effective Date, the Employee Pre-Tax
Contribution minimum percentage is 1% and the maximum percentage is
10%.
Irrespective of the limits that may be established by the
Administrator in accordance with the paragraph above, in no event
shall the Contributions made by or on behalf of a Participant for a
Plan Year exceed the maximum allowable under Code section 415.
3.5 Refunds When Contribution Dollar Limit Exceeded
A Participant who makes Employee Pre-Tax Contributions for a
calendar year to the Plan and comparable contributions to any other
qualified defined contribution plan in excess of the Contribution
Dollar Limit may notify the Administrator in writing by the
following March 1 (or as late as April 14 if allowed by the
Administrator) that an excess has occurred. In this event, the
amount of the excess specified by the Participant, adjusted for
investment gain or loss, shall be refunded to him or her by the
April 15 following the year of deferral and shall not be included
as an Annual Addition (as defined in Section 13.1) under Code
section 415 for the year contributed. The excess amounts shall
first be taken from unmatched Employee Pre-Tax Contributions and
then from matched Employee Pre-Tax Contributions. Any Employer
Match Contributions attributable to refunded excess Employee
Pre-Tax Contributions as described in this Section, adjusted for
investment gain or loss, shall be forfeited and used to reduce
future Contributions to be made by an Employer as soon as
administratively feasible. Refunds and forfeitures shall not
include investment gain or loss for the period between the end of
the applicable calendar year and the date of distribution or
forfeiture.
3.6 Timing, Posting and Tax Considerations
Participants' Contributions, other than Rollover Contributions, may
only be made through payroll deduction. Such amounts shall be paid
to the Trustee in cash and posted to each Participant's Account(s)
as soon as such amounts can reasonably be separated from the
Employer's general assets and balanced against the specific amount
made on behalf of each Participant. In no event, however, shall
such amounts be paid to the Trustee more than 15 business days
following the end of the month that includes the date amounts are
deducted from a Participant's Pay (or as that maximum period may be
otherwise extended by ERISA). Employee Pre-Tax Contributions shall
be treated as Contributions made by an Employer in determining tax
deductions under Code section 404(a).
4 ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS AND TRANSFERS FROM AND TO OTHER QUALIFIED PLANS
4.1 Rollover Contributions
The Administrator may authorize the Trustee to accept a Rollover
Contribution in cash, directly from an Eligible Employee or as a
Direct Rollover from another qualified plan on behalf of the
Eligible Employee. The Employee shall be responsible for providing
satisfactory evidence, in such manner as prescribed by the
Administrator, that such Rollover Contribution qualifies as a
rollover contribution, within the meaning of Code section 402(c) or
408(d)(3)(A)(ii). Such amounts received directly from an Eligible
Employee must be paid to the Trustee in cash within 60 days after
the date received by the Eligible Employee from a qualified plan or
conduit individual retirement account. Rollover Contributions shall
be posted to the Eligible Employee's Rollover Account as of the
date received by the Trustee.
If the Administrator later determines that an amount contributed
pursuant to the above paragraph did not in fact qualify as a
rollover contribution, within the meaning of Code section 402(c) or
408(d)(3)(A)(ii), the balance credited to the Participant's
Rollover Account shall immediately be (1) segregated from all other
Plan assets, (2) treated as a nonqualified trust established by and
for the benefit of the Participant, and (3) distributed to the
Participant. Any such amount shall be deemed never to have been a
part of the Plan.
4.2 Transfers From and To Other Qualified Plans
The Administrator may instruct the Trustee to receive assets in
cash or in kind directly from another qualified plan or to transfer
assets in cash or in kind directly to another qualified plan;
provided that receipt of a transfer shall not be directed if:
(a) any amounts are not exempted by Code section 401(a)(11)(B)
from the annuity requirements of Code section 417 unless the
Plan complies with such requirements; or
(b) any amounts include benefits protected by Code section
411(d)(6) which would not be preserved under applicable Plan
provisions.
The Trustee may refuse to receive any such transfer if:
(a) the Trustee finds the in kind assets unacceptable; or
(b) instructions for posting amounts to Participants' Accounts
are incomplete.
Such amounts shall be posted to the appropriate Accounts of
Participants as of the date received by the Trustee. To the extent
a receipt of a transfer includes Participant loans, such loans
shall continue in effect subject to the terms and conditions in
effect as of the date of the transfer or as otherwise agreed to by
the Administrator.
Such transfers shall include transfers from the ESOP on behalf of
participants thereunder pursuant to the diversification
requirements of Code section 401(a)(28), at such times and in
accordance with such procedures as prescribed by the Administrator
and agreed to by the Trustee, which amounts shall thereafter be
subject to the Plan's distribution provisions.
5 EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS
5.1 Employer Match Contributions
(a) Frequency and Eligibility.
Basic Contribution: For each period for which Participants'
Contributions are made, the Employer shall make basic
Employer Match Contributions, as described in the following
Allocation Method paragraph, on behalf of each Participant
who contributed during the period.
Additional Contribution: For each Plan Year, the Employer may
make additional Employer Match Contributions, as described in
the following Allocation Method paragraph, on behalf of each
Participant who contributed during the Plan Year and was an
Eligible Employee on the last day of the Plan Year.
Discretionary Contribution: For each Plan Year, the Employer
may make discretionary Employer Match Contributions, as
described in the following Allocation Method paragraph, on
behalf of each Non-Highly Compensated Employee Participant
who contributed during the Plan Year and was an Eligible
Employee on the last day of the Plan Year.
(b) Allocation Method.
Basic Contribution: The basic Employer Match Contributions
for each period shall total 40% of each eligible
Participant's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions for the period,
provided that no basic Employer Match Contributions shall be
made based upon a Participant's Contributions in excess of 6%
of his or her Pay and except that "25% of each eligible
Participant's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions" shall be
substituted for the preceding reference to "40% of each
eligible Participant's Employee Pre-Tax Contributions" with
regard to an eligible Participant who is a corporate officer
of the Employer. The percentage matching rate and percentage
of considered Pay as stated in the preceding sentence shall
continue in effect until otherwise changed by resolution of
the Employer's board of directors.
Additional Contribution: The additional Employer Match
Contributions for the Plan Year shall be in an amount
determined by the Employer and allocated in proportion to
each eligible Participant's basic Employer Match
Contributions for the Plan Year to the total of all such
Contributions for all other Participants eligible for
additional Employer Match Contributions.
Discretionary Contribution: The discretionary Employer Match
Contributions for the Plan Year shall be in an amount
determined by the Employer and allocated in proportion to
each eligible Participant's basic Employer Match
Contributions for the Plan Year to the total of all such
Contributions for all other Participants eligible for
discretionary Employer Match Contributions.
(c) Timing, Medium and Posting.
Basic Contribution: The Employer shall make each period's
basic Employer Match Contribution in cash as soon as
administratively feasible, and for purposes of deducting such
Contribution, not later than the Employer's federal tax
filing date, including extensions. Such amounts shall be paid
to the Trustee and posted to each Participant's Employer
Match Account once the total basic Employer Match
Contribution received has been balanced against the specific
amount to be credited to each Participant's Employer Match
Account.
Additional Contribution: If additional Employer Match
Contributions are made, the Employer shall make each Plan
Year's additional Employer Match Contribution in cash as soon
as administratively feasible, and for purposes of deducting
such Contribution, not later than the Employer's federal tax
filing date, including extensions. Such amounts shall be paid
to the Trustee and posted to each Participant's Additional
Match Account once the total additional Employer Match
Contribution received has been balanced against the specific
amount to be credited to each Participant's Additional Match
Account.
Discretionary Contribution: If discretionary Employer Match
Contributions are made, the Employer shall make each Plan
Year's discretionary Employer Match Contribution in cash as
soon as administratively feasible, and for purposes of
deducting such Contribution, not later than the Employer's
federal tax filing date, including extensions.
Notwithstanding, for purposes of satisfying the tests
described in Section 12, discretionary Employer Match
Contributions shall be made before the end of the Plan Year
following the Plan Year being tested. Such amounts shall be
paid to the Trustee and posted to each Participant's
Discretionary Match Account once the total discretionary
Employer Match Contribution received has been balanced
against the specific amount to be credited to each
Participant's Discretionary Match Account.
6 ACCOUNTING
6.1 Individual Participant Accounting
The Administrator shall maintain an individual set of Accounts for
each Participant in order to reflect transactions both by type of
Account and investment medium. Financial transactions shall be
accounted for at the individual Account level by posting each
transaction to the appropriate Account of each affected
Participant. Participant Account values shall be maintained in
shares for the Investment Funds and in dollars for the Sweep and
Loan Accounts. At any point in time, the Account value shall be
determined using the most recent Trade Date values provided by the
Trustee.
6.2 Sweep Account is Transaction Account
All transactions related to amounts being contributed to or
distributed from the Trust shall be posted to each affected
Participant's Sweep Account. Any amount held in the Sweep Account
shall be credited with interest up until the date on which it is
removed from the Sweep Account.
6.3 Trade Date Accounting and Investment Cycle
Participant Account values shall be determined as of each Trade
Date. For any transaction to be processed as of a Trade Date, the
Trustee must receive instructions for the transaction by the Sweep
Date. Such instructions shall apply to amounts held in the Account
on that Sweep Date. Financial transactions of the Investment Funds
shall be posted to Participants' Accounts as of the Trade Date,
based upon the Trade Date values provided by the Trustee, and
settled on the Settlement Date.
6.4 Accounting for Investment Funds
Investments in each Investment Fund shall be maintained in shares.
The Trustee is responsible for determining the share values of each
Investment Fund as of each Trade Date. To the extent an Investment
Fund is comprised of collective investment funds offered by the
Trustee or any other entity authorized to offer collective
investment funds, the share values shall be determined in
accordance with the rules governing such collective investment
funds, which are incorporated herein by reference. All other share
values shall be determined by the Trustee. The share value of each
Investment Fund shall be based on the fair market value of its
underlying assets.
6.5 Payment of Fees and Expenses
Except to the extent Plan fees and expenses related to Account
maintenance, transaction and Investment Fund management and
maintenance, set forth below, are paid by the Employer directly,
such fees and expenses shall be paid as set forth below.
(a) Account Maintenance: Account maintenance fees and
expenses, may include but are not limited to,
administrative, Trustee, government annual report
preparation, audit, legal, nondiscrimination testing and
fees for any other special services. Account maintenance
fees shall be charged to Participants on a per Participant
basis provided that no fee shall reduce a Participant's
Account balance below zero.
(b) Transaction: Transaction fees and expenses, may include but
are not limited to, periodic installment payment, Investment
Fund election change and loan fees. Transaction fees shall be
charged to the Participant's Account involved in the
transaction provided that no fee shall reduce a Participant's
Account balance below zero.
(c) Investment Fund Management and Maintenance: Management and
maintenance fees and expenses related to the Investment Funds
shall be charged at the Investment Fund level and reflected
in the net gain or loss of each Investment Fund.
The Company may determine that the Employers pay a lower portion of
the fees and expenses allocable to the Accounts of Participants who
are no longer Employees or who are not Beneficiaries, unless doing
so would result in discrimination prohibited under Code section
401(a)(4) or a significant detriment prohibited by Code section
411(a)(11). As of the Effective Date, a breakdown of which Plan
fees and expenses shall generally be borne by the Trust (and
charged to individual Participants' Accounts or charged at the
Investment Fund level and reflected in the net gain or loss of each
Investment Fund) and those that shall be paid by the Employer is
set forth in Appendix C, which may be changed from time to time by
the Company, in writing, without the necessity of amending the Plan
and Trust.
The Trustee shall have the authority to pay any such fees and
expenses, which remain unpaid by the Employer for 60 days, from the
Trust.
6.6 Accounting for Participant Loans
Participant loans shall be held in a separate Loan Account of the
Participant and accounted for in dollars as an earmarked asset of
the borrowing Participant's Account.
6.7 Error Correction
The Administrator may correct any errors or omissions in the
administration of the Plan by restoring any Participant's Account
balance with the amount that would be credited to the Account had
no error or omission been made. Funds necessary for any such
restoration shall be provided through payment made by the Employer,
or by the Trustee to the extent the error or omission is
attributable to actions or inactions of the Trustee.
6.8 Participant Statements
The Administrator shall provide Participants with statements of
their Accounts as soon after the end of each quarter of the Plan
Year as administratively feasible.
6.9 Special Accounting During Conversion Period
The Administrator and Trustee may use any reasonable accounting
methods in performing their respective duties during any Conversion
Period. This includes, but is not limited to, the method for
allocating net investment gains or losses and the extent, if any,
to which contributions received by and distributions paid from the
Trust during this period share in such allocation.
6.10 Accounts for Alternate Payees
A separate Account shall be established for an Alternate Payee
entitled to any portion of a Participant's Account under a QDRO as
of the date and in accordance with the directions specified in the
QDRO. In addition, a separate Account may be established during the
period of time the Administrator, a court of competent jurisdiction
or other appropriate person is determining whether a domestic
relations order qualifies as a QDRO. Such a separate Account shall
be valued and accounted for in the same manner as any other
Account.
(a) Distributions Pursuant to QDROs. If a QDRO so provides,
the portion of a Participant's Account payable to an
Alternate Payee may be distributed, in a form permissible
under Section 11, to the Alternate Payee at any time
beginning as soon as practicable after the QDRO
determination is made, regardless of whether the
Participant is entitled to a distribution from the Plan at
such time. The Alternate Payee shall be provided the
notice prescribed by Code section 402(f).
(b) Participant Loans. Except to the extent required by law,
an Alternate Payee, on whose behalf a separate Account has
been established, shall not be entitled to borrow from
such Account. If a QDRO specifies that the Alternate Payee
is entitled to any portion of the Account of a Participant
who has an outstanding loan balance, all outstanding loans
shall generally continue to be held in the Participant's
Account and shall not be divided between the Participant's
and Alternate Payee's Accounts.
(c) Investment Direction. Where a separate Account has been
established on behalf of an Alternate Payee and has not yet
been distributed, the Alternate Payee may direct the
investment of such Account in the same manner as if he or she
were a Participant.
7 INVESTMENT FUNDS AND ELECTIONS
7.1 Investment Funds
Except for Participants' Sweep and Loan Accounts and any
unallocated funds invested in interest bearing deposits (which may
include interest bearing deposits of the Trustee) and/or money
market type assets or funds, pending allocation to Participants'
Accounts or disbursement to pay Plan fees and expenses, the Trust
shall be maintained in various Investment Funds. The Administrator
shall select the Investment Funds offered to Participants and may
change the number or composition of the Investment Funds, subject
to the terms and conditions agreed to with the Trustee. As of the
Effective Date, a list of the Investment Funds offered under the
Plan is set forth in Appendix B, which may be changed from time to
time by the Administrator, in writing, and as agreed to by the
Trustee, without the necessity of amending the Plan and Trust.
The Administrator may set a maximum percentage of the total
election that a Participant may direct into any specific Investment
Fund, which maximum, if any, as of the Effective Date is set forth
in Appendix B, which may be changed from time to time by the
Administrator, in writing, without the necessity of amending the
Plan and Trust.
7.2 Responsibility for Investment Choice
Each Participant shall direct the investment of all of his or her
Accounts except for his or her Employer Match, Additional Match and
Discretionary Match Accounts which shall be entirely invested in
the Investment Fund specified by the Administrator, which
Investment Fund as of the Effective Date is set forth in Appendix B
and except that a Participant who has attained age 55 may direct
the investment of the balances in these Accounts. Future amounts
deposited to his or her Employer Match, Additional Match and
Discretionary Match Accounts shall continue to be entirely invested
in the Investment Fund specified by the Administrator, until
otherwise directed by the Participant.
Each Participant shall be solely responsible for the selection of
his or her Investment Fund choices. No fiduciary with respect to
the Plan is empowered to advise a Participant as to the manner in
which his or her Accounts are to be invested, and the fact that an
Investment Fund is offered shall not be construed to be a
recommendation for investment.
During any Conversion Period, Trust assets may be held in any
investment vehicle permitted by the Plan, as directed by the
Administrator, irrespective of prior Participant investment
elections.
7.3 Investment Fund Elections
A Participant shall provide his or her initial investment election
upon becoming a Participant and may change his or her investment
election at any time in accordance with procedures established by
the Administrator and the Trustee. A Participant shall make his or
her investment election in any combination of one or any number of
the Investment Funds offered in accordance with the procedures
established by the Administrator and Trustee. Investment elections
received by the Trustee by the Sweep Date shall be effective on the
following Trade Date.
7.4 Default if No Valid Investment Election
The Administrator shall specify an Investment Fund for the
investment of that portion of a Participant's Account which is not
yet held in an Investment Fund and for which no valid investment
election is on file. The Investment Fund specified as of the
Effective Date is set forth in Appendix B, which may be changed
from time to time by the Administrator, in writing, without the
necessity of amending the Plan and Trust.
7.5 Investment Fund Election Change Fees
A reasonable processing fee may be charged directly to a
Participant's Account for Investment Fund election changes in
excess of a specified number per year as determined by the
Administrator.
8 VESTING
8.1 Fully Vested Accounts
A Participant shall be fully vested in all Accounts at all times.
9 PARTICIPANT LOANS
9.1 Participant Loans Permitted
Loans to Participants and Beneficiaries are permitted pursuant to
the terms and conditions set forth in this Section, except that a
loan shall not be permitted to a Participant who is no longer an
Employee or to a Beneficiary, unless such Participant or
Beneficiary is otherwise a party in interest (as defined in ERISA
section 3(14)).
9.2 Loan Application, Note and Security
A Participant shall apply for any loan in such manner and with such
advance notice as prescribed by the Administrator. Each loan shall
be evidenced by a promissory note, secured only by the portion of
the Participant's Account from which the loan is made, and the Plan
shall have a lien on this portion of his or her Account.
9.3 Spousal Consent
A Participant is not required to obtain Spousal Consent in order to
borrow from his or her Account under the Plan.
9.4 Loan Approval
The Administrator, or the Trustee, if otherwise authorized by the
Administrator and agreed to by the Trustee, is responsible for
determining that a loan request conforms to the requirements
described in this Section and granting such request.
9.5 Loan Funding Limits, Account Sources and Funding Order
The loan amount must meet all of the following limits as determined
as of the Sweep Date the loan is processed and shall be funded from
the Participant's Accounts as follows:
(a) Plan Minimum Limit. The minimum amount for any loan is
$1,000.
(b) Plan Maximum Limit, Account Sources and Funding Order.
Subject to the legal limit described in (c) below, the
maximum a Participant may borrow, including the aggregate
outstanding balances of existing Plan loans, is 100% of the
following of the Participant's Accounts which are fully
vested in the priority order as follows:
Employee Pre-Tax Account
Rollover Account
After-Tax Account
(c) Legal Maximum Limit. The maximum a Participant may
borrow, including the aggregate outstanding balances of
existing Plan loans, is 50% of his or her vested Account
balance, not to exceed $50,000. However, the $50,000
maximum is reduced by the Participant's highest aggregate
outstanding Plan loan balance during the 12-month period
ending on the day before the Sweep Date as of which the
loan is made. For purposes of this paragraph, the
qualified plans of all Related Companies shall be treated
as though they are part of the Plan to the extent it would
decrease the maximum loan amount.
9.6 Maximum Number of Loans
A Participant may have only one loan outstanding at any given time,
except that a Participant may have more than one loan outstanding
if all such loans were initiated under a Predecessor Plan.
9.7 Source and Timing of Loan Funding
A loan to a Participant shall be made solely from the assets of his
or her own Account. The available assets shall be determined first
by Account and then within each Account used for funding a loan,
amounts shall first be taken from the Sweep Account and then taken
by Investment Fund in direct proportion to the market value of the
Participant's interest in each Investment Fund as of the Trade Date
on which the loan is processed.
The loan shall be funded on the Settlement Date following the Trade
Date as of which the loan is processed. The Trustee shall make
payment to the Participant as soon thereafter as administratively
feasible.
9.8 Interest Rate
The interest rate charged on Participant loans shall be a fixed
reasonable rate of interest, determined from time to time by the
Administrator, which provides the Plan with a return commensurate
with the prevailing interest rate charged by persons in the
business of lending money for loans which would be made under
similar circumstances. As of the Effective Date, the interest rate
is determined as set forth in Appendix D, which may be changed from
time to time by the Administrator, in writing, without the
necessity of amending the Plan and Trust.
9.9 Loan Payment
Substantially level amortization shall be required of each loan
with payments made at least monthly, generally through payroll
deduction. Loans may be prepaid in full or in part at any time. The
Participant may choose the loan repayment period, not to exceed
five years, except that the repayment period may be for any period
not to exceed 10 years if the purpose of the loan is to acquire the
Participant's principal residence.
9.10 Loan Payment Hierarchy
Loan principal payments shall be credited to the Participant's
Accounts in the inverse of the order used to fund the loan. Loan
interest shall be credited to the Participant's Accounts in direct
proportion to the principal payment. Loan payments credited to
Accounts for which the Participant directs investment as described
in Section 7 are credited to the Investment Funds based upon the
Participant's current investment election for new Contributions.
Loan payments credited to Accounts for which the Participant does
not direct investment as described in Section 7 are credited to the
Investment Funds specified by the Administrator for such Accounts.
9.11 Repayment Suspension
The Administrator may agree to a suspension of loan payments for up
to 12 months for a Participant who is on a Leave of Absence without
pay. During the suspension period, interest shall continue to
accrue on the outstanding loan balance. At the expiration of the
suspension period all outstanding loan payments and accrued
interest thereon shall be due unless otherwise agreed upon by the
Administrator.
9.12 Loan Default
A loan is treated as in default if a scheduled loan payment is not
made at the time required. A Participant shall then have a grace
period to cure the default before it becomes final. Such grace
period shall be for a period that does not extend beyond the last
day of the calendar quarter following the calendar quarter in which
the scheduled loan payment was due or such lesser or greater
maximum period as may later be authorized by Code section 72(p).
In the event a default is not cured within the grace period, the
Administrator may direct the Trustee to report the outstanding
principal balance of the loan and accrued interest thereon as a
taxable distribution to the Participant. As soon as a Plan
withdrawal or distribution to such Participant would otherwise be
permitted, the Administrator may instruct the Trustee to execute
upon its security interest in the Participant's Account by
distributing the note to the Participant.
9.13 Call Feature
The Administrator shall have the right to call any Participant loan
once a Participant's employment with all Related Companies has
terminated, unless he or she is otherwise a party in interest (as
defined in ERISA section 3(14)), or if the Plan is terminated.
10 IN-SERVICE WITHDRAWALS
10.1 In-Service Withdrawals Permitted
In-service withdrawals to a Participant who is an Employee are
permitted pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth in this
Section and pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth in
Section 11 with regard to an in-service withdrawal made in
accordance with a Participant's Required Beginning Date.
10.2 In-Service Withdrawal Application and Notice
A Participant shall apply for any in-service withdrawal in such
manner and with such advance notice as prescribed by the
Administrator. The Participant shall be provided the notice
prescribed by Code section 402(f).
Code sections 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply to in-service
withdrawals under the Plan. An in-service withdrawal may commence
less than 30 days after the aforementioned notice is provided, if:
(a) the Participant is clearly informed that he or she has the
right to a period of at least 30 days after receipt of such
notice to consider his or her option to elect or not elect a
Direct Rollover for all or a portion, if any, of his or her
in-service withdrawal which constitutes an Eligible Rollover
Distribution; and
(b) the Participant after receiving such notice, affirmatively
elects a Direct Rollover for all or a portion, if any, of his
or her in-service withdrawal which constitutes an Eligible
Rollover Distribution or alternatively elects to have all or
a portion made payable directly to him or her, thereby not
electing a Direct Rollover for all or a portion thereof.
10.3 Spousal Consent
A Participant is not required to obtain Spousal Consent in order to
receive an in-service withdrawal under the Plan.
10.4 In-Service Withdrawal Approval
The Administrator, or the Trustee, if otherwise authorized by the
Administrator and agreed to by the Trustee, is responsible for
determining whether an in-service withdrawal request conforms to
the requirements described in this Section and granting such
request.
10.5 Payment Form and Medium
The form of payment for an in-service withdrawal shall be a single
lump sum and payment shall be made in cash. With regard to the
portion of an in-service withdrawal representing an Eligible
Rollover Distribution, a Participant may elect a Direct Rollover
for all or a portion of such amount.
10.6 Source and Timing of In-Service Withdrawal Funding
An in-service withdrawal to a Participant shall be made solely from
the assets of his or her own Account and shall be based on the
Account values as of the Trade Date the in-service withdrawal is
processed. The available assets shall be determined first by
Account and then within each Account used for funding an in-service
withdrawal, amounts shall first be taken from the Sweep Account and
then taken by Investment Fund in direct proportion to the market
value of the Participant's interest in each Investment Fund (which
excludes his or her Loan Account balance) as of the Trade Date on
which the in-service withdrawal is processed.
The in-service withdrawal shall be funded on the Settlement Date
following the Trade Date as of which the in-service withdrawal is
processed. The Trustee shall make payment to the Participant or on
behalf of the Participant as soon thereafter as administratively
feasible.
10.7 Hardship Withdrawals
(a) Requirements. A Participant who is an Employee may
request the withdrawal of up to the amount necessary to
satisfy a financial need including amounts necessary to
pay any federal, state or local income taxes or penalties
reasonably anticipated to result from the withdrawal.
Only requests for withdrawals (1) on account of a
Participant's "Deemed Financial Need" and (2) which are
"Deemed Necessary" to satisfy the financial need shall be
approved.
(b) "Deemed Financial Need". An immediate and heavy financial
need relating to:
(1) the payment of unreimbursed medical care expenses
(described under Code section 213(d)) incurred (or to
be incurred) by the Employee, his or her spouse or
dependents (as defined in Code section 152);
(2) the payment of unreimbursed tuition, related
educational fees and room and board for up to the next
12 months of post-secondary education for the
Employee, his or her spouse or dependents (as defined
in Code section 152);
(3) the payment of funeral expenses of an Employee's
family member; or
(4) the payment of amounts necessary for the Employee to
prevent losing his or her principal residence through
eviction or foreclosure on the mortgage.
(c) "Deemed Necessary". A withdrawal is "Deemed Necessary" to
satisfy the financial need only if the withdrawal amount does
not exceed the financial need and all of these conditions are
met:
(1) the Employee has obtained all possible withdrawals
(other than hardship withdrawals) and nontaxable loans
available from the Plan and all other plans maintained
by Related Companies;
(2) the Administrator shall suspend the Employee from
making any contributions to the Plan and all other
qualified and nonqualified plans of deferred
compensation and all stock option or stock purchase
plans maintained by Related Companies for 12 months
from the date the withdrawal payment is made; and
(3) the Administrator shall reduce the Contribution Dollar
Limit for the Employee with regard to the Plan and all
other plans maintained by Related Companies, for the
calendar year next following the calendar year of the
withdrawal by the amount of the Employee's Employee
Pre-Tax Contributions for the calendar year of the
withdrawal.
(d) Account Sources and Funding Order. All available amounts must
first be withdrawn from a Participant's After-Tax Account.
The remaining withdrawal shall come from the following of the
Participant's fully vested Accounts, in the priority order as
follows:
Rollover Account
Employee Pre-Tax Account
The amount that may be withdrawn from a Participant's
Employee Pre-Tax Account shall not include any amounts
attributable to earnings.
(e) Minimum Amount. There is no minimum amount for a hardship
withdrawal.
(f) Permitted Frequency. There is no restriction on the number of
hardship withdrawals permitted to a Participant.
(g) Suspension from Further Contributions. Upon making a
hardship withdrawal, a Participant may not make additional
Employee Pre-Tax Contributions (or additional
contributions to all other qualified and nonqualified
plans of deferred compensation and all stock option or
stock purchase plans maintained by Related Companies) for
a period of 12 months from the date the withdrawal payment
is made.
10.8 After-Tax Account Withdrawals
(a) Requirements. A Participant who is an Employee may make an
After-Tax Account withdrawal.
(b) Account Sources and Funding Order. The withdrawal shall come
from a Participant's After-Tax Account.
(c) Minimum Amount. There is no minimum amount for an After-Tax
Account withdrawal.
(d) Permitted Frequency. There is no restriction on the
number of After-Tax Account withdrawals permitted to a
Participant.
(e) Suspension from Further Contributions. An After-Tax Account
withdrawal shall not affect a Participant's ability to make
or be eligible to receive further Contributions.
10.9 Rollover Account Withdrawals
(a) Requirements. A Participant who is an Employee may make a
Rollover Account withdrawal.
(b) Account Sources and Funding Order. The withdrawal shall come
from a Participant's Rollover Account.
(c) Minimum Amount. There is no minimum amount for a Rollover
Account withdrawal.
(d) Permitted Frequency. There is no restriction on the
number of Rollover Account withdrawals permitted to a
Participant.
(e) Suspension from Further Contributions. A Rollover Account
withdrawal shall not affect a Participant's ability to make
or be eligible to receive further Contributions.
10.10 Disabled Participant Withdrawals
(a) Requirements. A Participant who is an Employee and a
Disabled Participant may make a Disabled Participant
withdrawal.
(b) Account Sources and Funding Order. The withdrawal shall come
from the following of the Participant's fully vested
Accounts, in the priority order as follows, except that the
Participant may instead choose to have amounts taken from his
or her After-Tax Account first:
Rollover Account
Employee Pre-Tax Account
Discretionary Match Account
Employer Match Account
Additional Match Account
Prior Match Account
ESOP Transfer Account
After-Tax Account
(c) Minimum Amount. There is no minimum amount for a Disabled
Participant withdrawal.
(d) Permitted Frequency. The maximum number of Disabled
Participant withdrawals permitted to a Participant in any
three-month period is one.
(e) Suspension from Further Contributions. A Disabled Participant
withdrawal shall not affect a Participant's ability to make
or be eligible to receive further Contributions.
10.11 Over Age 59 1/2 Withdrawals
(a) Requirements. A Participant who is an Employee and over age
59 1/2 may make an Over Age 59 1/2 withdrawal.
(b) Account Sources and Funding Order. The withdrawal shall come
from the following of the Participant's fully vested
Accounts, in the priority order as follows, except that the
Participant may instead choose to have amounts taken from his
or her After-Tax Account first:
Rollover Account
Employee Pre-Tax Account
Discretionary Match Account
Employer Match Account
Additional Match Account
Prior Match Account
ESOP Transfer Account
After-Tax Account
(c) Minimum Amount. There is no minimum amount for an Over Age 59
1/2 withdrawal.
(d) Permitted Frequency. There is no restriction on the
number of Over Age 59 1/2 withdrawals permitted to a
Participant.
(e) Suspension from Further Contributions. An Over Age 59 1/2
withdrawal shall not affect a Participant's ability to make
or be eligible to receive further Contributions.
11 DISTRIBUTIONS ONCE EMPLOYMENT ENDS OR BY REASON OF A PARTICIPANT'S
REQUIRED BEGINNING DATE
11.1 Benefit Information, Notices and Election
A Participant, or his or her Beneficiary in the case of his or her
death, shall be provided with information regarding all optional
times and forms of distribution available under the Plan, including
the notices prescribed by Code sections 402(f) and 411(a)(11).
Subject to the other requirements of this Section, a Participant,
or his or her Beneficiary in the case of his or her death, may
elect, in such manner and with such advance notice as prescribed by
the Administrator, to have his or her vested Account balance
distributed beginning upon any Settlement Date following the
Participant's termination of employment with all Related Companies
and a reasonable period of time during which the Administrator
shall process, and inform the Trustee of, the Participant's
termination or, if earlier, at the time of the Participant's
Required Beginning Date.
Notwithstanding, if a Participant's termination of employment with
all Related Companies does not constitute a separation from service
for purposes of Code section 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(I) or otherwise
constitute an event set forth under Code section 401(k)(10)(A)(ii)
or (iii) as described in Section 19.3, the portion of a
Participant's Account subject to the distribution rules of Code
section 401(k) may not be distributed until such time as he or she
separates from service for purposes of Code section
401(k)(2)(B)(i)(I) or, if earlier, upon such other event as
described in Code section 401(k)(2)(B) and as provided for in the
Plan.
Code sections 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply to distributions
under the Plan. A distribution may commence less than 30 days after
the aforementioned notices are provided, if:
(a) the Participant is clearly informed that he or she has the
right to a period of at least 30 days after receipt of
such notices to consider the decision as to whether to
elect a distribution and if so to elect a particular form
of distribution and to elect or not elect a Direct
Rollover for all or a portion, if any, of his or her
distribution which constitutes an Eligible Rollover
Distribution; and
(b) the Participant after receiving such notices, affirmatively
elects a distribution and a Direct Rollover for all or a
portion, if any, of his or her distribution which constitutes
an Eligible Rollover Distribution or alternatively elects to
have all or a portion made payable directly to him or her,
thereby not electing a Direct Rollover for all or a portion
thereof.
11.2 Spousal Consent
A Participant is not required to obtain Spousal Consent in order to
receive a distribution under the Plan.
11.3 Payment Form and Medium
Except to the extent otherwise provided by Section
(a) a single lump sum;
(b) a portion paid in a lump sum, and the remainder paid later
(partial payment); or
(c) periodic installments over a period not to exceed 15 years.
Distributions shall be made in cash, except to the extent a
distribution consists of a loan call as described in Section 9 and
except that a Participant may elect that a distribution in the form
of a lump sum be made in the form of (i) whole shares of Company
Stock and cash in lieu of fractional shares to the extent the
distribution consists of amounts from the Company Stock Fund and/or
(ii) whole shares of PacifiCorp Stock and cash in lieu of
fractional shares to the extent the distribution consists of
amounts from the PacifiCorp Stock Fund. With regard to the portion
of a distribution representing an Eligible Rollover Distribution, a
Distributee may elect a Direct Rollover for all or a portion of
such amount.
11.4 Distribution of Small Amounts
If after a Participant's employment with all Related Companies
ends, the Participant's vested Account balance is $5,000 or less,
and if at the time of any prior in-service withdrawal or
distribution the Participant's vested Account balance did not
exceed $5,000, the Participant's benefit shall be paid as a single
lump sum as soon as administratively feasible in accordance with
procedures prescribed by the Administrator.
11.5 Source and Timing of Distribution Funding
A distribution to a Participant shall be made solely from the
assets of his or her own Account and shall be based on the Account
values as of the Trade Date the distribution is processed. The
available assets shall be determined first by Account and then
within each Account used for funding a distribution, amounts shall
first be taken from the Sweep Account and then taken by Investment
Fund in direct proportion to the market value of the Participant's
interest in each Investment Fund as of the Trade Date on which the
distribution is processed.
The distribution shall be funded on the Settlement Date following
the Trade Date as of which the distribution is processed. The
Trustee shall make payment to the Participant or on behalf of the
Participant as soon thereafter as administratively feasible.
11.6 Latest Commencement Permitted
In addition to any other Plan requirements and unless a Participant
elects otherwise, his or her benefit payments shall begin not later
than 60 days after the end of the Plan Year in which he or she
attains his or her Normal Retirement Date or retires, whichever is
later. However, if the amount of the payment or the location of the
Participant (after a reasonable search) cannot be ascertained by
that deadline, payment shall be made no later than 60 days after
the earliest date on which such amount or location is ascertained
but in no event later than the Participant's Required Beginning
Date. A Participant's failure to elect in such manner as prescribed
by the Administrator to have his or her vested Account balance
distributed, shall be deemed an election by the Participant to
defer his or her distribution but in no event shall his or her
benefit payments commence later than his or her Required Beginning
Date.
With regard to a Participant who is an Employee and who commenced
benefit payments in accordance with Code section 401(a)(9) as in
effect prior to January 1, 1997, and who is not a 5% Owner, he or
she may, but is not required to, discontinue such benefit payments
until he or she is otherwise required to again commence benefit
payments in accordance with Code section 401(a)(9) as in effect for
calendar years commencing after December 31, 1996. A Participant
who elects to discontinue such benefit payments in accordance with
the preceding sentence shall thereby render his or her existing
payment election and, if applicable, any Spousal Consent to such
election, as void and a new election including, if applicable,
Spousal Consent to such new election, shall be required subject to
the provisions of this Section 11 at the time he or she is required
to again commence benefit payments in accordance with Code section
401(a)(9) as in effect for calendar years commencing after December
31, 1996.
If benefit payments cannot begin at the time required because the
location of the Participant cannot be ascertained (after a
reasonable search), the Administrator may, at any time thereafter,
treat such person's Account as forfeited subject to the provisions
of Section 18.6.
11.7 Payment Within Life Expectancy
The Participant's payment election must be consistent with the
requirement of Code section 401(a)(9) that all payments are to be
completed within a period not to exceed the lives or the joint and
last survivor life expectancy of the Participant and his or her
Beneficiary. The life expectancies of a Participant and his or her
Beneficiary may not be recomputed annually.
11.8 Incidental Benefit Rule
The Participant's payment election must be consistent with the
requirement that, if the Participant's spouse is not his or her
sole primary Beneficiary, the minimum annual distribution for each
calendar year, beginning with the calendar year preceding the
calendar year that includes the Participant's Required Beginning
Date, shall not be less than the quotient obtained by dividing (a)
the Participant's vested Account balance as of the last Trade Date
of the preceding year by (b) the applicable divisor as determined
under the incidental benefit requirements of Code section
401(a)(9).
11.9 Payment to Beneficiary
Payment to a Beneficiary must either (i) be completed by the end of
the calendar year that contains the fifth anniversary of the
Participant's death or (ii) begin by the end of the calendar year
that contains the first anniversary of the Participant's death and
be completed within the period of the Beneficiary's life or life
expectancy, except that:
(a) If the Participant dies after his or her Required Beginning
Date, payment to his or her Beneficiary must be made at least
as rapidly as provided in the Participant's distribution
election;
(b) If the surviving spouse is the Beneficiary, payments need not
begin until the later of (i) the end of the calendar year
that includes the first anniversary of the Participant's
death, or (ii) the end of the calendar year in which the
Participant would have attained age 70 1/2 and must be
completed within the spouse's life or life expectancy; and
(c) If the Participant and the surviving spouse who is the
Beneficiary die (i) before the Participant's Required
Beginning Date and (ii) before payments have begun to the
spouse, the spouse shall be treated as the Participant in
applying these rules.
11.10 Beneficiary Designation
Each Participant may complete a beneficiary designation form
indicating the Beneficiary who is to receive the Participant's
remaining Plan interest at the time of his or her death and such
designation may be changed at any time. However, a Participant's
spouse shall be the sole primary Beneficiary unless the designation
includes Spousal Consent for another Beneficiary. If no proper
designation is in effect at the time of a Participant's death or if
the Beneficiary does not survive the Participant, the Beneficiary
shall be, in the order listed, the:
(a) Participant's surviving spouse,
(b) Participant's children, in equal shares, (or if a child does
not survive the Participant, and that child leaves issue, the
issue shall be entitled to that child's share, by right of
representation) or
(c) Participant's estate.
12 ADP AND ACP TESTS
12.1 Contribution Limitation Definitions
The following definitions are applicable to this Section 12 (where
a definition is contained in both Sections 1 and 12, for purposes
of Section 12 the Section 12 definition shall be controlling):
(a) "ACP" or "Average Contribution Percentage". The Average
Percentage calculated using Contributions allocated to
Participants as of a date within the Plan Year.
(b) "ACP Test". The determination of whether the ACP is in
compliance with the Basic or Alternative Limitation for a
Plan Year (as defined in Section 12.2).
(c) "ADP" or "Average Deferral Percentage". The Average
Percentage calculated using Deferrals allocated to
Participants as of a date within the Plan Year.
(d) "ADP Test". The determination of whether the ADP is in
compliance with the Basic or Alternative Limitation for a
Plan Year (as defined in Section 12.2).
(e) "Average Percentage". The average of the calculated
percentages for Participants within the specified group.
The calculated percentage refers to either the "Deferrals"
or "Contributions" (as defined in this Section) made on
each Participant's behalf for the Plan Year, divided by
his or her Compensation. (Employee Pre-Tax Contributions
to the Plan or comparable contributions to plans of
Related Companies which must be refunded solely because
they exceed the Contribution Dollar Limit are included in
the percentage for the HCE Group but not for the NHCE
Group.)
(f) "Contributions" (i) shall include Employer Match
Contributions and (ii) may include Employee Pre-Tax
Contributions, but with regard to (ii), only to the extent
that (1) the Administrator elects to use them, (2) they
are not used or counted in the ADP Test and (3) they
otherwise satisfy the requirements as prescribed under
Code section 401(m) permitting treatment as Contributions
for purposes of the ACP Test.
(g) "Current Year Testing Method". The use of the Plan Year's ADP
for the Plan Year's NHCE Group for purposes of performing the
Plan Year's ADP Test and/or the use of the Plan Year's ACP
for the Plan Year's NHCE Group for purposes of performing the
Plan Year's ACP Test.
(h) "Deferrals" (i) shall include Employee Pre-Tax
Contributions and (ii) may include Employer Match
Contributions, but with regard to (ii), only to the extent
that (1) the Administrator elects to use them, (2) they
are not used or counted in the ACP Test, (3) they are
fully vested when made, not withdrawable by an Employee
before he or she attains age 59 1/2and (4) they otherwise
satisfy the requirements as prescribed under Code section
401(k) permitting treatment as Deferrals for purposes of
the ADP Test.
(i) "HCE" or "Highly Compensated Employee". For Plan Years
commencing after December 31, 1996, with respect to all
Related Companies, an Employee who (in accordance with Code
section 414(q)):
(1) Was a more than 5% Owner (within the meaning of Code
section 414(q)(2)) at any time during the Plan Year or
the preceding Plan Year; or
(2) Received Compensation during the preceding Plan Year
in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted for such Year
pursuant to Code sections 414(q)(1) and 415(d)) or, if
the Company elects for such preceding Plan Year, "in
excess of $80,000 (as adjusted for such Year pursuant
to Code sections 414(q)(1) and 415(d)) and was a
member of the "top-paid group" (within the meaning of
Code section 414(q)(3)) for such preceding Plan Year"
shall be substituted for the preceding reference to
"in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted for such Year
pursuant to Code sections 414(q)(1) and 415(d))".
A former Employee shall be treated as an HCE if (1) such
former Employee was an HCE when he or she separated from
service, or (2) such former Employee was an HCE in service at
any time after attaining age 55.
The determination of who is an HCE and the determination of
the number and identity of Employees in the top-paid group
shall be made in accordance with Code section 414(q).
(j) "HCE Group" and "NHCE Group". With respect to all Related
Companies, the respective group of HCEs and NHCEs who are
eligible to have amounts contributed on their behalf for
the respective Plan Year, including Employees who would be
eligible but for their election not to participate or to
contribute, or because their Pay is greater than zero but
does not exceed a stated minimum. For Plan Years
commencing after December 31, 1998, with respect to all
Related Companies, if the Plan permits participation prior
to an Eligible Employee's satisfaction of the minimum age
and service requirements of Code section 410(a)(1)(A),
Eligible Employees who have not met the minimum age and
service requirements of Code section 410(a)(1)(A) may be
excluded in the determination of the NHCE Group, but not
in the determination of the HCE Group, for purposes of (i)
the ADP Test, if Code section 410(b)(4)(B) is applied in
determining whether the 401(k) portion of the Plan meets
the requirements of Code section 410(b), or (ii) the ACP
Test, if Code section 410(b)(4)(B) is applied in
determining whether the 401(m) portion of the Plan meets
the requirements of Code section 410(b).
(1) If the Related Companies maintain two or more plans
which are subject to the ADP or ACP Test and are
considered as one plan for purposes of Code sections
401(a)(4) or 410(b), all such plans shall be
aggregated and treated as one plan for purposes of
meeting the ADP and ACP Tests, provided that the plans
may only be aggregated if they have the same plan
year.
(2) If an HCE is covered by more than one cash or deferred
arrangement, or more than one arrangement permitting
employee or matching contributions, maintained by the
Related Companies, all such plans shall be aggregated
and treated as one plan (other than those plans that
may not be permissively aggregated) for purposes of
calculating the separate percentage for the HCE which
is used in the determination of the Average
Percentage. For purposes of the preceding sentence, if
such plans have different plan years, the plans are
aggregated with respect to the plan years ending with
or within the same calendar year.
(k) "Multiple Use Test". The test described in Section 12.4 which
a Plan must meet where the Alternative Limitation (described
in Section 12.2) is used to meet both the ADP and ACP Tests.
(l) "NHCE" or "Non-Highly Compensated Employee". An Employee who
is not an HCE.
(m) "Prior Year Testing Method". The use of the preceding Plan
Year's ADP for the preceding Plan Year's NHCE Group for
purposes of performing the Plan Year's ADP Test and/or the
use of the preceding Plan Year's ACP for the preceding Plan
Year's NHCE Group for purposes of performing the Plan Year's
ACP Test.
12.2 ADP and ACP Tests
For Plan Years commencing after December 31, 1996, for each Plan
Year, the Prior Year Testing Method shall be used and the ADP and
ACP for the HCE Group must meet either the Basic or Alternative
Limitation when compared to the respective preceding Plan Year's
ADP and ACP for the preceding Plan Year's NHCE Group, defined as
follows:
(a) Basic Limitation. The HCE Group Average Percentage may not
exceed 1.25 times the NHCE Group Average Percentage.
(b) Alternative Limitation. The HCE Group Average Percentage is
limited by reference to the NHCE Group Average Percentage as
follows:
If the NHCE Group Then the Maximum HCE
Average Percentage is: Group Average Percentage is:
---------------------- ----------------------------
Less than 2% 2 times NHCE Group Average %
2% to 8% NHCE Group Average % plus 2%
More than 8% NA - Basic Limitation applies
Alternatively, the Company may elect to use the Current Year
Testing Method and the ADP and/or ACP for the HCE Group must meet
either the Basic or Alternative Limitation as defined above when
compared to the respective Plan Year's ADP and/or ACP for the Plan
Year's NHCE Group. If a Current Year Testing Method election is
made, such election may not be changed except as provided by the
Code.
12.3 Correction of ADP and ACP Tests for
Plan Years Commencing After December 31, 1996
For Plan Years commencing after December 31, 1996, for each Plan
Year, if the ADP or ACP Tests are not met, the Administrator shall
determine, no later than the end of the next Plan Year, a maximum
percentage to be used in place of the calculated percentage for all
HCEs that would reduce the ADP and/or ACP for the HCE Group by a
sufficient amount to meet the ADP and ACP Tests.
With regard to each HCE whose Deferral percentage and/or
Contribution percentage is in excess of the maximum percentage, a
dollar amount of excess Deferrals and/or excess Contributions shall
then be determined by (i) subtracting the product of such maximum
percentage for the ADP and the HCE's Compensation from the HCE's
actual Deferrals and (ii) subtracting the product of such maximum
percentage for the ACP and the HCE's Compensation from the HCE's
actual Contributions. Such amounts shall then be aggregated to
determine the total dollar amount of excess Deferrals and/or excess
Contributions. ADP and/or ACP corrections shall be made in
accordance with the leveling method as described below.
(a) ADP Correction. The HCE with the highest Deferral dollar
amount shall have his or her Deferral dollar amount
reduced in an amount equal to the lesser of the dollar
amount of excess Deferrals for all HCEs or the dollar
amount that would cause his or her Deferral dollar amount
to equal that of the HCE with the next highest Deferral
dollar amount. The process shall be repeated until the
total of the Deferral dollar amount reductions equals the
dollar amount of excess Deferrals for all HCEs.
To the extent an HCE's Deferrals were determined to be
reduced as described in the paragraph above, Employee Pre-Tax
Contributions shall, by the end of the next Plan Year, be
refunded to the HCE, except that such amount to be refunded
shall be reduced by Employee Pre-Tax Contributions previously
refunded because they exceeded the Contribution Dollar Limit.
The excess amounts shall first be taken from unmatched
Employee Pre-Tax Contributions and then from matched Employee
Pre-Tax Contributions. Any Employer Match Contributions
attributable to refunded excess Employee Pre-Tax
Contributions as described in this Section, adjusted for
investment gain or loss for the Plan Year to which the excess
Employee Pre-Tax Contributions relate, shall be forfeited and
used to reduce future Contributions to be made by an Employer
as soon as administratively feasible.
(b) ACP Correction. The HCE with the highest Contribution
dollar amount shall have his or her Contribution dollar
amount reduced in an amount equal to the lesser of the
dollar amount of excess Contributions for all HCEs or the
dollar amount that would cause his or her Contribution
dollar amount to equal that of the HCE with the next
highest Contribution dollar amount. The process shall be
repeated until the total of the Contribution dollar amount
reductions equals the dollar amount of excess
Contributions for all HCEs.
To the extent an HCE's Contributions were determined to be
reduced as described in the paragraph above, Employer Match
Contributions shall, by the end of the next Plan Year, be
refunded to the HCE.
(c) Investment Fund Sources. Once the amount of excess
Deferrals and/or Contributions is determined, within each
Account from which amounts are refunded or forfeited,
amounts shall first be taken from the Sweep Account and
then taken by Investment Fund in direct proportion to the
market value of the Participant's interest in each
Investment Fund (which excludes his or her Loan Account
balance) as of the Trade Date on which the correction is
processed.
12.4 Multiple Use Test
If the Alternative Limitation (defined in Section 12.2) is used to
meet both the ADP and ACP Tests, the ADP and ACP for the HCE Group
must also comply with the requirements of Code section 401(m)(9).
Such Code section requires that the sum of the ADP and ACP for the
HCE Group (as determined after any corrections needed to meet the
ADP and ACP Tests have been made) not exceed the sum (which
produces the most favorable result) of:
(a) the Basic Limitation (defined in Section 12.2) applied to
either the ADP or ACP for the NHCE Group, and
(b) the Alternative Limitation applied to the other NHCE Group
percentage.
12.5 Correction of Multiple Use Test
If the multiple use limit is exceeded, the Administrator shall
determine a maximum percentage to be used in place of the
calculated percentage for all HCEs that would reduce either or both
the ADP or ACP for the HCE Group by a sufficient amount to meet the
multiple use limit. Any excess shall be corrected in the same
manner that excess Deferrals or Contributions are corrected.
12.6 Adjustment for Investment Gain or Loss
Any excess Deferrals or Contributions to be refunded to a
Participant in accordance with this Section 12 shall be adjusted
for investment gain or loss. Refunds shall not include investment
gain or loss for the period between the end of the applicable Plan
Year and the date of distribution.
12.7 Testing Responsibilities and Required Records
The Administrator shall be responsible for ensuring that the Plan
meets the ADP Test, the ACP Test and the Multiple Use Test, and
that the Contribution Dollar Limit is not exceeded. The
Administrator shall maintain records which are sufficient to
demonstrate that the ADP Test, the ACP Test and the Multiple Use
Test, have been met for each Plan Year for at least as long as the
Employer's corresponding tax year is open to audit.
12.8 Separate Testing
(a) Multiple Employers: The determination of HCEs, NHCEs, and the
performance of the ADP Test, the ACP Test and the Multiple
Use Test, and any corrective action resulting therefrom,
shall be conducted separately with regard to the Employees of
each Employer (and its Related Companies) that is not a
Related Company with respect to the other Employer(s).
(b) Collective Bargaining Units: The performance of the ADP Test,
and if applicable, the ACP Test and the Multiple Use Test,
and any corrective action resulting therefrom, shall be
conducted separately with regard to Employees who are
eligible to participate in the Plan as a result of a
collective bargaining agreement.
In addition, testing may be conducted separately, at the discretion
of the Administrator and to the extent permitted under Treasury
regulations, with regard to any group of Employees for whom
separate testing is permissible under such regulations.
13 MAXIMUM CONTRIBUTION AND BENEFIT LIMITATIONS
13.1 "Annual Addition" Defined
The sum for a Plan Year of all (i) contributions (excluding
rollover contributions) and forfeitures allocated to the
Participant's Account and his or her account in all other defined
contribution plans maintained by any Related Company, (ii) amounts
allocated to the Participant's individual medical account (within
the meaning of Code section 415(l)(2)) which is part of a defined
benefit plan maintained by any Related Company, and (iii) if the
Participant is a key employee (within the meaning of Code section
419A(d)(3)) for the applicable or any prior Plan Year, amounts
attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to his
or her separate account under a welfare benefit fund (within the
meaning of Code section 419(e)) maintained by any Related Company.
The Plan Year refers to the year to which the allocation pertains,
regardless of when it was allocated. The Plan Year shall be the
Code section 415 limitation year.
13.2 Maximum Annual Addition
A Participant's Annual Addition for any Plan Year shall not exceed
the lesser of (i) 25% of his or her Compensation or (ii) $30,000
(as adjusted for cost of living increases pursuant to Code section
415(d)); provided, however, that clause (i) shall not apply to
Annual Additions described in clauses (ii) and (iii) of Section
13.1.
13.3 Avoiding an Excess Annual Addition
If, at any time during a Plan Year, the allocation of any
additional Contributions would produce an excess Annual Addition
for such year, Contributions to be made for the remainder of the
Plan Year shall be limited to the amount needed for each affected
Participant to receive the maximum Annual Addition.
13.4 Correcting an Excess Annual Addition
Upon the discovery of an excess Annual Addition to a Participant's
Account (resulting from a reasonable error in determining a
Participant's compensation or the maximum permissible amount of his
or her elective deferrals (within the meaning of Code section
402(g)(3)), or other facts and circumstances acceptable to the
Internal Revenue Service), the excess amount (adjusted to reflect
investment gains) shall first be returned to the Participant to the
extent of his or her Employee Pre-Tax Contributions (however to the
extent Employee Pre-Tax Contributions were matched, the applicable
Employer Match Contributions shall be forfeited in proportion to
the returned matched Employee Pre-Tax Contributions) and the
remaining excess, if any, shall be forfeited by the Participant and
together used to reduce future Contributions to be made by an
Employer as soon as administratively feasible.
13.5 Correcting a Multiple Plan Excess
If a Participant, whose Account is credited with an excess Annual
Addition, received allocations to more than one defined
contribution plan, the excess shall be corrected by reducing the
Annual Addition to the Plan only after all possible reductions have
been made to the other defined contribution plans.
13.6 "Defined Benefit Fraction" Defined
The fraction, for any Plan Year, where the numerator is the
"projected annual benefit" and the denominator is the greater of
125% of the "protected current accrued benefit" or the normal limit
which is the lesser of (i) 125% of the dollar limitation in effect
under Code section 415(b)(1)(A) for the Plan Year or (ii) 140% of
the amount which may be taken into account under Code section
415(b)(1)(B) for the Plan Year, where a Participant's:
(a) "projected annual benefit" is the annual benefit provided by
the plan determined pursuant to Code section 415(e)(2)(A),
and
(b) "protected current accrued benefit" in a defined benefit plan
in existence (1) on July 1, 1982, shall be the accrued annual
benefit provided for under Public Law 97-248, section
235(g)(4), as amended, or (2) on May 6, 1986, shall be the
accrued annual benefit provided for under Public Law 99-514,
section 1106(i)(3).
13.7 "Defined Contribution Fraction" Defined
The fraction where the numerator is the sum of the Participant's
Annual Addition for each Plan Year to date and the denominator is
the sum of the "annual amounts" for each year in which the
Participant has performed service with a Related Company. The
"annual amount" for any Plan Year is the lesser of (i) 125% of the
dollar limitation in effect under Code section 415(c)(1)(A)
(determined without regard to subsection (c)(6)) for the Plan Year
or (ii) 140% of the amount which may be taken into account under
Code section 415(c)(1)(B) for the Plan Year, where:
(a) each Annual Addition is determined pursuant to the Code
section 415(c) rules in effect for such Plan Year, and
(b) the numerator is adjusted pursuant to Public Law 97-248,
section 235(g)(3), as amended, or Public Law 99-514, section
1106(i)(4).
13.8 Combined Plan Limits and Correction
The sum of a Participant's Defined Benefit Fraction and Defined
Contribution Fraction for any Plan Year may not exceed 1.0. If the
combined fraction exceeds 1.0 for any Plan Year, the Participant's
benefit under any defined benefit plan (to the extent it has not
been distributed or used to purchase an annuity contract) shall be
limited so that the combined fraction does not exceed 1.0 before
any defined contribution limits shall be enforced.
For Plan Years commencing after December 31, 1999, the provisions
of the preceding paragraph shall no longer be effective.
14 TOP HEAVY RULES
14.1 Top Heavy Definitions
When capitalized, the following words and phrases have the
following meanings when used in this Section:
(a) "Aggregation Group". The group consisting of each
qualified plan of the Related Companies (1) in which a Key
Employee is a participant or was a participant during the
determination period (regardless of whether such plan has
terminated), or (2) which enables another plan in the
group to meet the requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4)
or 410(b). The Administrator may also treat any other
qualified plan of the Related Companies as part of the
group if the resulting group would continue to meet the
requirements of Code sections 401(a)(4) and 410(b) with
such plan being taken into account.
(b) "Determination Date". For any Plan Year, the last Trade Date
of the preceding Plan Year or, in the case of the Plan's
first Plan Year, the last Trade Date of that Plan Year.
(c) "Key Employee". A current or former Employee (or his or her
Beneficiary) who at any time during the five year period
ending on the Determination Date was:
(1) an officer of a Related Company whose Compensation (i)
exceeds 50% of the amount in effect under Code section
415(b)(1)(A) and (ii) places him or her within the
following highest paid group of officers:
Number of Employees Number of
not Excluded Under Code Highest Paid
Section 414(q)(5) Officers Included
----------------- -----------------
Less than 30 3
30 to 500 10% of the number of
Employees not excluded
under Code section
414(q)(5)
More than 500 50
(2) a more than 5% Owner,
(3) a more than 1% Owner whose Compensation exceeds
$150,000, or
(4) a more than 0.5% Owner who is among the 10 Employees
owning the largest interest in a Related Company and
whose Compensation exceeds the amount in effect under
Code section 415(c)(1)(A).
(d) "Plan Benefit". The sum as of the Determination Date of
(1) an Employee's Account, (2) the present value of his or
her other accrued benefits provided by all qualified plans
within the Aggregation Group, and (3) the aggregate
distributions made within the five year period ending on
such Date. For this purpose, the present value of the
Employee's accrued benefit in a defined benefit plan shall
be determined by the method that is used for benefit
accrual purposes under all such plans maintained by the
Related Companies or, if there is no such single method
used under all such plans, as if the benefit accrues no
more rapidly than the slowest rate permitted by the
fractional accrual rule in Code section 411(b)(1)(C).
Plan Benefits shall exclude rollover contributions and
similar transfers made after December 31, 1983 as provided
in Code section 416(g)(4)(A).
(e) "Top Heavy". The Plan's status when the Plan Benefits of
Key Employees account for more than 60% of the Plan
Benefits of all Employees who have performed services at
any time during the five year period ending on the
Determination Date. The Plan Benefits of Employees who
were, but are no longer, Key Employees (because they have
not been an officer or Owner during the five year period),
are excluded in the determination.
14.2 Special Contributions
(a) Minimum Contribution Requirement. For each Plan Year in
which the Plan is Top Heavy, the Employer shall not allow
any contributions (other than a Rollover Contribution from
a plan maintained by a non Related Company) to be made by
or on behalf of any Key Employee unless the Employer makes
a contribution (other than contributions made by an
Employer in accordance with a Participant's salary
deferral election or contributions made by an Employer
based upon the amount contributed by a Participant) on
behalf of all Participants who were Eligible Employees as
of the last day of the Plan Year in an amount equal to at
least 3% of each such Participant's Taxable Income.
(b) Overriding Minimum Benefit. Notwithstanding,
contributions shall be permitted on behalf of Key
Employees if the Employer also maintains a defined benefit
plan which automatically provides a benefit which
satisfies the Code section 416(c)(1) minimum benefit
requirements, including the adjustment provided in Code
section 416(h)(2)(A), if applicable. If the Plan is part
of an Aggregation Group under which a Key Employee is
receiving a benefit and no minimum contribution is
provided under any other plan, a minimum contribution of
at least 3% of Taxable Income shall be provided to the
Participants specified in the preceding paragraph. In
addition, the Employer may offset a defined benefit
minimum by contributions (other than contributions made by
an Employer in accordance with a Participant's salary
deferral election or contributions made by an Employer
based upon the amount contributed by a Participant) made
to the Plan.
14.3 Adjustment to Combined Limits for Different Plans
For each Plan Year in which the Plan is Top Heavy, 100% shall be
substituted for 125% in determining the Defined Benefit Fraction
and the Defined Contribution Fraction. For Plan Years commencing
after December 31, 1999, the provisions of the preceding sentence
shall no longer be effective.
15 PLAN ADMINISTRATION
15.1 Plan Delineates Authority and Responsibility
Plan fiduciaries include the Company, the Administrator, the
Committee and/or the Trustee, as applicable, whose specific duties
are delineated in the Plan and Trust. In addition, Plan fiduciaries
also include any other person to whom fiduciary duties or
responsibilities are delegated with respect to the Plan. Any person
or group may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity with respect
to the Plan. To the extent permitted under ERISA section 405, no
fiduciary shall be liable for a breach by another fiduciary.
15.2 Fiduciary Standards
Each fiduciary shall:
(a) discharge his or her duties in accordance with the Plan and
Trust to the extent they are consistent with ERISA;
(b) use that degree of care, skill, prudence and diligence that a
prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with
such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a
like character and with like aims;
(c) act with the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to
Participants and their Beneficiaries, and defraying
reasonable expenses of administering the Plan;
(d) diversify Plan investments, to the extent such fiduciary is
responsible for directing the investment of Plan assets, so
as to minimize the risk of large losses, unless under the
circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do so; and
(e) treat similarly situated Participants and Beneficiaries in a
uniform and nondiscriminatory manner.
15.3 Company is ERISA Plan Administrator
The Company is the administrator of the Plan (within the meaning of
ERISA section 3(16)) and is responsible for compliance with all
reporting and disclosure requirements, except those that are
explicitly the responsibility of the Trustee under applicable law.
The Administrator and/or Committee shall have any necessary
authority to carry out such functions through the actions of the
Administrator, duly appointed officers of the Company and/or the
Committee.
15.4 Administrator Duties
The Administrator shall have the discretionary authority to
construe the Plan and Trust, other than the provisions which relate
to the Trustee, and to do all things necessary or convenient to
effect the intent and purposes thereof, whether or not such powers
are specifically set forth in the Plan and Trust. Actions taken in
good faith by the Administrator shall be conclusive and binding on
all interested parties, and shall be given the maximum possible
deference allowed by law. In addition to the duties listed
elsewhere in the Plan and Trust, the Administrator's authority
shall include, but not be limited to, the discretionary authority
to:
(a) determine who is eligible to participate, if a contribution
qualifies as a rollover contribution, the allocation of
Contributions, and the eligibility for loans, in-service
withdrawals and distributions;
(b) provide each Participant with a summary plan description no
later than 90 days after he or she has become a Participant
(or such other period permitted under ERISA section
104(b)(1)), as well as informing each Participant of any
material modification to the Plan in a timely manner;
(c) make a copy of the following documents available to
Participants during normal work hours: the Plan and Trust
(including subsequent amendments), all annual and interim
reports of the Trustee related to the entire Plan, the latest
annual report and the summary plan description;
(d) determine the fact of a Participant's death and of any
Beneficiary's right to receive the deceased Participant's
interest based upon such proof and evidence as it deems
necessary;
(e) establish and review at least annually a funding policy
bearing in mind both the short-run and long-run needs and
goals of the Plan and to the extent Participants may direct
their own investments, the funding policy shall focus on
which Investment Funds are available for Participants to use;
and
(f) adjudicate claims pursuant to the claims procedure described
in Section 18.
15.5 Advisors May be Retained
The Administrator may retain such agents and advisors (including
attorneys, accountants, actuaries, consultants, record keepers,
investment counsel and administrative assistants) as it considers
necessary to assist it in the performance of its duties. The
Administrator shall also comply with the bonding requirements of
ERISA section 412.
15.6 Delegation of Administrator Duties
The Company, as Administrator of the Plan, has appointed a
Committee to administer the Plan on its behalf. The Company shall
provide the Trustee with the names and specimen signatures of any
persons authorized to serve as Committee members and act as or on
its behalf. Any Committee member appointed by the Company shall
serve at the pleasure of the Company, but may resign by written
notice to the Company. Committee members shall serve without
compensation from the Plan for such services. Except to the extent
that the Company otherwise provides, any delegation of duties to
the Committee shall carry with it the full discretionary authority
of the Administrator to complete such duties.
15.7 Committee Operating Rules
(a) Actions of Majority. Any act delegated by the Company to the
Committee may be done by a majority of its members. The
majority may be expressed by a vote at a meeting or in
writing without a meeting, and a majority action shall be
equivalent to an action of all Committee members.
(b) Meetings. The Committee shall hold meetings upon such notice,
place and times as it determines necessary to conduct its
functions properly.
(c) Reliance by Trustee. The Committee may authorize one or
more of its members to execute documents on its behalf and
may authorize one or more of its members or other
individuals who are not members to give written direction
to the Trustee in the performance of its duties. The
Committee shall provide such authorization in writing to
the Trustee with the name and specimen signatures of any
person authorized to act on its behalf. The Trustee shall
accept such direction and rely upon it until notified in
writing that the Committee has revoked the authorization
to give such direction. The Trustee shall not be deemed
to be on notice of any change in the membership of the
Committee, parties authorized to direct the Trustee in the
performance of its duties, or the duties delegated to and
by the Committee until notified in writing.
16 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTMENTS
16.1 Trust Agreement
All Plan assets shall be held by the Trustee in trust, in
accordance with those provisions of the Plan and Trust which relate
to the Trustee, for use in providing Plan benefits and paying Plan
fees and expenses not paid directly by the Employer. Plan benefits
shall be drawn solely from the Trust and paid by the Trustee as
directed by the Administrator. Notwithstanding, the Company may
appoint, with the approval of the Trustee, another trustee to hold
and administer Plan assets which do not meet the requirements of
Section 16.2.
16.2 Investment Funds
The Administrator is hereby granted authority to direct the Trustee
to invest Trust assets in one or more Investment Funds. The number
and composition of Investment Funds may be changed from time to
time, without the necessity of amending the Plan and Trust. The
Trustee may establish reasonable limits on the number of Investment
Funds as well as the acceptable assets for any such Investment
Fund. Each of the Investment Funds may be comprised of any of the
following:
(a) shares of a registered investment company, whether or not the
Trustee or any of its affiliates is an advisor to, or other
service provider to, such company;
(b) collective investment funds maintained by the Trustee, or any
other fiduciary to the Plan, which are available for
investment by trusts which are qualified under Code sections
401(a) and 501(a);
(c) individual equity and fixed income securities which are
readily tradable on the open market;
(d) synthetic guaranteed investment contracts and guaranteed
investment contracts issued by an insurance company and/or
synthetic guaranteed investment contracts and bank investment
contracts issued by a bank;
(e) interest bearing deposits (which may include interest bearing
deposits of the Trustee);
(f) PacifiCorp Stock, subject to the conditions described in
Appendix A; and
(g) Company Stock.
Any Investment Fund assets invested in a collective investment
fund, shall be subject to all the provisions of the instruments
establishing and governing such fund. These instruments, including
any subsequent amendments, are incorporated herein by reference.
16.3 Authority to Hold Cash
The Trustee shall have the authority to cause the investment
manager of each Investment Fund to maintain sufficient deposit or
money market type assets in each Investment Fund to handle the
Investment Fund's liquidity and disbursement needs. Each
Participant's and Beneficiary's Sweep Account, which is used to
hold assets pending investment or disbursement, shall consist of
interest bearing deposits (which may include interest bearing
deposits of the Trustee) and/or money market type assets or funds.
16.4 Trustee to Act Upon Instructions
The Trustee shall carry out instructions to invest assets in the
Investment Funds as soon as practicable after such instructions are
received from the Administrator, Participants or Beneficiaries.
Such instructions shall remain in effect until changed by the
Administrator, Participants or Beneficiaries.
16.5 Administrator Has Right to Vote Registered Investment Company
Shares
The Administrator shall be entitled to vote proxies or exercise any
shareholder rights relating to shares held on behalf of the Plan in
a registered investment company. Notwithstanding, the authority to
vote proxies and exercise shareholder rights related to such shares
held in a Custom Fund is vested as provided otherwise in Section
16.
16.6 Custom Fund Investment Management
The Administrator may designate, with the consent of the Trustee,
an investment manager for any Investment Fund established by the
Trustee solely for Participants of the Plan and, subject to Section
16.7, any other qualified plan of the Company or a Related Company
(a "Custom Fund"). The investment manager may be the Administrator,
Trustee or an investment manager pursuant to ERISA section 3(38).
The Administrator shall advise the Trustee in writing of the
appointment of an investment manager and shall cause the investment
manager to acknowledge to the Trustee in writing that the
investment manager is a fiduciary to the Plan.
A Custom Fund shall be subject to the following:
(a) Guidelines. Written guidelines, acceptable to the Trustee,
shall be established for a Custom Fund. If a Custom Fund
consists solely of collective investment funds or shares of a
registered investment company (and sufficient deposit or
money market type assets to handle the Custom Fund's
liquidity and disbursement needs), its underlying instruments
shall constitute the guidelines.
(b) Authority of Investment Manager. The investment manager
of a Custom Fund shall have the authority to vote or
execute proxies, exercise shareholder rights, manage,
acquire, and dispose of Trust assets. Notwithstanding, if
the Company provides for a Company Stock Fund, the
authority to vote proxies and exercise shareholder rights
related to shares of Company Stock held in the Company
Stock Fund is vested as provided otherwise in Section 16.
(c) Custody and Trade Settlement. Unless otherwise agreed to
by the Trustee, the Trustee shall maintain custody of all
Custom Fund assets and be responsible for the settlement
of all Custom Fund trades. For purposes of this Section,
shares of a collective investment fund, shares of a
registered investment company and synthetic guaranteed
investment contracts and guaranteed investment contracts
issued by an insurance company and/or synthetic guaranteed
investment contracts and bank investment contracts issued
by a bank, shall be regarded as the Custom Fund assets
instead of the underlying assets of such instruments.
(d) Limited Liability of Co-Fiduciaries. Neither the
Administrator nor the Trustee shall be obligated to invest or
otherwise manage any Custom Fund assets for which the Trustee
or Administrator is not the investment manager nor shall the
Administrator or Trustee be liable for acts or omissions with
regard to the investment of such assets except to the extent
required by ERISA.
16.7 Master Custom Fund
The Trustee may establish, at the direction of the Administrator, a
single Custom Fund (the "Master Custom Fund"), for the benefit of
the Plan and any other qualified plan of the Company or a Related
Company for which the Trustee acts as trustee pursuant to a plan
and trust document that contains a provision substantially
identical to this provision. The assets of the Plan, to the extent
invested in the Master Custom Fund, shall consist only of that
percentage of the assets of the Master Custom Fund represented by
the shares held by the Plan.
16.8 Authority to Segregate Assets
The Administrator may direct the Trustee to split an Investment
Fund into two or more funds in the event any assets in the
Investment Fund are illiquid or the value is not readily
determinable. In the event of such segregation, the Administrator
shall give instructions to the Trustee on what value to use for the
split-off assets, and the Trustee shall not be responsible for
confirming such value.
16.9 Investment in Company Stock
If the Company provides for a Company Stock Fund, directly or
through a Master Custom Fund, the Company Stock Fund shall be
comprised of Company Stock and sufficient deposit or money market
type assets to handle the Company Stock Fund's liquidity and
disbursement needs. The Company Stock Fund may be as large as
necessary to comply with Participants' and Beneficiaries'
investment elections as well the total investment of Participants'
and Beneficiaries' Employer Match, Additional Match and
Discretionary Match Accounts to the extent such Accounts are not
otherwise invested in accordance with Section 7.
16.10 Voting, Tendering and Exchanging Company Stock
Each Participant in the Plan (or, in the event of the Participant's
death, the Participant's Beneficiary) is, for purposes of this
Section 16.10, hereby designated a "named fiduciary" within the
meaning of ERISA section 403(a)(1).
(a) Instructed Share Voting. Each Participant (or, if
applicable, Beneficiary), as a named fiduciary, shall be
entitled to direct the Plan and Trustee as to the manner
in which Company Stock attributable to such Participant's
(or Beneficiary's) Account in the Company Stock Fund is to
be voted on each matter brought before an annual or
special stockholders' meeting of the Company. Before each
such meeting of stockholders, the Trustee shall cause to
be furnished to each Participant (or, if applicable,
Beneficiary) a copy of the proxy solicitation material,
together with a form requesting confidential directions on
how such shares of Company Stock allocated to such
Participant's (or Beneficiary's) Account in the Company
Stock Fund shall be voted on each such matter. Upon
timely receipt of such directions, the Trustee shall on
each such matter, vote as directed the number of votes
attributable to such Participant (or Beneficiary).
The number of votes attributable to each Participant (or, if
applicable, Beneficiary) shall be determined as follows:
(1) first, the total number of votes attributable to
Company Stock held in the Company Stock Fund shall be
determined;
(2) second, the number of votes determined under (1),
above, shall be attributed to each Participant (or, if
applicable, Beneficiary), in the ratio which the
number of shares of Company Stock allocated to such
Participant's Account in the Company Stock Fund as of
the record date bears to the total number of shares of
Company Stock held in the Company Stock Fund as of
such date.
Each Participant (or, if applicable, Beneficiary), as a named
fiduciary, shall be entitled to separately direct the vote of
a portion of the number of votes with respect to which a
signed voting-direction instrument is not timely received
from other Participants (or, if applicable, Beneficiaries)
("Undirected Votes"). Such direction with respect to each
Participant (or, if applicable, Beneficiary) who timely
elects to direct the vote of Undirected Votes as a named
fiduciary shall be with respect to a number of Undirected
Votes equal to the total number of Undirected Votes
multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the total
number of votes attributable to such Participant (or
Beneficiary) and the denominator of which is the total number
of votes attributable to all Participants (or, if applicable,
Beneficiaries) who timely elect to vote Undirected Votes as a
named fiduciary.
(b) Responding to Tender and Exchange Offers. Each
Participant (or, if applicable, Beneficiary), as a named
fiduciary, shall have the right, to the extent of the
number of shares of Company Stock attributable to such
Participant's (or Beneficiary's) Account in the Company
Stock Fund, to direct the Trustee in writing as to the
manner in which to respond to such tender or exchange
offer with respect to shares of Company Stock. The
Trustee shall use its best efforts to timely distribute or
cause to be distributed to each Participant (or, if
applicable, Beneficiary) such information as will be
distributed to stockholders of the Company in connection
with any such tender or exchange offer. Upon timely
receipt of such instructions, the Trustee shall respond as
instructed with respect to shares of Company Stock
allocated to such Participant's Account in the Company
Stock Fund. If the Trustee shall not receive timely
instructions from a Participant (or, if applicable,
Beneficiary) as to the manner in which to respond to such
a tender or exchange offer, the Trustee shall not tender
or exchange any shares of Company Stock with respect to
which such Participant (or Beneficiary) has the right of
direction. In effecting the foregoing, to the extent
possible, the Trustee shall tender or exchange shares of
Company Stock entitled to one vote per share prior to
shares of Company Stock having greater than one vote per
share.
Any instructions received by the Trustee from Participants (or, if
applicable, Beneficiaries) pursuant to this Section 16.10 shall be
held by the Trustee in strict confidence and shall not be divulged
or released to any person, including officers or Employees of the
Company or a Related Company; provided, however, that to the extent
necessary for the operation of the Plan, such instructions may be
relayed by the Trustee to a recordkeeper, auditor or other person
providing services to the Plan if such person (i) is not the
Company, a Related Company or any Employee, officer or director
thereof, and (ii) agrees not to divulge such directions to any
other person, including Employees, officers and directors of the
Company and its Related Companies.
16.11 Registration and Disclosure for Company Stock
The Administrator shall be responsible for determining the
applicability (and, if applicable, complying with) the requirements
of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the California Corporate
Securities Law of 1968, as amended, and any other applicable blue
sky law. The Administrator shall also specify what restrictive
legend or transfer restriction, if any, is required to be set forth
on the certificates for the securities and the procedure to be
followed by the Trustee to effectuate a resale of such securities.
17 TRUST ADMINISTRATION
17.1 Trustee to Construe Trust
The Trustee shall have the discretionary authority to construe
those provisions of the Plan and Trust which relate to the Trustee
and to do all things necessary or convenient to the administration
of the Trust, whether or not such powers are specifically set forth
in the Plan and Trust. Actions taken in good faith by the Trustee
shall be conclusive and binding on all interested parties, and
shall be given the maximum possible deference allowed by law.
17.2 Trustee To Act As Owner of Trust Assets
Subject to the specific conditions and limitations set forth in the
Plan and Trust, the Trustee shall have all the power, authority,
rights and privileges of an absolute owner of the Trust assets and,
not in limitation but in amplification of the foregoing, may:
(a) receive, hold, manage, invest and reinvest, sell, tender,
exchange, dispose of, encumber, hypothecate, pledge,
mortgage, lease, grant options respecting, repair, alter,
insure, or distribute any and all property in the Trust;
(b) borrow money, participate in reorganizations, pay calls and
assessments, vote or execute proxies, exercise subscription
or conversion privileges, exercise options and register any
securities in the Trust in the name of the nominee, in
federal book entry form or in any other form as shall permit
title thereto to pass by delivery;
(c) renew, extend the due date, compromise, arbitrate, adjust,
settle, enforce or foreclose, by judicial proceedings or
otherwise, or defend against the same, any obligations or
claims in favor of or against the Trust; and
(d) lend, through a collective investment fund, any securities
held in such collective investment fund to brokers, dealers
or other borrowers and to permit such securities to be
transferred into the name and custody and be voted by the
borrower or others.
17.3 United States Indicia of Ownership
The Trustee shall not maintain the indicia of ownership of any
Trust assets outside the jurisdiction of the United States, except
as authorized under ERISA section 404(b).
17.4 Tax Withholding and Payment
(a) Withholding. The Trustee shall calculate and withhold
federal (and, if applicable, state) income taxes with
regard to any Eligible Rollover Distribution that is not
paid as a Direct Rollover in accordance with the
Participant's withholding election or as required by law
if no election is made or the election is less than the
amount required by law. With regard to any taxable
distribution that is not an Eligible Rollover
Distribution, the Trustee shall calculate and withhold
federal (and, if applicable, state) income taxes in
accordance with the Participant's withholding election or
as required by law if no election is made.
(b) Taxes Due From Investment Funds. The Trustee shall pay from
the Investment Fund any taxes or assessments imposed by any
taxing or governmental authority on such Investment Fund or
its income, including related interest and penalties.
17.5 Trust Accounting
(a) Annual Report. Within 60 days (or other reasonable period)
following the close of the Plan Year, the Trustee shall
provide the Administrator with an annual accounting of Trust
assets and information to assist the Administrator in meeting
ERISA's annual reporting and audit requirements.
(b) Periodic Reports. The Trustee shall maintain records and
provide sufficient reporting to allow the Administrator to
properly monitor the Trust's assets and activity.
(c) Administrator Approval. Approval of any Trustee accounting
shall automatically occur 90 days after such accounting has
been received by the Administrator, unless the Administrator
files a written objection with the Trustee within such time
period. Such approval shall be final as to all matters and
transactions stated or shown therein and binding upon the
Administrator.
17.6 Valuation of Certain Assets
If the Trustee determines the Trust holds any asset which is not
readily tradable and listed on a national securities exchange
registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended,
the Trustee may engage a qualified independent appraiser to
determine the fair market value of such property, and the appraisal
fees shall be paid from the Investment Fund containing the asset.
17.7 Legal Counsel
The Trustee may consult with legal counsel of its choice, including
counsel for the Employer or counsel of the Trustee, upon any
question or matter arising under the Plan and Trust. When relied
upon by the Trustee, the opinion of such counsel shall be evidence
that the Trustee has acted in good faith.
17.8 Fees and Expenses
The Trustee's fees for its services as Trustee shall be such as may
be mutually agreed upon by the Company and the Trustee. Trustee
fees and all reasonable expenses of counsel and advisors retained
by the Trustee shall be paid in accordance with Section 6.
17.9 Trustee Duties and Limitations
The Trustee's duties, unless otherwise agreed to by the Trustee,
shall be confined to construing the terms of the Plan and Trust as
they relate to the Trustee, receiving funds on behalf of and making
payments from the Trust, safeguarding and valuing Trust assets,
investing and reinvesting Trust assets in the Investment Funds as
directed by the Administrator, Participants or Beneficiaries, and
those duties as described in this Section 17.
The Trustee shall have no duty or authority to ascertain whether
Contributions are in compliance with the Plan, to enforce
collection or to compute or verify the accuracy or adequacy of any
amount to be paid to it by the Employer. The Trustee shall not be
liable for the proper application of any part of the Trust with
respect to any disbursement made at the direction of the
Administrator.
18 RIGHTS, PROTECTION, CONSTRUCTION AND JURISDICTION
18.1 Plan Does Not Affect Employment Rights
The Plan does not provide any employment rights to any Employee.
The Employer expressly reserves the right to discharge an Employee
at any time, with or without cause, without regard to the effect
such discharge would have upon the Employee's interest in the Plan.
18.2 Compliance With USERRA
Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, with
regard to an Employee who after serving in the uniformed services
is reemployed on or after December 12, 1994, within the time
required by USERRA, contributions shall be made and benefits and
service credit shall be provided under the Plan with respect to his
or her qualified military service (as defined in Code section
414(u)(5)) in accordance with Code section 414(u). Furthermore,
notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary,
Participant loan payments may be suspended during a period of
qualified military service.
18.3 Limited Return of Contributions
Except as provided in this Section 18.3, (i) Plan assets shall not
revert to the Employer nor be diverted for any purpose other than
the exclusive benefit of Participants and Beneficiaries and
defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan; and (ii) a
Participant's vested interest shall not be subject to divestment.
As provided in ERISA section 403(c)(2), the actual amount of a
Contribution or portion thereof made by the Employer (or the
current value of such if a net loss has occurred) may revert to the
Employer if:
(a) such Contribution or portion thereof is made by reason of
a mistake of fact;
(b) a determination with respect to the initial qualification of
the Plan under Code section 401(a) is not received and a
request for such determination is made within the time
prescribed under Code section 401(b) (the existence of and
Contributions under the Plan are hereby conditioned upon such
initial qualification); or
(c) such Contribution or portion thereof is not deductible under
Code section 404 (such Contributions are hereby conditioned
upon such deductibility) in the taxable year of the Employer
for which the Contribution is made.
The reversion to the Employer must be made (if at all) within one
year of the mistaken payment, the date of denial of qualification,
or the date of disallowance of deduction, as the case may be. A
Participant shall have no rights under the Plan with respect to any
such reversion.
<PAGE>
18.4 Assignment and Alienation
As provided by Code section 401(a)(13) and to the extent not
otherwise required by law, no benefit provided by the Plan may be
anticipated, assigned or alienated, except:
(a) to create, assign or recognize a right to any benefit with
respect to a Participant pursuant to a QDRO; or
(b) to use a Participant's vested Account balance as security for
a loan from the Plan which is permitted pursuant to Code
section 4975.
18.5 Facility of Payment
If a Plan benefit is due to be paid to a minor or if the
Administrator reasonably believes that any payee is legally
incapable of giving a valid receipt and discharge for any payment
due him or her, the Administrator shall have the payment of the
benefit, or any part thereof, made to the person (or persons or
institution) whom it reasonably believes is caring for or
supporting the payee, unless it has received due notice of claim
therefor from a duly appointed guardian or conservator of the
payee. Any payment shall to the extent thereof, be a complete
discharge of any liability under the Plan to the payee.
18.6 Reallocation of Lost Participant's Accounts
If the Administrator cannot locate a person entitled to payment of
a Plan benefit after a reasonable search, the Administrator may at
any time thereafter treat such person's Account as forfeited and
use such amount to reduce future Contributions to be made by an
Employer as soon as administratively feasible. If such person
subsequently presents the Administrator with a valid claim for the
benefit, such person shall be paid the amount treated as forfeited,
plus the interest that would have been earned in the Sweep Account
to the date of determination. The Administrator shall pay the
amount through an additional amount contributed by the Employer.
18.7 Suspension of Certain Plan Provisions During Conversion Period
Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, during
any Conversion Period, in accordance with procedures established by
the Administrator and the Trustee, the Administrator may
temporarily suspend, in whole or in part, certain provisions under
the Plan, which may include, but are not limited to, a
Participant's right to change his or her Contribution election, a
Participant's right to change his or her investment election and a
Participant's right to borrow or withdraw from his or her Account
or obtain a distribution from his or her Account.
18.8 Suspension of Certain Plan Provisions During Other Periods
Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, in
accordance with procedures established by the Administrator and the
Trustee, the Administrator may temporarily suspend a Participant's
right to borrow or withdraw from his or her Account or obtain a
distribution from his or her Account, if (i) the Administrator
receives a domestic relations order and the Participant's Account
is a source of the payment for such domestic relations order, or
(ii) if the Administrator receives notice that a domestic relations
order is being sought by the Participant, his or her spouse, former
spouse, child or other dependent (as defined in Code section 152)
and the Participant's Account is a source of the payment for such
domestic relations order. Such suspension may continue for a
reasonable period of time (as determined by the Administrator)
which may include the period of time the Administrator, a court of
competent jurisdiction or other appropriate person is determining
whether the domestic relations order qualifies as a QDRO.
18.9 Claims Procedure
(a) Right to Make Claim. An interested party who disagrees
with the Administrator's determination of his or her right
to Plan benefits must submit a written claim and exhaust
this claim procedure before legal recourse of any type is
sought. The claim must include the important issues the
interested party believes support the claim. The
Administrator, pursuant to the authority provided in the
Plan, shall either approve or deny the claim.
(b) Process for Denying a Claim. The Administrator's partial or
complete denial of an initial claim must include an
understandable, written response covering (1) the specific
reasons why the claim is being denied (with reference to the
pertinent Plan provisions) and (2) the steps necessary to
perfect the claim and obtain a final review.
(c) Appeal of Denial and Final Review. The interested party may
make a written appeal of the Administrator's initial
decision, and the Administrator shall respond in the same
manner and form as prescribed for denying a claim initially.
(d) Time Frame. The initial claim, its review, appeal and final
review shall be made in a timely fashion, subject to the
following time table:
Days to Respond
Action From Last Action
------ ----------------
Administrator determines benefit NA
Interested party files initial request 60 days
Administrator's initial decision 90 days
Interested party requests final review 60 days
Administrator's final decision 60 days
However, the Administrator may take up to twice the maximum
response time for its initial and final review if it provides
an explanation within the normal period of why an extension
is needed and when its decision shall be forthcoming.
18.10 Construction
Headings are included for reading convenience. The text shall
control if any ambiguity or inconsistency exists between the
headings and the text. The singular and plural shall be
interchanged wherever appropriate. References to Participant shall
include Alternate Payee and/or Beneficiary when appropriate and
even if not otherwise already expressly stated.
18.11 Jurisdiction and Severability
The Plan and Trust shall be construed, regulated and administered
under ERISA and other applicable federal laws and, where not
otherwise preempted, by the laws of the State of New Jersey. If any
provision of the Plan and Trust is or becomes invalid or otherwise
unenforceable, that fact shall not affect the validity or
enforceability of any other provision of the Plan and Trust. All
provisions of the Plan and Trust shall be so construed as to render
them valid and enforceable in accordance with their intent.
18.12 Indemnification by Employer
The Employers hereby agree to indemnify all Plan fiduciaries
against any and all liabilities resulting from any action or
inaction, (including a Plan termination in which the Company fails
to apply for a favorable determination from the Internal Revenue
Service with respect to the qualification of the Plan upon its
termination), in relation to the Plan or Trust (i) including
(without limitation) expenses reasonably incurred in the defense of
any claim relating to the Plan or its assets, and amounts paid in
any settlement relating to the Plan or its assets, but (ii)
excluding liability resulting from actions or inactions made in bad
faith, or resulting from the negligence or willful misconduct of
the Trustee. The Company shall have the right, but not the
obligation, to conduct the defense of any action to which this
Section applies. The Plan fiduciaries are not entitled to indemnity
from the Plan assets relating to any such action.
19 AMENDMENT, MERGER, DIVESTITURES AND TERMINATION
19.1 Amendment
The Company reserves the right to amend the Plan and Trust at any
time, to any extent and in any manner it may deem necessary or
appropriate. The Company (and not the Trustee) shall be responsible
for adopting any amendments necessary to maintain the qualified
status of the Plan and Trust under Code sections 401(a) and 501(a).
If the Committee is acting as the Administrator in accordance with
Section 15.6, it shall have the authority to adopt Plan and Trust
amendments which have no substantial adverse financial impact upon
any Employer or the Plan. All interested parties shall be bound by
any amendment, provided that no amendment shall:
(a) become effective unless it has been adopted in accordance
with the procedures set forth in Section 19.5;
(b) except to the extent permissible under ERISA and the Code,
make it possible for any portion of the Trust assets to
revert to an Employer or to be used for, or diverted to, any
purpose other than for the exclusive benefit of Participants
and Beneficiaries entitled to Plan benefits and to defray
reasonable expenses of administering the Plan;
(c) decrease the rights of any Participant to benefits accrued
(including the elimination of optional forms of benefits) to
the date on which the amendment is adopted, or if later, the
date upon which the amendment becomes effective, except to
the extent permitted under ERISA and the Code; nor
(d) permit a Participant to be paid any portion of his or her
Account subject to the distribution rules of Code section
401(k) unless the payment would otherwise be permitted under
Code section 401(k).
19.2 Merger
The Plan and Trust may not be merged or consolidated with, nor may
its assets or liabilities be transferred to, another plan unless
each Participant and Beneficiary would, if the resulting plan were
then terminated, receive a benefit just after the merger,
consolidation or transfer which is at least equal to the benefit
which would be received if either plan had terminated just before
such event.
19.3 Divestitures
In the event of a sale by an Employer which is a corporation of:
(i) substantially all of the Employer's assets used in a trade or
business to an unrelated corporation, or (ii) a sale of such
Employer's interest in a subsidiary to an unrelated entity or
individual, lump sum distributions shall be permitted from the
Plan, except as provided below, to Participants with respect to
Employees who continue employment with the corporation acquiring
such assets or who continue employment with such subsidiary, as
applicable.
Notwithstanding, distributions shall not be permitted if the
purchaser agrees, in connection with the sale, to be substituted as
the Company as the sponsor of the Plan or to accept a transfer in a
transaction subject to Code section 414(l)(1) of the assets and
liabilities representing the Participants' benefits into a plan of
the purchaser or a plan to be established by the purchaser.
19.4 Plan Termination and Complete Discontinuance of Contributions
The Company may, at any time and for any reason, terminate the Plan
in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 19.5, or
completely discontinue contributions.
In the event of the Plan's termination, if no successor plan is
established or maintained, lump sum distributions shall be made in
accordance with the terms of the Plan as in effect at the time of
the Plan's termination or as thereafter amended, provided that a
post-termination amendment shall not be effective to the extent
that it violates Section 19.1 unless it is required in order to
maintain the qualified status of the Plan upon its termination. The
Trustee's and Employer's authority shall continue beyond the Plan's
termination date until all Trust assets have been liquidated and
distributed.
19.5 Amendment and Termination Procedures
The following procedural requirements shall govern the adoption of
any amendment or termination (a "Change") of the Plan and Trust:
(a) The Company may adopt any Change by action of its board of
directors in accordance with its normal procedures.
(b) The Committee, if acting as Administrator in accordance with
Section 15.6, may adopt any Change within the scope of its
authority provided under Section 19.1 and in the manner
specified in Section 15.7(a).
(c) Any Change must be (1) set forth in writing, and (2) signed
and dated by a corporate officer of the Company or, in the
case of a Change adopted by the Committee, at least one of
its members.
(d) If the effective date of any Change is not specified in the
document setting forth the Change, it shall be effective as
of the date it is signed by the last person whose signature
is required under clause (2) above, except to the extent that
another effective date is necessary to maintain the qualified
status of the Plan and Trust under Code sections 401(a) and
501(a).
(e) No Change shall become effective until it is accepted and
signed by the Trustee (which acceptance shall not
unreasonably be withheld).
19.6 Termination of Employer's Participation
Any Employer may, at any time and for any reason, terminate its
Plan participation by action of its board of directors in
accordance with its normal procedures. Written notice of such
action shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer of the
Employer and delivered to the Company. If the effective date of
such action is not specified, it shall be effective on, or as soon
as reasonably practicable after, the date of delivery. Upon the
Employer's request, the Company may instruct the Trustee and
Administrator to spin off all affected Accounts and underlying
assets into a separate qualified plan under which the Employer
shall assume the powers and duties of the Company. Alternatively,
the Company may continue to maintain the Accounts under the Plan.
19.7 Replacement of the Trustee
The Trustee may resign as Trustee under the Plan and Trust or may
be removed by the Company at any time upon at least 90 days written
notice (or less if agreed to by both parties). In such event, the
Company shall appoint a successor trustee by the end of the notice
period. The successor trustee shall then succeed to all the powers
and duties of the Trustee under the Plan and Trust. If no successor
trustee has been named by the end of the notice period, the
Company's chief executive officer shall become the trustee, or if
he or she declines, the Trustee may petition the court for the
appointment of a successor trustee.
19.8 Final Settlement and Accounting of Trustee
(a) Final Settlement. As soon as administratively feasible
after its resignation or removal as Trustee, the Trustee
shall transfer to the successor trustee all property
currently held by the Trust. However, the Trustee is
authorized to reserve such sum of money as it may deem
advisable for payment of its accounts and expenses in
connection with the settlement of its accounts or other
fees or expenses payable by the Trust. Any balance
remaining after payment of such fees and expenses shall be
paid to the successor trustee.
(b) Final Accounting. The Trustee shall provide a final
accounting to the Administrator within 90 days of the date
Trust assets are transferred to the successor trustee.
(c) Administrator Approval. Approval of the final accounting
shall automatically occur 90 days after such accounting has
been received by the Administrator, unless the Administrator
files a written objection with the Trustee within such time
period. Such approval shall be final as to all matters and
transactions stated or shown therein and binding upon the
Administrator.
APPENDIX A - MAPPING OF ACCOUNTS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. DOLLARS & SENSE PLAN AND TRUST
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Predecessor Plan Name/ Date of Employee ESOP Employer Additional Discretionary Prior
Name of Accounts Transfer Pre-Tax After-Tax Rollover Transfer Match Match Match Match
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
San Marcos Telephone
Company,Inc. and SM 07/01/93
Telecorp Companies
Retirement Plan: x
|X| Pre-Tax x
|X| After-Tax x
|X| Rollover x
|X| Prior Match
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PacifiCorp K Plus
Employee Savings Plan:1 01/10/98
|X| Pre-Tax x
|X| After-Tax x
|X| Rollover x
|X| Company Match 2 x
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Account Names were provided by the recordkeeper and not specifically identified in plan document for the PacifiCorp K
Plus Employee Savings Plan.
2 A former PacifiCorp K Plus Employee Savings Plan participant's interest in the PacifiCorp K Plus Employee Stock Ownership
Plan was liquidated and deposited to his or her Company Match Account under the plan prior to the date of transfer to the Plan.
</TABLE>
APPENDIX B - INVESTMENT FUNDSAPPENDIX B - INVESTMENT FUNDS
I. Investment Funds Available
The Investment Funds offered under the Plan as of the Effective Date
include this set of daily valued funds:
Category Funds
-------- -----
Money Market Money Market
------------ ------------
Income Bond Index
------ ----------
Balanced Asset Allocation
-------- ----------------
Equity Company Stock
------ -------------
Growth Stock
------------
S&P 500 Stock
-------------
Combination LifePath Series
----------- ---------------
Effective January 10, 1998 assets from the PacifiCorp K Plus Employee
Savings Plan shall be transferred to the Plan attributable to the account
balances of certain participants thereunder who as of the date of transfer
are Participants in the Plan. Such assets shall include cash and
PacifiCorp Stock to the extent of each such participant's investment in
the "Company Stock Fund" under such plan. A PacifiCorp Stock Fund shall be
established under the Plan to hold such assets. The PacifiCorp Stock Fund
shall be comprised of PacifiCorp Stock and sufficient deposit or money
market type assets to handle the PacifiCorp Stock Fund's liquidity and
disbursement needs. A Participant's existing investment in the PacifiCorp
Stock Fund as of the date of transfer and earnings thereon may continue to
be invested in the PacifiCorp Stock Fund until the Participant directs
otherwise or, if earlier, the date the Fund is liquidated in accordance
with the direction of the Administrator. The PacifiCorp Stock Fund is not
otherwise designated as available for investment by Participants or
Beneficiaries.
Each Participant (or, in the event of the Participant's death, the
Participant's Beneficiary) shall be entitled to instruct the Trustee as to
the voting or tendering of any full or partial shares of PacifiCorp Stock
held on his or her behalf in the PacifiCorp Stock Fund. Prior to such
voting or tendering of PacifiCorp Stock, each Participant (or, if
applicable, Beneficiary) shall receive a copy of the proxy solicitation or
other material relating to such vote or tender decision and a form for the
Participant (or, if applicable, Beneficiary) to complete which
confidentially instructs the Trustee to vote or tender such shares in the
manner indicated by the Participant (or, if applicable, Beneficiary). Upon
receipt of such instructions, the Trustee shall act with respect to such
shares as instructed.
With regard to shares for which the Trustee receives no voting or
tendering instructions from Participants (or, if applicable,
Beneficiaries), the Administrator shall instruct the Trustee with respect
to how to vote or tender such shares and the Trustee shall act with
respect to such shares as instructed.
II. Default Investment Fund
The default Investment Fund as of the Effective Date is the Money
Market Fund.
III. Accounts For Which Investment is Restricted
A Participant may direct the investment of his or her entire Account
except for his or her Employer Match, Additional Match and Discretionary
Match Accounts, and except as otherwise provided in Section 7, which as of
the Effective Date shall be invested in the Company Stock Fund.
IV. Maximum Percentage Restrictions Applicable to Certain Investment Funds
As of the Effective Date, there are no maximum percentage restrictions
applicable to any Investment Funds.
APPENDIX C - PAYMENT OF PLAN FEES AND EXPENSES
As of the Effective Date, payment of Plan fees and expenses shall be as follows:
I. Investment Management Fees: These are paid by Participants in that
management fees reduce the investment return reported and credited to
Participants, except that the Employer shall pay the fees related to the
Company Stock Fund and the PacifiCorp Stock Fund. These are paid by the
Employer on a quarterly basis.
II. Recordkeeping Fees: These are paid by the Employer on a quarterly basis,
except that with regard to a Participant who is no longer an Employee or
a Beneficiary, these are paid by the Participant and are assessed
monthly and billed/collected from Accounts quarterly.
III. Loan Fees: A $3.50 per month fee is assessed and billed/collected
quarterly from the Account of each Participant who has an outstanding
loan balance, except with regard to a Participant who has an outstanding
loan balance attributable to a loan transferred from the PacifiCorp K
Plus Employee Savings Plan.
IV. Investment Fund Election Changes: For each Investment Fund election
change by a Participant, in excess of four changes per year, a $10 fee
shall be assessed and billed/collected quarterly from the Participant's
Account.
V. Periodic Installment Payment Fees: A $3.00 per check fee shall be
assessed and billed/collected quarterly from the Account of each
Participant for whom a check representing a periodic installment payment
is issued.
VI. Additional Fees Paid by Employer: All other Plan related fees and
expenses shall be paid by the Employer. To the extent that the
Administrator later elects that any such fees shall be borne by
Participants, estimates of the fees shall be determined and reconciled,
at least annually, and the fees shall be assessed monthly and
billed/collected from Accounts quarterly.
APPENDIX D - LOAN INTEREST RATE
As of the Effective Date, the interest rate charged on Participant loans shall
be equal to the prime rate published in The Wall Street Journal at the time the
loan is processed, plus 3%. If multiple prime rates are published in The Wall
Street Journal, the prime rate selected shall be the rate closest to the last
prime rate used for this purpose.
Exhibit 10.1(c)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
DOLLARS & SENSE PLAN AND TRUST
ESTABLISHMENT OF MAXIMUM PRE-TAX
CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE
Pursuant to Section 3.4 of the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars
& Sense Plan and Trust, the maximum Employee Pre-Tax Contribution percentage for
Participants is hereby changed to 12%, effective for as of the first pay period
beginning on or about January 1, 1999.
Thus done and signed this 29th day of December, 1998.
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
By: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
Exhibit 10.1(q)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
SUPPLEMENTAL DOLLARS & SENSE PLAN
1998 RESTATEMENT
I. Purpose of the Plan
-------------------
This Supplemental Dollars & Sense Plan was established by Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc. (the "Company") and its subsidiaries and designated
affiliates to provide to certain select management employees the opportunity to
defer a portion of their compensation in excess of the deferrals permissible
under the terms of the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Dollars & Sense Plan
and Trust (the "Dollars & Sense Plan") maintained by the Company and to allow
the Company to make matching contributions based on such deferrals in excess of
those permissible under such plan. This Plan is not intended to constitute a
qualified plan under Section 401(a) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as
amended (the "Code"), and is designed to be exempt from the participation,
vesting, funding and fiduciary responsibility rules of the Employee Retirement
Income Security Act of 1974, as amended ("ERISA").
II. Definitions
-----------
As used in this Plan, the following terms shall have the meanings
indicated, unless the context otherwise specifies or requires:
2.01 "ACCOUNT" shall mean the account established under this Plan in
accordance with Section 4.01.
2.02 "ACCOUNT BALANCE", as of a given date, shall mean the fair market
value of a Participant's Account, as determined by the Committee.
2.03 "BENEFICIARY" shall mean the person or persons designated by the
Participant to receive benefits after the death of the Participant.
2.04 "BOARD OF DIRECTORS" shall mean not less than a quorum of the whole
Board of Directors of the Company.
2.05 "COMMITTEE" shall mean three or more members of the Board of
Directors of the Company as described in Section 11.01 of the Plan, or the Board
if no Committee has been appointed.
2.06 "DISABILITY" shall mean a condition which makes a Participant unable
to perform each of the material duties of his regular occupation where he is
likely to remain thus incapacitated continuously and permanently.
2.07 "EFFECTIVE DATE" of this Plan shall mean the first day of the first
payroll period commencing on or after January 1, 1995. The effective date of
this Restatement shall mean the first day of the first payroll period commencing
on or after January 1, 1999.
2.08 "EMPLOYER" shall mean the Company, any Subsidiary thereof, and any
affiliate designated by the Company as a participating employer under this Plan.
2.09 "EXCESS SALARY" shall mean the amount of a Participant's compensation
upon which the Participant can no longer make deferral contributions under the
Dollars & Sense Plan due to the application of either Code Section 401(a)(17) or
402(g).
2.10 "INCENTIVE COMPENSATION" shall mean the stock portion of any amount
awarded to a Participant under the Company's Key Employee Incentive Compensation
Program or other executive incentive compensation arrangement maintained by the
Company. The stock portion of the award shall be considered Incentive
Compensation in an amount equal to its cash equivalent at the time of conversion
of the award from cash to stock. A Participant's Incentive Compensation shall be
determined on an annual basis and shall, for purposes of this Plan, be allocated
to the year in which the award is paid to the Participant.
2.11 "LEAVE OF ABSENCE" shall mean any extraordinary absence authorized by
the Employer under the Employer's standard personnel practices.
2.12 "NORMAL RETIREMENT AGE" shall mean age sixty-five (65).
2.13 "NORMAL RETIREMENT DATE" shall mean the first day of the month
coincident with or next following a Participant's sixty-fifth (65th) birthday.
2.14 "PARTICIPANT" shall mean any officer of the Company, any Subsidiary
thereof, and any designated affiliate, who is granted participation in the Plan
in accordance with the provisions of Article III.
2.15 "PLAN" shall mean the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
Supplemental Dollars & Sense Plan, as amended and restated herein.
2.16 "PLAN YEAR" shall mean the calendar year.
2.17 "SUBSIDIARY" shall mean any corporation in which the Company owns,
directly or indirectly through subsidiaries, at least fifty percent (50%) of the
combined voting power of all classes of stock.
III. Participation
-------------
3.01 Any officer who is either one of the key employees of the Employer in
a position to contribute materially to the continued growth and future financial
success of the Employer, or one who has made a significant contribution to the
Employer's operations, thereby meriting special recognition, shall be eligible
to participate provided the following requirements are met:
a. The officer is employed on a full-time basis by the
Company, any Subsidiary thereof, or any designated
affiliate;
b. The officer is compensated for full-time employment by a
regular salary;
c. The coverage of the officer is duly approved by the Committee.
It is intended that participation in this Plan shall be extended only to those
officers who are members of a select group of management and highly compensated
employees, as determined by the Committee.
IV. Accounts and Investments
------------------------
4.01 An Account shall be established on behalf of each Participant who
receives an allocation pursuant to Article VI hereof. Each Participant's Account
shall be credited with such allocation, and earnings and gains on his Account
Balance, and shall be debited with distributions, losses, and any expenses
properly chargeable thereto.
4.02 Each Participant shall have the same rights with respect to
investment of amounts in his Account hereunder as are available from time to
time under the Dollars & Sense Plan, as to permissible investment funds, except
as provided below. Investment in the Century Stock Fund and the Stagecoach Bond
Index Fund will not be available under the Plan. The investment rights of each
Participant hereunder shall extend to all amounts in his Account, including
deferral contributions and matching contributions.
4.03 The Accounts of Participants in the Plan shall be revalued as of the
last day of each calendar quarter, and each Participant shall be furnished with
a statement of his Account, in such form as the Committee shall determine,
within a reasonable period of time after the end of each quarter.
V. Participant Salary Deferrals
----------------------------
5.01 Each Participant shall make separate written elections, prior to the
first day of each Plan Year (or, as to Participants who first become
Participants as of a day other than January 1, prior to such date) to defer a
portion of his (i) Excess Salary and/or (ii) Incentive Compensation. The amount
of allowable deferral pursuant to each of the Participant's elections shall be a
whole percentage, not to exceed twelve percent (12%). An election to defer
Excess Salary shall provide for a deferral to be made from each paycheck. An
election to defer Incentive Compensation shall provide for a deferral to be made
from the bonus check representing the cash portion of such award.
5.02 Any agreement made under the terms of Section 5.01 shall be
irrevocable until the succeeding January 1, except that a salary deferral
election under the terms of this Plan may be changed, amended or suspended at
the same time and in the same manner as elections under the Dollars & Sense
Plan.
5.03 If a Participant does not make new elections for a succeeding Plan
Year under Section 5.01, his elections in effect for the current Plan Year shall
be deemed to continue in force and effect as if made for such succeeding Plan
Year.
VI. Allocations to Participant's Accounts
-------------------------------------
6.01 The Employer shall allocate to each Participant's Account the amount
of Excess Salary and/or Incentive Compensation deferred by such Participant
pursuant to an election made under Section 5.01. The allocation hereunder shall
be made as of the date of the paycheck or bonus check to which the deferral by
the Participant relates.
6.02 The Employer shall allocate a matching contribution to each
Participant's Account under this Plan each Plan Year equal to the total matching
percentage (including matching and additional matching contributions) for the
year provided by the Dollars & Sense Plan multiplied by the Participant's
deferrals under this Plan not in excess of six percent (6%) of the Participant's
Excess Salary and/or Incentive Compensation, applied to each separately.
VII. Vesting of Account
------------------
7.01 A Participant's Account Balance shall be fully vested at all times.
VIII. Time of Payment and Beneficiaries
8.01 Except as provided in Section 8.02, a Participant's Account Balance
is payable upon termination of employment.
8.02 Payment of the Account Balance of a deceased Participant shall
commence within ninety (90) days after his death, and shall be made to his
beneficiary designated on a form provided for such purpose by the Plan
Administrator. If the Participant fails to designate a beneficiary, his Account
Balance shall be payable to his surviving spouse or, if none, to his surviving
child or children (or legal representative of any minor child or child who has
been declared incompetent or incapable of handling his affairs) in equal shares.
The Account Balance of a Participant who dies leaving no spouse or children
shall be paid to his estate.
IX. Form of Benefit Payment
-----------------------
9.01 The normal form of payment of a Participant's Account Balance is a
lump sum cash payment.
9.02 A Participant may, prior to termination of employment, elect to
receive payment of his Account Balance in monthly, quarterly, or annual cash
installments of approximately equal amounts, over a period not to exceed ten
(10) years.
X. Additional Restrictions on Benefit Payments
-------------------------------------------
10.01 In no event will there be a duplication of benefits payable under
the Plan because of employment by more than one participating Employer.
XI. Administration and Interpretation
---------------------------------
11.01 The Plan shall be administered by the Board of Directors of the
Company through a Committee which shall consist of three or more members of such
Board. No individual who is or has ever been a member of the Committee shall be
eligible to be designated as a participant or receive payments under this Plan.
The Committee shall have full power and authority to interpret and administer
the Plan and, subject to the provisions herein set forth, to prescribe, amend
and rescind rules and regulations and make all other determinations necessary or
desirable for the administration of the Plan. The Board may from time to time
appoint additional members of the Committee or remove members and appoint new
members in substitution for those previously appointed and to fill vacancies
however caused.
11.02 The decision of the Committee relating to any question concerning or
involving the interpretation or administration of the Plan shall be final and
conclusive, and nothing in the Plan shall be deemed to give any employee any
right to participate in the Plan, except to such extent, if any, as the
Committee may have determined or approved pursuant to the provisions of the
Plan.
XII. Nature of the Plan
------------------
12.01 Benefits under the Plan shall generally be payable by the Company
from its own funds, and such benefits shall not (i) impose any obligation upon
the trust(s) of the other employee benefit programs of the Company; (ii) be paid
from such trust(s); nor (iii) have any effect whatsoever upon the amount or
payment of benefits under the other employee benefit programs of the Company.
Participants have only an unsecured right to receive benefits under the Plan
from the Company as general creditors of the Company. The Company may deposit
amounts in a trust established by the Company for the purpose of funding the
Company's obligations under the Plan. Participants and their beneficiaries,
however, have no secured interest or special claim to the assets of such trust,
and the assets of the trust shall be subject to the payment of claims of general
creditors of the Company upon the insolvency or bankruptcy of the Company, as
provided in the trust.
XIII. Employment Relationship
-----------------------
13.01 An employee shall be considered to be in the employment of the
Employer as long as he remains an employee of either the Company, any Subsidiary
of the Company, any designated affiliate, or any corporation to which
substantially all of the assets and business of any of such entities are
transferred. Nothing in the adoption of this Plan nor the designation of any
Participant shall confer on any employee the right to continued employment by
the Employer, or affect in any way the right of the Employer to terminate his
employment at any time. Any question as to whether and when there has been a
termination of an employee's employment, and the cause, notice or other
circumstances of such termination, shall be determined by the Board, and its
determination shall be final.
XIV. Amendment and Termination of Plan
---------------------------------
14.01 The Board of Directors of the Company in its sole discretion may
terminate the Plan at any time and shall have the right to alter or amend the
Plan or any part thereof from time to time, except that the Board of Directors
shall not terminate the Plan or make any alteration or amendment thereto which
would impair the rights of a Participant previously accrued.
XV. Binding Effect
--------------
15.01 This Plan shall be binding on the Company, each Subsidiary and any
designated affiliate, the successors and assigns thereof, and any entity to
which substantially all of the assets or business of the Company, a Subsidiary,
or a designated affiliate are transferred.
XVI. Reimbursement of Participants
-----------------------------
16.01 The Company shall reimburse any Participant, or beneficiary thereof,
for all expenses, including attorney's fees, actually and reasonably incurred by
the Participant or beneficiary in any proceeding to enforce any of his rights
under this Plan.
XVII. Construction
------------
17.01 The masculine gender, where appearing in the Plan, shall be deemed
to include the feminine gender, and the singular may indicate the plural, unless
the context clearly indicates the contrary. The words "hereof", "herein",
"hereunder" and other similar compounds of the word "here" shall, unless
otherwise specifically stated, mean and refer to the entire Plan, not to any
particular provision or Section. Article and Section headings are included for
convenience of reference and are not intended to add to, or subtract from, the
terms of the Plan.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. has executed
this Plan this 29th day of December, 1998.
ATTEST: CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
/s/ Linda Vaughn By: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- ---------------- -----------------------------------
R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
Exhibit 10.1(y)
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
SUPPLEMENTAL DEFINED BENEFIT PLAN
I. Purpose of the Plan
-------------------
This Supplemental Defined Benefit Plan (the "Plan") is intended to provide
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. (the "Company") and its subsidiaries a
method for attracting and retaining key employees; to provide a method for
recognizing the contributions of such personnel; and to promote executive and
managerial flexibility, thereby advancing the interests of the Company and its
stockholders. In addition, the Plan is intended to provide to a select group of
management and highly compensated employees a more adequate level of retirement
benefits in combination with the Company's general retirement program. The Plan
is not intended to constitute a qualified plan under Section 401(a) of the
Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"), and is designed to be
exempt from the participation, vesting, funding and fiduciary responsibility
rules of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended
("ERISA").
II. Definitions
-----------
As used in this Plan, the following terms shall have the meanings
indicated, unless the context otherwise specifies or requires:
2.01 "ACTUARIAL EQUIVALENT" shall mean the amount of pension of a
different type or payable at a different age that has the same value as computed
by the Actuary on the same basis as that prescribed in Section 10.09 of the
CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
2.02 "BENEFIT YEARS" shall mean years of service for benefit accrual
purposes as determined under Section 3.06 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
2.03 "BOARD OF DIRECTORS" shall mean not less than a quorum of the whole
Board of Directors of Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
2.04 "CHANGE IN CONTROL" shall mean the occurrence of any of the following
(i) the acquisition by any "person" (as such term is used in Section 13(d) and
14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the "Exchange Act")), other than
the Company or any employee benefit plan or related trust or affiliate of the
Company or its subsidiaries, of beneficial ownership (as defined in Rule 13d-3
promulgated under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of
the Company representing 30% or more of the combined voting power of the
Company's then outstanding securities entitled to vote generally in the election
of directors, but not including any acquisition directly from the Company; (ii)
the consummation of a merger, consolidation, reorganization, share exchange, or
sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the
Company unless, immediately thereafter, at least 50% of the outstanding voting
power of the surviving or successor corporation, or, if applicable, the parent
company thereof (the "Surviving Company"), are owned by the Company's
shareholders immediately prior to such time, at least a majority of the
directors of the Surviving Company were directors of the Company at the time
such transaction was approved, and no person or entity (excluding any employee
benefit plan or related trust of the Company or the Surviving Company and any
person or entity that was a shareholder of the Company immediately prior to such
time) beneficially owns 20% or more of the outstanding voting power of the
Surviving Company; (iii) during any period of two consecutive years, individuals
who at the beginning of such period constitute the Board of Directors of the
Company cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof, unless
the election of each director who was not a director at the beginning of such
period shall have been approved in advance by directors representing at least
two-thirds of the directors then in office who were directors at the beginning
of the period; or (iv) the approval by the Company's shareholders of a complete
liquidation or dissolution of the Company.
2.05 "COMMITTEE" shall mean three or more members of the Board of
Directors as described in Section 13.01 of the Plan, or the Board if no
Committee has been appointed.
2.06 "COMPANY" shall mean Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc., any
Subsidiary thereof, and any affiliate designated by the Company as a
participating employer under this Plan.
2.07 "EFFECTIVE DATE" of this Plan shall be January 1, 1999.
2.08 "EMPLOYER" shall mean Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc., any
Subsidiary thereof, and any affiliate designated by the Company as a
participating employer under this Plan.
2.09 "FINAL AVERAGE PAY" shall mean a participant's average monthly
compensation as determined under Section 6.02-3 of the CenturyTel Retirement
Plan, without taking into account the limitation contained in Section 6.02-4(e)
thereof.
2.10 "NORMAL RETIREMENT DATE" shall mean the first day of the month
coincident with or next following a Participant's 65th birthday.
2.11 "PARTICIPANT" shall mean any officer of the Employer who is granted
participation in the Plan in accordance with the provisions of Article III.
2.12 "PLAN" shall mean the Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
Supplemental Defined Benefit Plan.
2.13 "SOCIAL SECURITY COVERED COMPENSATION" shall mean the amount
determined pursuant to Section 6.02-5 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
2.14 "SUBSIDIARY" shall mean any corporation in which the Company owns,
directly or indirectly through subsidiaries, at least fifty percent (50%) of the
combined voting power of all classes of stock.
III. Participation
-------------
Any officer who is either one of the key employees of the Company in a
position to contribute materially to the continued growth and future financial
success of the Company, or one who has made a significant contribution to the
Company's operations, thereby meriting special recognition, shall be eligible to
participate provided the following requirements are met:
a. The officer is employed on a full-time basis by Century
Telephone Enterprises, Inc., any Subsidiary thereof, or any
affiliate designated by the Company as a participating
employer under this Plan.
b. The officer is compensated for full-time employment by a
regular salary;
c. The coverage of the officer is duly approved by the Committee.
It is intended that participation in this Plan shall be extended only to those
officers who are members of a select group of management and highly compensated
employees, as determined by the Committee.
IV. Normal Retirement
-----------------
4.01 The monthly retirement benefit payable to a Participant on his Normal
Retirement Date shall be the excess of an amount determined pursuant to Section
6.02 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan, computed without taking into account the
limitation contained in Section 6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined
taking into account such limitation.
V. Late Retirement
---------------
5.01 If a Participant remains employed beyond his Normal Retirement Date,
his late retirement date will be the first day of the month coincident with or
next following his actual date of retirement.
5.02 A Participant's late retirement benefit shall be the excess of an
amount determined pursuant to Section 6.04 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan,
computed without taking into account the limitation contained in Section
6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined taking into account such
limitation.
VI. Early Retirement
----------------
6.01 A Participant who has attained age 55, and who has completed 5 or
more Years of Service, is eligible for early retirement. An eligible
Participant's early retirement date is the first day of the month coincident
with or next following the date he terminates employment.
6.02 A Participant's early retirement benefit shall be the excess of an
amount determined pursuant to Section 6.03 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan,
computed without taking into account the limitation contained in Section
6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined taking into account such
limitation, payable at such time as the Participant elects pursuant to Section
6.03-2 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
6.03 A Participant may elect to receive his early retirement benefit prior
to Normal Retirement Date, in which event the benefit payable will be reduced
according to the schedules contained in Section 6.03-1 of the CenturyTel
Retirement Plan.
VII. Disability
----------
7.01 A Participant who becomes disabled, as determined under Section
6.12-2 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan, prior to retirement or termination of
service will be entitled to a disability benefit equal to the excess of an
amount determined pursuant to Section 6.12 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan,
computed without taking into account the limitation contained in Section
6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined taking into account such
limitation.
7.02 A Participant's disability benefit will commence at his Normal
Retirement Date.
VIII. Death Benefit for Spouse
------------------------
8.01 Upon the death of a Participant who meets the requirements set forth
in Section 6.11-1 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan, the spouse of the
Participant will be entitled to receive a death benefit determined in accordance
with Section 8.02.
8.02 The monthly death benefit payable to the spouse of a Participant
shall be the excess of an amount determined pursuant to Section 6.11 of the
CenturyTel Retirement Plan, computed without taking into account the limitation
contained in Section 6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined taking
into account such limitation.
8.03 The death benefit shall be paid to the surviving spouse at such time
and in such form as prescribed by Sections 6.11-2 through 6.11-4 of the
CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
8.04 If a Participant has no surviving spouse at the date of his or her
death, no death benefit shall be paid under this Plan.
IX. Reemployment after Retirement
-----------------------------
If a Participant retires and commences receiving benefits under the Plan,
and is later rehired by the Company, benefit payments shall be withheld and
shall recommence in accordance with Section 6.13 of the CenturyTel Retirement
Plan.
X. Termination of Service; Change in Control
-----------------------------------------
10.01 If a Participant terminates service prior to death, disability or
retirement, he shall be entitled only to vested accrued benefits at the time of
termination and shall be vested in accrued benefits in accordance with the
following schedule:
Years of Service Vested %
---------------- --------
less than 5 0%
5 or more 100%
10.02 A Participant's vested Accrued Benefit shall be equal to the excess
of an amount determined pursuant to Sections 7.02 through 7.04 of the CenturyTel
Retirement Plan, computed without taking into account the limitation contained
in Section 6.02-4(e) thereof, over the amount so determined without taking into
account such limitation. The amount so determined shall be payable in the manner
prescribed in Sections 7.02 through 7.04 of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan, and
forfeitures of nonvested benefits shall be determined pursuant to Section 7.04
of the CenturyTel Retirement Plan.
10.03 (a) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan or in any
applicable law or regulation, upon the earlier of (i) the occurrence
of a Change in Control, (ii) the date that any person or entity
submits an offer or proposal to the Company that results in or leads
to a Change in Control (whether by such person or any other person)
or (iii) the date of the public announcement of a Change in Control
or an offer, proposal or proxy solicitation that results in or leads
to a Change in Control (whether by the person or entity making such
announcement or any other person) (the earliest of such dates being
hereinafter referred to as the "Effective Date"), the Accrued
Benefit of each Participant (other than any Participant whose
service as an employee was terminated prior to full vesting of his
Accrued Benefit under Section 10.01) and the benefits conferred
under this Section shall automatically vest and thereafter may not
be adversely affected in any matter without the prior written
consent of the Participant. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary
in this Plan, upon the occurrence of a Change in Control any
Participant who is then employed by Century or its subsidiaries
("Active Participants") shall have an irrevocable right to receive,
and the Company shall be irrevocably obligated to pay, a lump sum
cash payment in an amount determined pursuant to this Section if the
Company or its successor, during a period commencing upon the
Effective Date and ending on the third anniversary of the occurrence
of the Change in Control, (i) terminates the Active Participant's
employment, (ii) reduces the Active Participant's salary in effect
immediately prior to the Effective Date, (iii) diminishes the Active
Participant's duties, responsibilities or position in the management
of the Company or (iv) requires the Active Participant to relocate
involuntarily to an office outside of the city in which he performed
his services for the Company immediately prior to the Effective Date
(each such action being referred to as an "Effective Termination").
The lump sum cash payment payable to Active Participants under this
Section (the "Lump Sum Payment") shall be paid on the date of
Effective Termination or as soon thereafter as is administratively
feasible.
(b) The amount of each Lump Sum Payment shall be determined as
follows:
(i) With respect to any Active Participant who, after
giving effect to the terms of subsection (b)(iv)
below, is eligible as of the date of Effective
Termination to receive benefits under Articles IV or
V of this Plan, the Lump Sum Payment shall equal the
Present Value (as defined below) of the stream of
payments to which such participant would have
otherwise been entitled to receive immediately upon
Effective Termination in accordance with Articles IV
or V of this Plan (assuming such benefits are paid in
the form of a lifetime annuity), based upon such
participant's Final Average Pay, Social Security
Covered Compensation and Benefit Years as of the date
of Effective Termination, without giving effect to
any salary reductions that gave rise to such
Effective Termination, but after giving effect to the
terms of subsection (b)(iv) below.
(ii) With respect to any Active Participant who, after
giving effect to the terms of subsection (b)(iv)
below, is not eligible as of the date of Effective
Termination to receive benefits under Articles IV, V
or VI of this Plan, the Lump Sum Payment shall equal
the product of (A) the Present Value, calculated as
of age 65, of the stream of payments to which such
participant would have otherwise been entitled to
receive at age 65 in accordance with the terms of
this Plan based on the same assumptions and terms set
forth in subsection (b)(i) above, multiplied times
(B) such discount factor as is necessary to reduce
the amount determined under subsection (b)(ii)(A)
above to its Present Value, it being understood that
in calculating such discount factor, no discount
shall be applied to reflect the possibility that such
participant may die prior to attaining age 65.
(iii) With respect to any Active Participant who, after giving
effect to the terms of subsection (b)(iv) below, is
eligible as of the date of Effective Termination to
receive benefits under Article VI of the Plan, the Lump
Sum Payment shall equal the greater of (A) the Present
Value of the stream of payments to which such
participant would have otherwise been entitled to
receive immediately upon Effective Termination in
accordance with Article VI of this Plan, based upon the
assumptions and terms set forth in subsection (b)(i)
above, or (B) the Present Value, calculated as of age
65, of the stream of payments to which such participant
would otherwise be entitled to receive at age 65 in
accordance with this Plan, determined in the same manner
and subject to the same assumptions and terms set forth
in subsection (b)(ii) above.
(iv) In calculating the Lump Sum Payment due to any Active
Participant under this Section, the number of years
of Benefit Years of the Active Participant shall be
deemed to equal the number of years determinable
under the other sections of this Plan plus three
years and the Active Participant's age shall be
deemed to equal his actual age plus three years;
provided, however, that in no event shall the
provisions of this subsection be applicable if the
application thereof will reduce the Active
Participant's Lump Sum Payment from the amount that
would otherwise be payable with the addition of less
than three years of service, age or both.
(v) As used in this Section with respect to any amount,
the "Present Value" of such amount shall mean the
discounted value of such amount that is determined by
making customary present value calculations in
accordance with generally accepted actuarial
principles, provided that (A) the discount interest
rate applied in connection therewith shall equal the
interest rate quoted by the Bloomberg Municipal AAA
General Obligation 5-Year Index (as of the close of
business on the first business day of the calendar
quarter in which such present value calculations are
made) or, in the event such index is no longer
published, any similar index for comparable municipal
securities and (B) the mortality table applied in
connection therewith shall be the mortality table
prescribed by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue
under Section 417(e)(3)(A)(ii)(I) of the Internal
Revenue Code or any successor table prescribed by
such organization.
(c) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan, upon
the sooner of the occurrence of a Change in Control or the
approval by the Board of Directors of the Company of any
Change in Control, the Company shall promptly consult with
each Participant who has already begun to receive periodic
payments under this Plan ("Retired Participants") and,
following such consultations, the Company shall have the
option with respect to each Retired Participant to (i)
confirm in writing its obligation to continue to provide to
such Retired Participant all benefits hereunder in the same
manner provided prior to the Change in Control or (ii) make
a lump sum cash payment in an amount equal to the Present
Value of the participant's future stream of payments which
would otherwise be payable under this Plan. If the Company
elects to furnish any Retired Participant with a lump sum
cash payment, the Company shall offer to assist such
participant in purchasing at such participant's cost an
annuity for the benefit of such participant.
(d) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Plan, upon
the occurrence of Change in Control, any Participant (other
than a Retired Participant) who is then a former employee
of Century or its subsidiaries whose Accrued Benefit is
vested under Section 10.01 ("Inactive Participants") shall
have an irrevocable and unconditional right to receive, and
the Company shall be irrevocably and unconditionally
obligated to pay, a lump sum payment in an amount
determined in the manner provided in subsection (b)(ii) or
(iii), as applicable; provided, however, that no Inactive
Participant will be entitled to the benefits of subsection
(b)(iv).
XI. Form of Benefit Payment
-----------------------
11.01 The normal form of benefit payment is a monthly lifetime annuity,
payable in accordance with the Company's standard payroll practices, with
payments commencing as of the first day of the month following the month in
which the distributable event occurs.
11.02 A Participant may, prior to commencement of participation in the
Plan, elect an optional form of payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of a
Participant's basic monthly pension, as follows:
Option 1: A reduced monthly pension payable for the lifetime of the
Participant with a minimum of sixty (60) monthly payments guaranteed.
Option 2: A reduced monthly pension payable for the lifetime of the
Participant with a minimum of one hundred twenty (120) monthly payments
guaranteed.
Option 3: A reduced monthly pension payable for the lifetime of the
Participant with a minimum of one hundred eighty (180) monthly payments
guaranteed.
Option 4: A reduced monthly pension, payable to the Participant for
the life of the Participant, with monthly payments of one-half (1/2) the
reduced amount that was payable monthly to the Participant payable after
the Participant's death for the life of the Participant's spouse.
Option 5: A reduced monthly pension payable to the Participant for
the life of the Participant, with reduced monthly payments of two thirds
(_) of the reduced amount that was payable monthly to the Participant
payable after the Participant's death for the life of the Participant's
spouse.
Option 6: A reduced monthly pension payable to the Participant for
the life of the Participant, with reduced monthly payments of three
fourths (3/4) of the reduced amount that was payable monthly to the
Participant payable after the Participant's death for the life of the
Participant's spouse.
Option 7: A reduced monthly pension payable to the Participant for
the life of the Participant, with the same monthly pension payable after
the Participant's death for the life of the Participant's spouse.
11.03 If a Participant does not elect an optional form of benefit payment
under Section 11.02 prior to the commencement of participation in the Plan, such
Participant's benefits shall be paid in the normal form provided in Section
11.01.
XII. Additional Restrictions on Benefit Payments
-------------------------------------------
In no event will there be a duplication of benefits payable under the Plan
because of employment by more than one participating Employer.
XIII. Administration and Interpretation
---------------------------------
13.01 The Plan shall be administered by the Board of Directors through a
Committee which shall consist of three or more members of the Board of Directors
of the Company. No individual who is or has ever been a member of the Committee
shall be eligible to be designated as a participant or receive payments under
this Plan. The Committee shall have full power and authority to interpret and
administer the Plan and, subject to the provisions herein set forth, to
prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations and make all other
determinations necessary or desirable for the administration of the Plan. The
Board may from time to time appoint additional members of the Committee or
remove members and appoint new members in substitution for those previously
appointed and to fill vacancies however caused.
13.02 The decision of the Committee relating to any question concerning or
involving the interpretation or administration of the Plan shall be final and
conclusive, and nothing in the Plan shall be deemed to give any employee any
right to participate in the Plan, except to such extent, if any, as the
Committee may have determined or approved pursuant to the provisions of the
Plan.
XIV. Nature of the Plan
------------------
Benefits under the Plan shall generally be payable by the Company from its
own funds, and such benefits shall not (i) impose any obligation upon the
trust(s) of the other employee benefit programs of the Company; (ii) be paid
from such trust(s); nor (iii) have any effect whatsoever upon the amount or
payment of benefits under the other employee benefit programs of the Company.
Participants have only an unsecured right to receive benefits under the Plan
from the Company as general creditors of the Company. The Company may deposit
amounts in a trust established by the Company for the purpose of funding the
Company's obligations under the Plan. Participants and their beneficiaries,
however, have no secured interest or special claim to the assets of the trust,
and the assets of the trust shall be subject to the payment of claims of general
creditors of the Company upon the insolvency or bankruptcy of the Company, as
provided in the trust.
XV. Employment Relationship
-----------------------
An employee shall be considered to be in the employment of the Company and
its subsidiaries as long as he remains an employee of either the Company, any
Subsidiary of the Company, or any corporation to which substantially all of the
assets and business of the Company are transferred. Nothing in the adoption of
this Plan nor the designation of any Participant shall confer on any employee
the right to continued employment by the Company or a Subsidiary of the Company,
or affect in any way the right of the Company or such Subsidiary to terminate
his employment at any time. Any question as to whether and when there has been a
termination of an employee's employment, and the cause, notice or other
circumstances of such termination, shall be determined by the Board, and its
determination shall be final.
XVI. Amendment and Termination of Plan
---------------------------------
The Board of Directors of the Company in its sole discretion may terminate
the Plan at any time, and shall have the right to alter or amend the Plan or any
part thereof from time to time, except that the Board of Directors shall not
terminate the Plan or make any alteration or amendment thereto which would
impair any rights or benefits of a Participant previously accrued.
This Plan shall be binding on the Company, each Subsidiary, and any
affiliate designated by the Company as a participating employer under this Plan,
the successors and assigns thereof, and any entity to which substantially all of
the assets or business of the Company, a Subsidiary, or a participating
affiliate are transferred.
XVIII. Reimbursement to Participants
-----------------------------
The Company shall reimburse any Participant, or beneficiary thereof, for
all expenses, including attorney's fees, actually and reasonably incurred by the
Participant or beneficiary in any proceeding to enforce any of their rights
under this Plan.
XIX. Construction
------------
The masculine gender, where appearing in the Plan, shall be deemed to
include the feminine gender, and the singular may indicate the plural, unless
the context clearly indicates the contrary. The words "hereof", "herein",
"hereunder" and other similar compounds of the word "here" shall, unless
otherwise specifically stated, mean and refer to the entire Plan, not to any
particular provision or Section. Article and Section headings are included for
convenience of reference and are not intended to add to, or subtract from, the
terms of the Plan.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. has executed this
Plan in its corporate name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this
31st day of December, 1998.
ATTEST: CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
/s/ Linda Vaughn By: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- ----------------- R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
Exhibit 10.1(z)
CENTURYTEL RETIREMENT PLAN
1999 RESTATEMENT
January 1, 1999
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
100 Century Park Boulevard
Monroe, Louisiana 71203 Company
CENTURYTEL
RETIREMENT PLAN
1999 RESTATEMENT
January 1, 1999
(As Amended And Restated)
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
100 Century Park Boulevard
Monroe, LA 71203 Company
The Company maintains this Retirement Plan, formerly the Pacific Telecom
Retirement Plan, most recently restated effective January 1, 1990. The Plan
exists for the exclusive benefit of eligible employees and is intended to comply
with Sections 401 and 501 of the Internal Revenue Code and applicable
regulations.
To change the sponsoring employer of the Plan and the name of the Plan, to
make conforming changes to coordinate the Plan with other plans maintained by
the Company, and to comply with other changes in applicable law and regulations,
the Company adopts this document as a complete amendment and restatement of the
Plan as previously in effect (the Prior Plan).
ARTICLE I
Effective Date; Qualification
1.01 Effective Date; Plan Year
1.01-1 The effective date of this Amendment and Restatement is
January 1, 1999, except as otherwise indicated herein with respect to specific
provisions hereof.
1.01-2 The rights of participants who do not have Hours of Service
on or after January 1, 1999 and of their beneficiaries are controlled by the
Prior Plan, and the right of all other participants and beneficiaries are
controlled by this Amendment and Restatement, except as follows:
(a) Service before January 1, 1976 that would be disregarded
due to a Break in Service rule of the Prior Plan as in effect before
that date shall not be counted.
(b) Special increases in benefits payable to retirees and
beneficiaries under the Prior Plan shall apply to retirees without
an Hour of Service on or after the effective date of the Prior Plan
and their beneficiaries.
(c) The responsibilities of the Company and the Committee and
the procedures for applying for benefits, processing claims and
withholding benefits on reemployment, as provided in this Amendment
and Restatement, shall apply to all participants.
1.01-3 The Plan Year and limitation year shall be the calendar year.
1.02 Qualification
If the Commissioner of Internal Revenue determines that this
Amendment and Restatement does not qualify under Section 401(a) of the Internal
Revenue Code, the Company may amend the Plan retroactively to qualify.
ARTICLE IIARTICLE II
Application to the Company and Affiliates
2.01 Eligible Employers
2.01-1 The Company has adopted and any affiliate approved by the
Company may adopt this Plan for its employees.
2.01-2 "Affiliate" means a corporation, person or other entity that
is one of the following:
(a) A member, with an Employer, of a controlled group under
Section 414(b) of the Internal Revenue Code.
(b) A member, with an Employer, of a group of trades or
businesses under common control under Section 414(c) of the Internal
Revenue Code.
(c) A member, with an Employer, of an affiliated service group
under Section 414(m) of the Internal Revenue Code.
2.01-3 "Employer" means the Company and any adopting affiliate. This
Plan is a single plan maintained by multiple employers in which all of the Plan
assets are available to pay benefits for all participants.
2.01-4 Employees of the following Affiliates are not eligible to
participate in this Plan:
(a) Century Business Communications, Inc.
(b) Century Interactive Communications, Inc.
(c) CenturyTel Security Systems, Inc.
2.01-5 The Prior Plan was maintained for the benefit of employees
of Pacific Telecom, Inc. and its affiliates. Pacific Telecom, Inc.
was previously the sponsoring "Company" of this Plan. Effective January 1,
1999, Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. is the sponsoring "Company" herein,
and except as otherwise provided in the Plan, employees of Century Telephone
Enterprises, Inc. and its Affiliates are eligible to participate in this Plan
effective January 1, 1999.
2.02 Service for Affiliates
2.02-1 Transfer of employment from one Affiliate to another shall
not constitute a termination of employment.
2.02-2 Work for an Affiliate shall be counted as Service after the
date of affiliation or an earlier date fixed by the Company in a statement of
adoption.
2.02-3 Except as provided below, Years of Service shall be counted
under Article III during employment with the Company or any Affiliate, whether
or not an Employer, and Benefit Years shall be counted under 3.06 during Service
with an Employer and during Service with a nonadopting Affiliate if the
obligation to pay benefits for such Affiliate Service is assumed from a plan
maintained by the Affiliate. Benefit Years shall be counted for Service with
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. or any Affiliate effective January 1, 1999.
An assumption of benefit obligation shall be stated in writing by the Company,
filed with the Retirement Committee and announced to employees.
2.02-4 If a business is acquired by the Company or an Affiliate and
not continued as a separate incorporated entity, Service for employees of the
acquired business who become employees of the Company or the acquiring Affiliate
shall be counted from their date of hire by the Company or the Affiliate. Past
service for the acquired business may be counted for eligibility or benefits
from dates fixed by the Company, filed with the Retirement Committee and
announced to affected employees.
2.03 Adoption Procedure
An Affiliate may adopt this Plan by a statement in writing, signed
by the Affiliate and approved by the Company. The statement shall include the
effective date of adoption and any special provisions that are to be applicable
only to employees of the adopting Affiliate.
ARTICLE IIIARTICLE III
Eligibility and Service
3.01 Conditions of Eligibility
3.01-1 Participation shall start the first of each month for each
person who satisfies all of the following conditions:
(a) Is a qualified employee of an Employer.
(b) Has completed one Year of Service.
(c) Is age 21 or over.
3.01-2 "Qualified employee" means any employee except the
following:
(a) An employee covered by a collective bargaining agreement
that does not provide for participation in this Plan.
(b) A leased employee treated as an employee for pension
purposes solely because of Section 414(n) of the Internal Revenue
Code.
(c) A "casual employee" as categorized in Employer's personnel
policies, including generally workers who are on call, have no
regular established work week and no fixed days or hours of work.
3.01-3 Every employee eligible to participate under this Plan or
having a vested accrued benefit shall be known as a participant. The Committee
shall furnish each participant with information about the Plan and benefits
under it.
3.02 Service
3.02-1 "Service Year" means:
(a) With respect to Service Years ending prior to January 1,
1999:
(i) For eligibility under 3.01 and Break in Service
under 3.03 - an Employment Year.
(ii) For vesting under 7.01 - an Employment Year.
(iii) For accrual of benefits - an Employment Year.
(b) With respect to Service Years commencing on or after
January 1, 1999:
(i) For eligibility under 3.01 - an Employment Year.
(ii) For Break in Service under 3.03 - a Plan Year.
(iii) For vesting under 7.01 - a Plan Year.
(iv) For accrual of benefits - a Plan Year.
3.02-2 "Employment Year" means the twelve (12) month period starting
on the date the employee first performs an Hour of Service or an anniversary of
that date.
3.02-3 "Year of Service" means the following:
(a) Each Service Year in which an employee has 1,000 or more
Hours of Service is a Year of Service.
(b) The 1,000-hour requirement shall be prorated (at the rate
of 2.7 hours per calendar day) for the part year in which employment
ends from death or retirement.
3.02-4 "Hours" for determining Service means the following:
(a) Hours, whether or not worked, for which the participant is
directly or indirectly paid or entitled to payment.
(b) Regularly scheduled hours during leave of absence under
3.04 or layoff under 3.05.
(c) Hours covered by a back pay award or agreement, regardless
of mitigation of damages, unless already counted.
(d) Hours paid for at or after termination of employment for
unused vacation, holiday, sick leave, disability or jury duty.
3.02-5 The following shall apply to Hours of Service for periods not
worked:
(a) Hours shall be computed and attributed to Service Years in
accordance with Department of Labor Regulations Sections
2530.200b-2(b) and (c).
(b) Regularly scheduled hours during periods of disability
when the individual is receiving payments from Employer or from an
insurance company under a policy maintained by Employer shall be
counted to the extent covered by 6.12.
(c) Hours directly or indirectly paid for under 3.02-4(a) do
not include hours during periods in which an individual receives
payments solely under workers' compensation or unemployment
compensation laws, regardless of the source of payment.
3.03 Break in Service
3.03-1 A Break in Service shall be determined as follows:
(a) Subject to (b), a One-Year Break in Service is a Service
Year in which an employee who has terminated employment has not more
than 500 Hours of Service.
(b) Regardless of Hours of Service, an employee absent because
of maternity or paternity shall not, because of such absence, have a
One-Year Break in Service until the second Service Year following
the Service Year in which the absence begins, subject to (d) below.
(c) Absence because of "maternity or paternity" means an
absence from Service because of one or more of the following:
(1) Pregnancy.
(2) Birth of the employee's child or care following
birth.
(3) Adoption of the employee's child or care following
adoption or placement for adoption.
(d) Paragraph (b) shall not apply unless the employee
furnishes timely information satisfactory to the Committee to
establish both of the following:
(1) That the absence was due to maternity or paternity.
(2) The length of such absence.
3.03-2 Intermittent periods of Service shall be aggregated until the
participant has five consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service. If such a Break
occurs and the employee has a later Year of Service, Service before the Break
will be counted only if:
(a) The employee had a vested interest before the Break.
(b) The number of Years of Service before the Break is greater
than the number of consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service.
3.03-3 If pre-Break Service is not counted under 3.03-2, the person
shall be treated as newly hired. In any event, the first day of Service after
rehire shall start a new Employment Year.
3.04 Leaves of Absence
3.04-1 Leaves of absence during which regularly scheduled Hours of
Service accrue shall mean the following:
(a) Leave of absence authorized by Employer if the employee
returns within the time prescribed by Employer and otherwise
fulfills all conditions imposed by Employer.
(b) Absence because of disability under 6.12.
(c) Periods of military service if the employee returns with
employment rights protected by law.
3.04-2 In authorizing leaves of absence, Employer shall treat all
employees similarly situated alike as much as possible.
3.04-3 If a person on leave fails to meet the conditions of the
leave or fails to return to work when required, employment shall terminate and
accrual of Service shall stop as of the date the leave began unless the failure
is due to death or retirement.
3.05 Layoff
3.05-1 Regularly scheduled Hours of Service shall accrue during
layoff subject to the rules below. An employee shall be considered laid off if
separated from employment because of reduction of Employer's work force.
3.05-2 An employee shall continue as laid off, whether or not
employed elsewhere, until one of the following occurs:
(a) The employee retires, dies or resumes employment at the
request of Employer.
(b) Employer notifies the employee that employment has been
terminated.
(c) The employee elects to terminate employment, or the
employee fails to report for work when recalled.
(d) Twelve months have passed.
3.05-3 Termination of a layoff under 3.05-2(b),(c) or (d) shall be
effective as of the date of the layoff.
3.06 Benefit Years
3.06-1 During a Year of Service, the following Hours of Service
shall be Benefit Hours:
(a) Hours on the payroll of Employer as a qualified employee.
(b) Hours during leave of absence that Employer determines, in
its sole discretion, is primarily for the benefit of Employer.
(c) Hours during military service under 3.04-1(c).
(d) Hours during disability for participants under 6.12-1(b).
3.06-2 For each Year of Service commencing prior to 1998, a
participant shall be credited with up to one Benefit Year calculated by dividing
Benefit Hours in the year by 2,080. For each Year of Service commencing in 1999
and thereafter, a participant shall be credited with one Benefit Year if the
participant completes 1000 or more Benefit Hours. For the 1998 Plan Year, each
participant's benefit service shall be determined pursuant to 3.07-4 below.
3.07 Short and Overlapping Computation Periods
3.07-1 For any short and/or overlapping computation period for
vesting, break in service or benefit accrual purpose which arises due to the
changes in Service Year under 3.02-1(b), the following rules shall apply.
3.07-2 For vesting purposes, a participant who is credited with
1000 Hours of Service in both the Service Year commencing in 1998 and the
overlapping Service Year commencing January 1,1999 shall be credited with two
(2) Years of Service for vesting purposes.
3.07-3 For Break in Service purposes, an employee who has
terminated employment will have a One-Year Break in Service for each of the
Service Years commencing in 1998 and commencing on January 1, 1999 if the
employee has not more than 500 Hours of Service in such Service Years,
respectively.
3.07-4 For benefit accrual purposes, a participant shall be credited
with a pro-rata portion of a Benefit Year for the Service Year commencing in
1998 if the participant completes a pro-rated portion of 1000 Hours of Service
by December 31, 1998. The pro-rated portion of the 1000-hour requirement shall
be determined by multiplying the number of calendar days between the
participant's employment anniversary date and December 31, 1998 times 2.7.
Benefit Years shall be determined based on the Plan Year commencing January 1,
1999.
ARTICLE IVARTICLE IV
Plan AdministrationPlan Administration
4.01 Retirement Committee
4.01-1 The Plan shall be administered by a Retirement Committee of
three or more persons appointed by the Company. The Committee shall have a chair
chosen from among its members and a secretary who need not be a member. Minutes
shall be kept of all proceedings of the Committee. The Committee may act at a
meeting by a majority vote of a quorum present or without a meeting by action
recorded in a memorandum signed by a majority of the members. A majority of
members shall constitute a quorum.
4.01-2 Any member of the Committee may resign on 15 days' notice to
the Company, and the Company may remove any Committee member without showing
cause. All vacancies on the Committee shall be filled as soon as reasonably
practicable. If a vacancy is not so filled, the number of members shall be
reduced by the vacancy, but not below three. Until a new appointment is made,
the remaining members of the Committee may act although less than a quorum.
4.01-3 The Trustee shall be given the names and specimen signatures
of the Committee members, the chair and the secretary. The Trustee shall accept
and rely on the names and signatures until notified of a change.
4.01-4 Documents may be signed for the Committee by the chair, the
secretary or other persons designated by the Committee.
4.02 Committee Powers and Duties
4.02-1 The Committee shall interpret the Plan, shall decide any
questions about the rights of participants and their beneficiaries and in
general shall administer the Plan. Any decision by the Committee within its
authority shall be final and bind all parties. The Committee shall have absolute
discretion to carry out its responsibilities.
4.02-2 The Committee shall be the Plan administrator under federal
laws and regulations applicable to plan administration and shall comply with
such laws and regulations. The secretary of the Committee shall be the agent for
service of process on the Plan at the Company's address.
4.02-3 The Committee shall keep records of all relevant data about
the rights of all persons under the Plan. The Committee shall determine the
time, manner, amount and recipient of payment of pension benefits and medical
benefits and the Service of any employee and instruct the Trustee on
distributions. Any person having an interest under the Plan may consult a member
of the Committee at any reasonable time.
4.02-4 The Committee shall allocate the assets of the Plan among
investment pools created under the trust described in 5.04.
4.02-5 The Committee may delegate all or part of its administrative
duties to one or more agents and may retain advisors to assist it. The Committee
may consult with and rely upon the advice of counsel who may be counsel for the
Company. The Committee shall retain an enrolled actuary and an independent
public accountant for the Plan on behalf of the Plan.
4.03 Claims Procedure
4.03-1 Any person claiming a pension benefit or medical benefit,
requesting an interpretation or ruling under the Plan or requesting information
under the Plan shall present the request in writing to the chair of the
Committee, who shall respond in writing as soon as practicable.
4.03-2 If the claim or request is denied, the written notice of
denial shall state:
(a) The reasons for denial, with specific reference to the
Plan provisions on which the denial is based.
(b) A description of any additional material or information
required and an explanation of why it is necessary.
(c) An explanation of the Plan's claim review procedure.
4.03-3 Any person whose claim or request is denied or who has not
received a response within thirty (30) days may request review by notice given
in writing to the chair of the Committee. The claim or request shall be reviewed
by the Committee, who may, but shall not be required to, have the claimant
appear before them. On review, the claimant may have representation, examine
pertinent documents and submit issues and comments in writing.
4.03-4 The decision on review shall normally be made within sixty
(60) days. If an extension is required for a hearing or other special
circumstances, the claimant shall be so notified and the time limit shall be one
hundred twenty (120) days. The decision shall be in writing and shall state the
reasons and the relevant Plan provisions. All decisions on review shall be final
and bind all parties concerned.
4.04 Authority to Act for the Company or Employer
4.04-1 Except as provided in 4.04-2, all authority of the Company or
any Employer under this Plan shall be exercised by the chief executive officer
of the corporation who may delegate all or any part of such authority.
4.04-2 The power to amend or terminate the Plan or to terminate the
trust may be exercised only by the Board of Directors of the Company or a
designated committee thereof, except as provided in 4.04-3.
4.04-3 The chief executive officer of the Company may amend the Plan
to make technical, administrative or editorial changes on advice of counsel to
comply with applicable law or to simplify or clarify the Plan.
4.04-4 The Board of Directors of the Company or of an Employer shall
have no administrative or investment authority or function. Membership on the
Board shall not make a person a fiduciary with respect to the Plan.
4.05 Expenses.05 Expenses
4.05-1 Members of the Committee shall not be compensated for
services. The Committee shall be reimbursed for all expenses.
4.05-2 The Company may elect to pay any administrative fees or
expenses. Otherwise the expenses and fees shall be paid from the trust fund.
ARTICLE V
Funding
5.01 Funding Policy
The Committee shall establish the funding policy in consultation
with the Plan actuary and be responsible for management of assets in the fund as
provided in 4.02-4. The funding policy shall fix a minimum and maximum
contribution for each year.
5.02 Contributions
5.02-1 Each Employer shall make contributions for its employees to
fund pension benefits and may make contributions for its employees to fund
medical benefits. The amount and time of payment shall be determined in
conformance with the funding policy established by the Committee.
5.02-2 An Employer may suspend or reduce contributions in any year
so long as the minimum requirements of the funding policy are satisfied.
5.02-3 No contribution by employees shall be required or permitted.
5.02-4 Contributions are conditioned upon deductibility under
Section 404 of the Internal Revenue Code. To the extent a deduction is
disallowed, 10.10 shall apply.
5.03 Reports to Committee.03 Reports to Committee
Each Employer shall furnish the Committee any information requested
by it for Plan administration and funding review.
5.04 Trust Fund
5.04-1 Pension benefits and medical benefits under this Plan shall
be funded through the CenturyTel Retirement Trust, established by agreement
between Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and a Trustee. The Trustee shall
receive Employer contributions, hold the fund in accordance with the trust
agreement and distribute the pension benefits and medical benefits under this
Plan as directed by the Committee.
5.04-2 All pension benefits and medical benefits shall be paid
solely from the trust fund to the extent the fund is sufficient. If the fund is
not sufficient, the Trustee shall not be liable for the unfunded pension
benefits and medical benefits.
ARTICLE VIARTICLE VI
Retirement BenefitsRetirement Benefits
6.01 Eligibility; Retirement Dates
6.01-1 A person may retire with benefits under this Plan on
termination of employment on or after early, normal or deferred retirement date
as defined below.
6.01-2 Normal retirement date is age 65.
6.01-3 Early retirement date is any day after age 55 and 5 Years
of Service.
6.01-4 Deferred retirement date is any day after normal retirement
date.
6.02 Normal Retirement Basic Benefit
6.02-1 Except as provided in 6.02-1A and subject to 6.06, the basic
benefit on normal retirement for a person retiring on or after January 1, 1990
is a monthly pension for the life of the participant equal to the greater of:
(a) the sum of:
(i) Benefit Years (BY) as of December 31, 1998, up to a
maximum of thirty (30), times the sum of 1.3 percent of Final
Average Pay (FAP) plus .65 percent of Final Average Pay in
excess of Social Security Covered Compensation
(SSCC) as follows:
BY (up to 30) X ((1.3% X FAP) + (.65 X (FAP-SSCC))), and
(ii) Benefit Years (BY) accrued after December 31, 1998,
up to a maximum of thirty (30), taking into account Benefit
Years under clause (i), above, first in determining the thirty
(30) year maximum, times the sum of 0.50 percent of Final
Average Pay plus 0.50 percent of Final Average Pay in excess
of Social Security Covered Compensation (SSCC) as follows:
BY (up to 30, taking into account benefit years under (i),
above, first) X ((0.50% X FAP) + (0.50% X (FAP - SSCC))).
(b) the greatest early retirement benefit the participant
could have received.
6.02-1A For participants covered by a collective bargaining
agreement which provides for participation in this Plan, and subject to 6.06,
the basic benefit on normal retirement for a person retiring on or after January
1, 1990 is a monthly pension for the life of the participant equal to the
greater of:
(a) Benefit Years (BY), up to a maximum of thirty (30), times
the sum of 1.3 percent of Final Average Pay (FAP) plus .65 percent
of Final Average Pay in excess of Social Security Covered
Compensation (SSCC) as follows:
BY (up to 30) X ((1.3% X FAP + (.65% X (FAP-SSCC))).
(b) the greatest early retirement benefit the participant
could have received.
6.02-1B If a participant either becomes covered by a collective
bargaining agreement which provides for participation in this Plan or ceases to
be so covered, the participant's basic benefit shall be determined by applying
6.02-1 above to the time period during which the participant is not covered by a
collective bargaining agreement which provides for participation in this Plan,
and 6.02-1A above shall apply to the time period during which the participant is
so covered. In the event a participant's basic benefit is determined under both
6.02-1 and 6.02-1A for periods within a single Plan year, the participant shall
not be given duplicate credit under both 6.02-1 and 6.02-1A, but each such
period shall be counted only once in determining the participant's basic
benefit.
6.02-2 "Benefit Year" is defined in 3.06-2.
6.02-3 "Final Average Pay" means the participant's average monthly
compensation in the sixty (60) consecutive calendar months of highest
compensation in the last 120 calendar months of employment with the Company or
an affiliate. Months separated by a period when the participant is not in such
employment shall be treated as consecutive. If a participant has fewer than
sixty (60) months of compensation, all months shall be used.
6.02-4 "Compensation" means the sum of (a) and (b), adjusted under
(c), (d), and (e):
(a) All nondeferred compensation reportable on Form W-2 except
the following:
(1) Overtime or premium pay.
(2) Imputed income from expense reimbursement or fringe
benefits.
(3) Prizes and awards (such as employee recognition
awards and safety awards).
(4) Payment for termination of employment (such as
retirement bonuses, disability benefits and severance pay).
(5) Long-term incentive compensation.
(b) Salary reduction amounts elected by the participant under
a qualified cash or deferred arrangement or a cafeteria plan.
(c) During periods of reduced compensation because of such
causes as illness, disability or leave of absence, compensation
shall be figured at the last regular rate before the start of the
period.
(d) Full-time equivalent pay shall be used for persons working
part time.
(e) The maximum amount of annual compensation taken into
account for any year for a participant shall be $150,000 plus any
cost-of-living adjustment authorized for the year by applicable
regulations. For Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1997, for
purposes of this limit, the following shall apply to any participant
who is a highly compensated employee (as defined in Internal Revenue
Code Section 414(q) and related Treasury Regulations) and is either
a five percent owner or one of the 10 highest paid employees:
(1) The participant's compensation shall be aggregated
with any compensation paid by Employer to the participant's
spouse and to the participant's lineal descendants under age
19.
(2) If the $150,000 limit is exceeded in the aggregate,
pay counted for each aggregated employee shall be reduced pro
rata to stay within the limit.
(f) The reduction in the maximum compensation counted under
(e) to $150,000 shall be made providing a participant with the
greater of the following (formula with extended wear-away):
(1) The participant's benefit accrued under the Plan as
of December 31, 1993 based on compensation up to the maximum
permitted amount of compensation in each earlier year, plus
the benefit accrued on the basis of service after that date
and on compensation at the reduced level.
(2) The participant's benefit accrued on the basis of
service before and after December 31, 1993 and on compensation
at the reduced level.
(g) A bonus earned in one calendar year and paid in the
following calendar year, including any bonus paid in the year
following employment termination, shall be divided by the number of
the participant's completed calendar months of employment with
Employer during the year the bonus was earned and the resulting
amount treated as received in each of those months.
(h) A lump sum payment in lieu of an increase in base salary
shall not be treated as a bonus and shall be counted as salary
received one-twelfth in each succeeding calendar month of
employment.
6.02-5 "Social Security Covered Compensation" means the covered
compensation amount for a person with the participant's Social Security
retirement age, as determined in accordance with applicable regulations. The
Committee may, in its discretion, use a table of Social Security Covered
Compensation published by the Internal Revenue Service with rounded amounts.
6.02-6 If an employee becomes entitled to workers' compensation
benefits for disability, the normal retirement basic benefit shall be reduced as
follows:
(a) Each monthly benefit shall be reduced by the amount of any
workers' compensation installment payment for that month.
(b) The total benefit shall be reduced actuarially by the
portion of any lump sum workers' compensation award that is
actuarially attributable to years after normal retirement date.
6.03 Early Retirement
6.03-1 On early retirement, the basic benefit shall be the normal
retirement benefit under 6.02-1 reduced as follows. The amount of basic benefit
attributable to the appropriate percentage of Final Average Pay determined under
Section 6.02-1 or 6.02-1A (the Base Benefit) and the amount attributable to the
appropriate percentage of Final Average Pay in excess of Social Security Covered
Compensation determined under Section 6.02-1 or 6.02-1A (the Excess Benefit)
shall be adjusted to the Benefit Starting Date by the percentages prescribed in
the following table, interpolating between ages through the last full month.
Age at Benefit Base Benefit Excess Benefit
Starting Date Percentage Percentage
64 100% 92%
63 100% 84%
62 100% 76%
61 95% 72%
60 90% 68%
59 84% 64%
58 78% 60%
57 72% 56%
56 66% 52%
55 60% 48%
6.03-2 Early retirement benefits shall be paid as follows:
(a) Benefits shall start as of the first of the month
after age 65 unless the participant elects to start benefits
earlier under (b).
(b) The participant may elect to start benefits as of the
first of any month after early retirement by applying for benefits
under 6.07.
(c) If the participant dies before the Benefit Starting Date
under (a) or (b), benefits shall be limited to the spouse's benefit
under 6.11.
6.04 Deferred Retirement Basic Benefit
6.04-1 On deferred retirement, the basic benefit shall be that for
normal retirement based on Benefit Years and Final Average Pay at actual
retirement.
6.04-2 A participant who works past the month in which normal
retirement benefits would have begun shall be notified in writing during that
month that benefits will not be started, except for payments under 6.10-1(a).
The notification shall contain the information required by applicable law and
regulations on suspension of benefits.
6.04-3 A participant who works past normal retirement date shall be
paid a benefit for any month in which the participant has fewer than forty (40)
paid Hours of Service under 3.02-4(a) and does not otherwise receive a benefit
under this Plan. The benefit shall be the amount of the monthly normal
retirement basic benefit based on Service and pay to normal retirement date.
6.04-4 If benefits start under 6.10-1(a) to a participant during
employment the following shall apply:
(a) The starting date under 6.10-1(a) shall be the Benefit
Starting Date under 6.08-2.
(b) All provisions with respect to the time, form and amount
of benefit shall apply as of the Benefit Starting Date. The form of
benefit determined as of that date shall be final and shall not be
reopened at later termination of employment. The amount of benefit
for service to the Benefit Starting Date shall not be changed by
later changes in Final Average Pay.
(c) Additional accruals shall be calculated at each calendar
year-end after the Benefit Starting Date as follows:
(1) The additional benefit shall be based on additional
service and on Final Average Pay as of the year-end.
(2) Added benefits shall be in the form determined under
(b) above.
(3) In the year in which the employee terminates
employment the date of termination shall be substituted for
the year-end.
(d) The preretirement death benefit for a spouse under 6.11
will not apply if the participant dies after the Benefit Starting
Date.
6.05 Cost-of-Living Adjustment
6.05-1 The amount currently payable to each participant who has no
Hours of Service after December 31, 1987, or to the spouse or other beneficiary
of such a participant, shall be adjusted by the amount under 6.05-2 as follows:
(a) The adjustment shall be made each January 1 beginning with
the first January 1 that is at least twelve (12) months after the
start of benefits.
(b) The adjustment shall be made to the benefit actually being
paid after conversion to an optional form.
6.05-2 The adjustment under 6.05-1 shall be the lesser of:
(a) The percentage increase in the U. S. Consumer
Price Index (all items) during the twelve (12) months
ending with the September index preceding the adjustment
date; and
(b) Two (2) percent.
6.05-3 If the Consumer Price Index decreases during the period
described in 6.05-2(a), no downward adjustment in retirement benefits shall be
made. Any such decrease shall offset any subsequent increases.
6.05-4 The benefit for a participant who has Hours of Service after
December 31, 1987 shall not be adjusted as provided above. The amount of the
benefit shall be at least as much as the actuarial equivalent of the
participant's accrued benefit under the Prior Plan as of December 31, 1987,
including the value of potential cost-of-living adjustments.
6.06 Limit on Benefits
6.06-1 Benefits shall be limited in accordance with the following
rules as provided in Internal Revenue Code Section 415 and related regulations.
The following provisions shall be applied in a manner consistent with the Code
and regulations, which are incorporated by this reference.
6.06-2 The actuarially equivalent straight life annuity benefit on
normal, early or deferred retirement expressed as an annual benefit shall be not
more than either of the following:
(a) $90,000 plus for any year any cost-of-living adjustment
authorized by applicable regulations for that year.
(b) 100 percent of high three-year average compensation.
6.06-3 "High three-year average compensation" shall be the average
annual W-2 compensation during the three consecutive calendar years of highest
compensation from an Employer.
6.06-4 The limitations in 6.06-2 shall be adjusted as
follows:
(a) For an employee who has less than ten (10) years of
participation, the limitation shall be the amount in 6.06-2(a)
multiplied by the participant's years of participation and divided
by ten.
(b) For an employee participating before January 1, 1983 or
January 1, 1987, the limitation in 6.06-2(a) shall not be lower than
the accrued benefit under the Plan on December 31, 1982 or December
31, 1986, respectively.
(c) If the Benefit Starting Date is before the Social Security
retirement age, the limit in 6.06-2(a) shall be actuarially reduced.
The reduction shall be 5/9 of 1 percent for each of the first thirty
six (36) months before Social Security retirement age and 5/12 of 1
percent for each further month, if any, above age 62. Below age 62
the reduction shall be to an actuarial equivalent of the amount at
age 62 using an interest assumption of the lesser of the following:
(1) Five(5) percent per annum.
(2) A percentage imputed from the tables in 6.03-1 by
dividing the participant's early retirement basic benefit by
the normal retirement benefit, subtracting the result from one
hundred (100) percent and dividing the remainder by the number
of years between the Benefit Starting Date and age 65.
(d) If a benefit starts after the Social Security retirement
age, the limit in 6.06-2(a) shall be actuarially increased in a
manner prescribed by the Treasury Department.
6.06-5 If the benefit is paid in the form of a contingent annuity
under 6.09-3 with payments continued to the participant's spouse, the
limitations in 6.06-2 shall be applied to the participant's actual benefit
rather than the actuarially equivalent straight life annuity.
6.06-6 If the Employer maintains or has maintained another tax
qualified defined benefit pension plan at any time, the benefits shall be
combined for purposes of applying the above limitations.
6.06-7 If the Employer maintains or has maintained one or more tax
qualified defined contribution pension plans at any time, the following shall
apply:
(a) The defined contribution fraction under all such plans
combined with the defined benefit fraction under this Plan and all
other defined benefit plans maintained by Employer shall not for any
individual exceed 1.0.
(b) The defined benefit fraction numerator shall be the
participant's projected annual normal retirement benefit. The
denominator shall be the maximum legally allowed benefit, adjusted
under (d).
(c) The defined contribution fraction numerator shall be the
sum of all annual additions since the Plan's inception. The
denominator shall be the sum of the maximum legally allowed annual
additions for all years of the participant's employment with
Employer, adjusted under (d).
(d) The denominators under (b) and (c) shall be the smaller of
the maximum percentage limit figure times 1.4 or the maximum dollar
limit figure times 1.25.
6.06-8 If benefits or contributions under another pension plan
maintained by the Employer, when combined with the benefits under this Plan,
exceed the above limitations, the benefits under this Plan shall be reduced to
the extent of the excess, and the benefits or contributions under the other plan
shall stand.
6.06-9 For purposes of 6.06-7, contributions for medical benefits
separately accounted for on behalf of a key employee pursuant to 8.03-2 shall be
treated as an annual addition to a defined contribution plan. Section
415(c)(1)(B) of the Internal Revenue Code, limiting annual additions to
twenty-five (25) percent of the participant's compensation, shall not apply to
any amount so treated.
6.06-10 Cost-of-living adjustments to the dollar amount in 6.06-2(a)
shall be applied to the accrued benefit of a participant who has retired or
otherwise terminated from Service. Any resulting change to a benefit in pay
status shall be made as of the payment for January of the year to which the
adjustment applies.
6.07 Application for Benefits
6.07-1 A participant, spouse or beneficiary eligible for benefits
must apply in writing under 4.03 on a form prescribed by the Committee. The
Committee may start benefits in a proper case without an application being
filed.
6.07-2 Application shall be made within the following time periods:
(a) No more than ninety (90)days before the Benefit Starting
Date.
(b) No less than thirty (30) days before the Benefit Starting
Date, unless the Committee waives the time requirement.
6.07-3 Between thirty (30) and ninety (90) days before the Benefit
Starting Date, the Committee shall give the participant a written explanation of
the following:
(a) The optional forms of benefit available under the Plan,
including the relative value of each form.
(b) The terms and conditions of the survivor annuity benefit
in 6.09-3(b), the participant's right to elect not to receive such a
benefit, and the following with respect to each election:
(1) Its financial effect.
(2) The requirement of spouse consent.
(3) The participant's right to revoke.
(c) The right to defer payment until normal retirement age, if
the participant is under that age.
6.07-4 If a participant first qualifies under 6.07-3 by marrying
after the above requirements would first have been applicable, the requirements
shall be met as soon as practicable after the participant so qualifies.
6.08 Time of Payment
6.08-1 Benefits shall start with the first month beginning after
normal retirement date or on an earlier payment date under 6.03-2(b) after early
retirement, whichever applies. Payments shall be made for each benefit month at
the end of that month.
6.08-2 The "Benefit Starting Date" means the first day of the first
benefit month. If payments are delayed under 6.08-3, the Benefit Starting Date
shall not change.
6.08-3 Subject to 6.10-1(a), payment of benefits may be delayed
beyond the Benefit Starting Date because of a delay in application or if the
amount is not known. In that event, the following shall apply:
(a) Payment shall be made or commence as soon as practicable
after the Benefit Starting Date, and in any event within sixty (60)
days after application is made or the amount becomes known.
(b) Back installments from the Benefit Starting Date shall be
paid in a lump sum with the first payment or amortized over the
benefit period as directed by the Committee.
6.09 Form of Retirement Benefit.09 Form of Retirement Benefit
6.09-1 The basic benefit on normal, early or deferred retirement is
based on equal payments for each month from the Benefit Starting Date through
the month in which the participant dies.
6.09-2 A participant shall elect the actual form of distribution
from those in 6.09-3 as follows:
(a) Regardless of form, the value of the benefit shall be the
actuarial equivalent of the basic benefit.
(b) The election shall be made and any joint or contingent
annuitant named in the application under 6.07.
(c) If the contingent annuitant dies before the participant's
Benefit Starting Date after retirement or termination of employment,
the election shall be void.
(d) If a participant is married at the Benefit Starting Date
and no valid election is in effect, the benefit shall be paid in the
form stated in 6.09-3(b) with the spouse as contingent annuitant.
(e) An election by a married participant of a form other than
a contingent annuity under 6.09-3(b) with the participant's spouse
shall not be effective unless either of the following applies:
(1) The spouse executes, within ninety (90) days before
the Benefit Starting Date, a consent in writing that
acknowledges the particular form of benefit, the name of any
contingent annuitant or other non-spouse death beneficiary and
the effect of the designation and is witnessed by a notary
public or Plan representative.
(2) The consent cannot be obtained because the spouse
cannot be located or because of other circumstances provided
by applicable regulations.
(f) A determination in good faith by the Committee that (e)
has been complied with shall be final and binding if the Committee
has exercised proper fiduciary care in making the determination.
(g) If (d) does not apply, the form in the absence of an
election shall be that stated in 6.09-3(a).
(h) The Committee shall pay the actuarial equivalent of the
participant's benefit in a lump sum if the distributable amount has
never been over $3,500 (for Plan Years beginning after 1998, this
amount shall be $5,000).
6.09-3 Subject to 6.10, the forms of benefit shall be the
following:
(a) Straight life annuity.
(b) Life annuity with half payments continued to a contingent
annuitant.
(c) Life annuity with full payments continued to a contingent
annuitant.
(d) On early retirement, an annuity under which the monthly
payments before first eligibility for Social Security retirement
benefits (assumed to be age 62 and 1/2) are increased by a temporary
supplement and the remaining payments are reduced so as to provide
approximately equal payments throughout when combined with Social
Security.
(e) Annuity for the life of the participant, continuing to a
designated beneficiary for the remainder of the first 120 monthly
payments in the event the participant dies before 120 payments have
been made.
6.09-4 The Committee shall direct the Trustee to pay the benefit
directly from the trust fund or to purchase a single premium nontransferable
annuity in a form and from an insurance company approved by the Committee.
6.09-5 An eligible recipient of an eligible rollover distribution
under 6.09-2(h) or 7.03 may elect before the benefit is paid to have the benefit
distributed by a direct rollover into an eligible retirement plan or IRA and the
following shall apply:
(a) The participant must identify the eligible retirement plan
or IRA and the fund holder to whom the direct rollover shall be
paid.
(b) "Eligible retirement plan" is defined in Section
402(c)(8)(B) of the Internal Revenue Code.
(c) "Eligible rollover distribution" is defined in Section
402(c)(4) of the Internal Revenue Code.
(d) "Eligible recipient" means the participant, the spouse of
a deceased participant or a spouse or former spouse who is an
alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order.
6.10 Limits on Time and Form of Payout
6.10-1 Payment of benefits to a participant shall comply with the
following restrictions:
(a) Payment shall begin no later than the April 1 following
the calendar year in which the participant attains age 70 1/2.
(b) Payment shall be made over a period no longer than the
lives or joint life expectancy of the participant and any designated
beneficiary.
(c) If the designated beneficiary is not the spouse and is
more than ten years younger than the participant, the benefit form
shall be limited so that the benefit payable after death is
incidental to the Plan's primary purpose of providing retirement
benefits.
6.10-2 Payment of preretirement death benefits shall comply with the
following restrictions:
(a) Payment may be made over a period no longer than the
spouse's life or life expectancy.
(b) Payment may be deferred up to the date the participant
would have attained age 70 1/2.
(c) If the beneficiary is not a natural person, the entire
benefit shall be paid within five years after death.
6.10-3 The restrictions of 6.10-1 and 6.10-2 shall be complied with
by distributions in accordance with Treasury Regulations Section 1.401(a)(9)-1
and Section 1.401(a)(9)-2, which shall override any distribution options in the
Plan inconsistent with Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(9).
6.10-4 Payments to restricted employees shall be limited as follows:
(a) Benefit payments to a restricted employee shall not exceed
the periodic amounts payable under a single life annuity that is
actuarially equivalent to the employee's entire benefit.
(b) The limit in (a) shall not apply if either of the
following is true:
(1) Immediately after a payment of a benefit to the
restricted employee Plan assets equal at least 110 percent of
current liabilities.
(2) The value of the benefits payable to the restricted
employee is less than one percent of current liabilities.
(c) "Benefits" means the accrued benefit and other benefits to
which the restricted employee is entitled under the Plan, other than
a social security supplement.
(d) "Restricted employee" means a current or former highly
compensated employee with benefits under the Plan whose annual
compensation in the current or any prior plan year is one of the
twenty five (25) highest of such employees.
(e) Benefits may be paid to a restricted employee in excess of
the limit in (a) if the employee agrees to repay the excess upon
termination of the Plan and provides security for such repayment in
accordance with rulings of the Internal Revenue Service.
6.11 Death Benefit for Spouse
6.11-1 A benefit shall be payable to a surviving spouse on the death
of a participant if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) The death occurs before the Benefit Starting Date.
(b) The participant is legally married to the surviving spouse
at death and was for the preceding year.
(c) The participant has five or more Years of Service.
6.11-2 The spouse's benefit shall be paid as follows:
(a) The benefit shall be the amount payable to the spouse as
contingent annuitant under 6.09-3(b) determined as though the
participant had retired on the first day of the month in which death
occurs if at death the participant is:
(1) Age 55 or over; or
(2) Actively employed by Employer and has thirty (30) or
more Years of Service.
(b) On the death of a participant with thirty (30) or more
Years of Service before age 55, the participant shall be assumed to
be age 55 in determining the amount payable under (a).
(c) The benefit in the case of a participant not covered by
(a) shall be the amount payable to the spouse as contingent
annuitant under 6.09-3(b) determined as though the participant had
separated from service on the date of death, if not already
separated, and had survived until retirement at age 55.
(d) A benefit determined under (a) shall start on the first
day of the month after death, and a benefit determined under (c)
shall start on the first day of the month after the later of the
following:
(1) The date of death.
(2) The date the participant would have reached age 55.
(e) If the participant had elected a retirement benefit in the
contingent annuity form described in 6.09-3(c) within the ninety
(90) days before the participant's Benefit Starting Date and dies
with such election in effect, the amounts under (a) or (c) shall be
based on that form.
6.11-3 The spouse may elect an actuarially equivalent benefit
starting at a later date. Such an election must comply with the restrictions in
6.10-2.
6.11-4 The Committee shall pay the actuarial equivalent of the
spouse's death benefit in a lump sum if either of the following applies:
(a) The distributable amount is not over $3,500 (for Plan
Years beginning after 1998, this amount shall be $5,000).
(b) The amount is not over $10,000 at the date of payment and
the spouse requests a lump sum.
6.11-5 No benefit shall be payable if a participant dies before
retirement unless 6.11-1 applies.
6.12 Disability
6.12-1 A participant who becomes disabled while employed shall
continue to accrue Service as follows:
(a) A participant who meets the criteria of 6.12-2(a) shall be
on leave of absence under 3.04 and accrue Hours of Service.
(b) A participant who has ten (10) or more Years of Service
when disability arises and meets the criteria of both 6.12-2(a) and
(b) shall also accrue Benefit Hours.
(c) Accrual of Service shall continue under (a) and (b) as
long as the relevant criteria for disability are met.
(d) If the participant fails to return promptly after recovery
and within any time limit fixed by Employer, unless the failure is
due to death or retirement, accrual of Service shall stop as of the
later of the following:
(1) The date the leave of absence for disability began.
(2) The date when 501 Hours have been counted since the
participant last worked.
6.12-2 The Committee shall determine the existence of disability
under the criteria for both of the following:
(a) Long-term disability insurance maintained by Employer.
(b) Social Security disability benefits.
6.12-3 A disabled participant shall be retired at normal retirement
date and may retire at early retirement date if eligible. Benefits shall be
determined on the basis of Benefit Years and Final Average Pay at retirement and
Social Security Covered Compensation at disability.
6.12-4 If the participant notifies the Committee in writing that
benefits after disability would reduce any other disability benefit, the
Committee shall defer payments until the other benefit stops, subject to 6.10-1.
6.13 Reemployment After Retirement
6.13-1 Benefit payments to a retired participant shall be withheld
when the participant has been rehired by Employer as a qualified employee and is
expected to be reemployed for more that six (6) months.
6.13-2 A participant whose benefits have been withheld under 6.13-1
shall receive benefits on a later retirement determined as follows:
(a) The participant shall apply for benefits under 6.07 and
select a form of benefit under 6.09 for the benefits attributable to
Service after rehire. The benefits attributable to Service before
rehire shall be in the form that applied during the prior period of
retirement.
(b) On later retirement, the participant's benefit shall be
calculated based on all Service and then reduced by the actuarial
value of benefits previously received. The monthly benefit shall not
be less than that paid on the earlier retirement.
(c) If a participant who retired and received enhanced
benefits under a voluntary retirement incentive program is rehired,
the benefit calculated under (b) shall be reduced by the enhanced
benefits previously received and shall not be less than the amount
payable on the earlier retirement under the incentive program. If
the incentive program includes a Social Security bridge benefit,
that benefit shall resume at later retirement for any period
remaining before earliest Social Security retirement age.
6.13-3 A participant whose benefits are first withheld after normal
retirement date shall receive the notification required by 6.04-2.
6.13-4 A retired participant who is rehired and does not have
benefit payments withheld under 6.13-1 shall not accrue any additional benefit
for the period of rehire.
ARTICLE VIIARTICLE VII
Benefits After Termination of EmploymentBenefits After Termination of Employment
7.01 Vesting of Benefits
7.01-1 A participant who terminates employment before retirement or
death and does not later accrue additional Service shall be entitled only to
vested accrued benefits at the time of termination.
7.01-2 A participant shall be vested in accrued benefits based on
Years of Service as follows:
Years of Service Percent Vested
Less than 5 0
5 or more 100%
7.02 Accrued Benefit; Payment.02 Accrued Benefit; Payment
7.02-1 A participant's accrued benefit on termination of employment
shall be the normal retirement basic benefit under 6.02 based on Service, Final
Average Pay and Social Security Covered Compensation at termination.
7.02-2 Benefits for a vested terminated participant normally shall
start on the first day of the month after normal retirement age. A terminated
participant may elect to start receiving a benefit on the first day of any month
after age 55. The benefit payable on such an early start shall be the accrued
benefit, reduced to the Benefit Starting Date under the following table,
interpolating between ages through the last full month.
Age at Benefit Benefit
Starting Date Percentage
64 88%
63 78%
62 68%
61 61%
60 54%
59 48%
58 43%
57 38%
56 34%
55 30%
7.02-3 A vested terminated participant entitled to benefits must
apply for benefits and elect a distribution option not more than ninety (90)
days nor less than thirty (30) days before benefits are to start. If application
is filed after normal retirement date, back payments shall be paid in a lump sum
with the first payment or amortized over the benefit period as directed by the
Committee.
7.03 Cash Settlement
7.03-1 The Committee shall pay a participant whose employment with
the Company and its affiliates has terminated the actuarial value of the vested,
accrued benefit in cash before the Benefit Starting Date, if either of the
following applies:
(a) The distributable amount is not over $3,500 (for Plan
Years beginning after 1998, this amount shall be $5,000).
(b) The amount is not over $10,000 at the date of payment, the
participant requests a cash settlement and 6.09-2(e) and (f) are
satisfied with respect to the participant's spouse, if any.
7.03-2 If the actuarial value of the vested, accrued benefit is over
$3,500 (for Plan Years beginning after 1998, this amount shall be $5,000), but
not over $10,000, the participant may elect to receive in lieu of the cash
settlement:
(a) A straight life annuity if the participant is unmarried.
(b) A life annuity with half payments continued to the spouse
if the participant is married.
7.03-3 If a cash settlement is made under 7.03-1 or an annuity is
elected under 7.03-2, Benefit Years before the settlement shall be disregarded
for determining the participant's benefit at a later time.
7.04 Forfeiture of Nonvested Retirement Benefits
7.04-1 A participant whose employment terminates before being vested
under 7.01 and who does not become vested because of later Service shall forfeit
all accrued benefits. A nonvested, terminated participant shall be considered to
have received a full distribution of the zero vested balance when employment
terminates. The forfeiture shall occur as of the earlier of the following:
(a) The date the participant receives or is considered to have
received a cash settlement under 7.03.
(b) The date the participant completes five consecutive
One-Year Breaks in Service.
7.04-2 Forfeiture of benefits shall be taken into consideration in
establishing the funding policy under 5.01.
7.04-3 A participant whose benefit has been forfeited under 7.04-1
shall have the forfeited benefit restored only when one of the following occurs:
(a) The participant completes a Year of Service after the
forfeiture and before having five consecutive One-Year Breaks in
Service.
(b) The participant returns to employment with Employer or an
affiliate before having a One-Year Break in Service.
ARTICLE VIII
Medical BenefitsMedical Benefits
8.01 Eligibility
8.01-1 Medical benefits under this Article shall be provided to a
participant, or the dependents of a participant, who:
(a) Has terminated employment, commenced receiving pension
benefits on early, normal or deferred retirement, and qualifies for
post-retirement medical benefits under the Pacific Telecom, Inc.
Welfare Benefits Plan or successor thereto.
(b) Retires and commences benefits on or after January 1,
1998.
(c) Is not covered by a collective bargaining agreement at
retirement.
(d) Has never been a "key employee" as defined in Section
416(i) of the Internal Revenue Code.
8.01-2 The term "benefits" used alone in this Plan shall refer to
pension benefits under Article VI and Article VII and not to medical benefits
provided under this Article.
8.02 Medical Benefits
8.02-1 The medical benefits provided under this Plan to participants
eligible under 8.01 shall be all medical benefits, as defined in Internal
Revenue Code Section 213(d)(1), provided to such participants after retirement
under the Pacific Telecom, Inc. Welfare Benefits Plan or successor thereto. The
provisions of such Welfare Benefits Plan can limit medical benefits to retired
participants who meet further eligibility requirements. Any medical benefits to
which retired participants are entitled under such Welfare Benefits Plan that
are not provided under this Plan due to insufficiency of funding or otherwise,
shall be paid from a welfare benefits trust established by the Company for that
purpose or from Employer's general assets.
8.02-2 The document evidencing the Pacific Telecom, Inc. Welfare
Benefits Plan or successor thereto, including all of the separate documents
incorporated into it, is incorporated by reference as part of this Plan. This
incorporation by reference shall include any amendments made from time to time
to the Pacific Telecom, Inc. Welfare Benefits Plan and any successor plan.
8.03 Separate Medical Benefits Account
<PAGE>
8.03-1 Subject to 8.04, each Employer may make contributions to fund
the medical benefits provided in 8.02 for its employees. A separate account
shall be maintained for all such contributions, and earnings on them. Medical
benefits for participants shall be paid only from such account.
8.03-2 Investment earnings and losses of the trust fund shall be
allocated to the accounts in 8.03-1 in proportion to the investment earnings and
losses of the entire trust.
8.04 Limitation on Contributions
The aggregate actual contributions (measured from January 1, 1989)
to fund medical benefits shall not exceed twenty five (25) percent of the total
actual contributions (measured from January 1, 1989) to the Plan, disregarding
in such total any contributions to fund past service credits.
8.05 Satisfaction of Liabilities
8.05-1 Unless all obligations under 8.02 have been satisfied, no
part of the medical benefits account shall be used for any purpose other than
payment of either of the following:
(a) Medical benefits.
(b) Necessary or appropriate expenses attributable to the
administration of the medical benefits account.
8.05-2 Following satisfaction of the obligations under 8.02, any
amounts remaining in the medical benefits account shall be returned to the
Employers on an equitable basis as determined by the Committee.
8.06 Forfeiture of Benefits
If a person's interest in the medical benefits account is forfeited
prior to termination of the Plan, the amount forfeited shall be applied as soon
as possible to reduce Employer's contributions to fund medical benefits.
ARTICLE IX
Amendment and TerminationAmendment and Termination
9.01 Amendment
9.01-1 The Company may amend this Plan at any time except that no
amendment shall revest any of the trust fund in an Employer or otherwise modify
the Plan so that it would not be for the exclusive benefit of the eligible
employees.
9.01-2 Amendments may be made retroactively to the extent
permitted by applicable law and regulations.
9.02 Termination
9.02-1 The Company may wholly or partly terminate the Plan at any
time. In that event, the rights of all affected participants to the benefits
then accrued and funded shall fully vest and be nonforfeitable. The Company
shall promptly file notice of termination with the Pension Benefit Guaranty
Corporation and may request a ruling from the Internal Revenue Service on the
effect of termination on the qualification of the trust.
9.02-2 Upon termination, the Company may continue the Plan to pay
pension benefits and medical benefits as they mature or liquidate and distribute
the trust fund. In any event, the available funds shall be allocated by the
Committee as provided below. The time and method of payment shall be determined
by the Committee. Pension benefits and medical benefits already distributed in
cash or by purchase and delivery of an annuity contract shall not be affected.
9.02-3 On Plan termination the benefit of any current or former
highly compensated employee shall be limited to a benefit that is non-
discriminatory under Section 401(a)(4) of the Internal Revenue Code.
9.03 Treatment of Employers
9.03-1 All employees of all Employers, including the Company, shall
be treated as though employed by one Employer for purposes of determining total
or partial termination. For this purpose, this Plan shall be treated as one plan
and not as a collection of separate plans of the Employers. If some or all of
the employees of an Employer terminate employment, this shall be viewed in the
context of the whole Plan to determine whether there has been a partial
termination or curtailment and whether accelerated vesting is required.
9.03-2 An Employer may be excluded from the Plan with respect to its
employees at any time by the Company. Such exclusion shall not constitute a
termination or partial termination of the Plan. Employees of the excluded
affiliate shall be treated as having terminated employment if the affiliate
ceases to maintain its affiliated status. Unless the Internal Revenue Service
rules that the exclusion constitutes a partial termination of the Plan, the
rights of employees of the excluded affiliate shall not become fully vested and
nonforfeitable as a result of the exclusion. If the excluded affiliate retains
its affiliated status with the Company, its employees shall continue to accrue
Service for the purposes of vesting and eligibility, but shall not accrue
Benefit Years after the effective date of the exclusion.
9.04 Allocation of Assets on Termination
9.04-1 In the event of Plan termination, the benefit of any current
or former highly compensated employee shall be limited to a benefit that is
nondiscriminatory under Internal Revenue Code Section 401(a)(4).
9.04-2 Amounts allocated to the medical benefits accounts shall be
used to pay medical benefits in 8.02. If all obligations to pay medical benefits
are satisfied, amounts remaining in the medical benefits accounts shall be
returned to Employers under 8.05-2. All amounts in the trust fund other than
amounts in the medical benefits accounts shall be allocated in the order set out
below based on actuarial valuation of accrued retirement benefits as of the date
of termination using nondiscriminatory formulas established by the Committee.
All benefits for each group shall be paid or provided for before any benefits
are paid for any members of the group having the next lower priority. If the
funds are insufficient to pay all of the benefits for any group, the amount
available shall be allocated among the members of the group in proportion to
their interests.
9.04-3 The order of priority determined as of the day before
termination shall be as follows:
(a) Benefits that had been in pay status for three years or
more or could have been in pay status for three years if the
participant had retired on the earliest opportunity and received the
normal form of benefit. Allocation shall be based on the lowest
benefit provided by Plan provisions in effect within the last five
years.
(b) Other benefits guaranteed under the Employee Retirement
Income Security Act of 1974, disregarding Sections 4022(b)(5) and
(6), including benefits not covered by (a) because of the exclusion
of benefit increases within five years.
(c) All other vested accrued benefits not covered by (b).
(d) All other accrued benefits.
9.05 Merger
If this Plan is merged or consolidated with or the assets or
liabilities are transferred to any other plan or trust, the benefit that each
participant would receive if the Plan terminated just afterwards shall be at
least as much as if it terminated just before.
ARTICLE X
General Provisions
10.01 Information for Committee
10.01-1 The Committee may accept as correct and rely on any
information furnished by the Company or an Employer. The Committee may not
demand an audit, investigation or disclosure of the records of the Company or
any Employer.
10.01-2 The Committee may require satisfactory proof of data from a
participant, spouse, joint or contingent annuitant or beneficiary. The Committee
may adjust any retirement benefit if an error in relevant data is discovered.
10.02 Indemnity and Bonding
10.02-1 The Company shall indemnify and defend any Plan fiduciary
who is an officer, director or employee of an Employer from any claim or
liability that arises from any action or inaction in connection with the Plan,
subject to the following rules:
(a) Coverage shall be limited to actions taken in good faith
that the fiduciary reasonably believed were not opposed to the best
interests of the Plan.
(b) Negligence by the fiduciary shall be covered to the
fullest extent permitted by law.
(c) Coverage shall be reduced to the extent of any insurance
coverage.
10.02-2 Plan fiduciaries shall be bonded to the extent required by
applicable law for the protection of Plan assets.
10.03 Applicable Law
This Plan shall be construed according to the laws of Louisiana
except as preempted by federal law.
10.04 Plan Binding on All Parties
This Plan shall be binding upon the heirs, personal representatives,
successors and assigns of all present and future parties.
10.05 Not Contract of Employment
This Plan shall not be a contract of employment between any Employer
and any employee, and no employee may object to amendment or termination of the
Plan. The Plan shall not prevent an Employer from discharging any employee at
any time.
10.06 Notices
Except as otherwise required or permitted under other provisions of
this Plan or under applicable law, any notice under this Plan shall be in
writing and shall be effective when actually delivered or, if mailed, when
deposited postpaid as first-class mail. Mail shall be directed to the address
stated in this Plan for the Company or in the statement of adoption of another
Employer, or to such other address as a party may specify by notice to the other
parties. Notices shall be sent to the Committee at the Company's address.
10.07 Benefits Not Assignable; Qualified Domestic Relations Order
10.07-1 This Plan is for the personal protection of the
participants. No vested or unvested interest of any participant or beneficiary
may be assigned, seized by legal process, transferred or subjected to the claims
of creditors in any way, except as provided in 10.07-2.
10.07-2 Benefits may be paid in accordance with a qualified
domestic relations order under procedures established by the Committee pursuant
to Section 414(p) of the Internal Revenue Code.
10.08 Designation of Beneficiary
10.08-1 Each participant shall on request file with the Committee a
designation of beneficiaries and may change it from time to time. The designated
beneficiaries or other recipient described below shall receive any residual
benefit after death of a participant if no other person is entitled to it as a
contingent annuitant or spouse or in any other capacity.
10.08-2 If a beneficiary dies after the death of a participant but
before distribution to the beneficiary, the benefit to which the beneficiary was
entitled shall be paid to the estate of the deceased beneficiary.
10.08-3 If no beneficiary has been named or no named beneficiary is
living when the participant dies, the benefit shall be paid in the following
order of priority:
(a) The participant's surviving spouse.
(b) The participant's surviving children in equal shares.
(c) The participant's estate.
10.09 Actuarial Equivalency
10.09-1 Actuarial equivalency and other actuarial valuations and
adjustments shall be determined by the enrolled actuary retained for the Plan
based on the following:
(a) For determinations of cash amounts, interest shall be the
annual rate of interest on 30-year Treasury Securities for the
September preceding the year in which the cash amount is paid and
mortality shall be as provided in the mortality table prescribed by
the Commissioner of Internal Revenue under Section 417(e)(3)(A)(ii)
(I) of the Internal Revenue Code.
(b) If (a) does not apply, interest shall be eight (8) percent
per annum and mortality shall be as provided in the UP-1984
Mortality Table.
(c) For valuing benefits accrued on or before December 31,
1987, the Consumer Price Index shall be assumed to increase at least
two (2) percent per annum.
10.09-2 If the actuarial factors for determining equivalent benefits
are changed by Plan amendment, the benefit actually paid in any form shall not
be less than the amount determined for the same form by applying the prior
factors to the participant's accrued benefit as of the date the change is
adopted or is effective, whichever is later.
10.10 Nonreversion of Assets
10.10-1 Subject to the following paragraphs, no part of the
contributions or the principal or income of this Plan shall be paid to or
revested in an Employer or to be used other than for the exclusive benefit of
the participants and their beneficiaries.
10.10-2 A contribution may be returned to Employer to the extent
that:
(a) The contribution was made by mistake of fact.
(b) A deduction for the contribution under 5.02-4 is
disallowed.
10.10-3 Return of contributions under 10.10-2(a) and (b) shall be
subject to the following:
(a) Any return must occur within one year of the mistaken
payment or disallowance of the deduction.
(b) The returnable amount shall be reduced by any losses
attributable to the contribution.
10.10-4 If after all fixed and contingent liabilities or obligations
to persons entitled to benefits under the Plan shall have been paid or provided
for in full any Plan assets remain because of erroneous actuarial computation,
such assets shall revert to the Employers. Such a reversion shall not take place
sooner than the earliest date as of which a reversion of assets would be
permitted by law.
10.11 Enhanced Early Retirement Programs
The 1991 Enhanced Early Retirement Program for Cencom Employees,
attached hereto as Appendix A, the 1991 Enhanced Early Retirement Program for
Alascom Employees, attached hereto as Appendix B, and the 1992 Enhanced Early
Retirement Program, attached hereto as Appendix C, are incorporated in this Plan
and made a part hereof.
ARTICLE XI
Special Top-Heavy Plan Rules
11.01 Application of Rules
If the Plan becomes top-heavy, the rules in this Article shall apply
and shall control over any other provisions with which they conflict.
11.02 Determination of Top-Heavy Status
11.02-1 The Plan shall be top-heavy for a Plan Year if, as of the
determination date, the Plan's top-heavy percentage for the year exceeds sixty
(60) percent. The top-heavy percentage is the present value of accrued benefits
of all key employees as a percentage of the present value of accrued benefits of
all key and non-key employees other than former key employees. Individuals who
have not received any compensation from Employer during the five Plan Years
ending on the determination date shall not be taken into account.
11.02-3 The following plans of Employers and affiliates shall be
considered as one plan for determining top-heaviness:
(a) Any plan in which a key employee participates.
(b) Any plan that must be considered in order for a plan in
(a) to meet the minimum coverage requirements for qualification
under Internal Revenue Code Sections
401(a)(4) and 410.
11.02-4 "Key employee" and "non-key employee" are defined in Section
416(i) of the Internal Revenue Code.
11.02-5 For purposes of 11.02-1, the present value of a
participant's accrued benefit shall be determined as follows:
(a) The participant shall be regarded as terminating service
with 100 percent vesting on the valuation date described in (d).
(b) The benefit to be valued shall be that payable as of the
first Benefit Starting Date after normal retirement date.
(c) Rollovers and transfers shall be included or excluded as
provided in 11.02-6 and 11.02-7.
(d) The benefit shall be valued as of the most recent Plan
funding valuation date falling within the Plan Year in which the
determination date falls. The valuation shall be based on the Plan's
assumptions for determining equivalency of benefits except that the
interest rate shall be five (5) percent.
11.02-6 xcept as provided below, distributions and transfers made
within the Plan Year ending on the determination date or the four preceding Plan
Years shall be added back to the present value of accrued benefits as of the
determination date, unless already counted. The value of a distributed annuity
contract is its actuarial value as of the date of distribution. A transfer out
of this Plan, or distribution that is rolled over, shall not be added back if
either of the following applies:
(a) It goes to a plan maintained by an Employer or
an affiliate.
(b) It is not initiated by the employee.
11.02-7 A rollover or transfer accepted into this Plan before 1984
shall be included in the present value of accrued benefits. A rollover or
transfer accepted after 1983 shall be included only if either of the following
applies:
(a) It goes to a plan maintained by an Employer or an
affiliate.
(b) It is not initiated by the employee.
11.03 Top-Heavy Plan Restrictions
11.03-1 The following provisions shall apply, effective the first
day of the first Plan Year for which the Plan is top-heavy, and shall continue
in effect even if the Plan ceases to be top-heavy.
11.03-2 All benefits attributable to Employer contributions shall
be 100 percent vested if the participant satisfies both of the following
conditions:
(a) Has at least three Years of Service.
(b) Has an Hour of Service during a Plan Year for which the
Plan is top-heavy.
11.03-3 The minimum benefit attributable to Employer contributions
shall be the following:
(a) The participant's average W-2 compensation from Employer
during the five consecutive Years of Service of highest aggregate
compensation, time
(b) The lesser of the following:
(1) 2 percent of each Benefit Year.
(2) 20 percent.
11.03-4 Years of Service under 11.03-3 do not include the following:
(a) Plan Years for which the Plan is not top-heavy.
(b) Years of Service completed in a Plan Year beginning before
1984.
11.03-5 The minimum benefit under 11.03-3 shall be a single life
annuity with no ancillary benefits, commencing at the normal retirement Benefit
Starting Date. The minimum benefit shall be actuarially decreased if the actual
Benefit Starting Date is earlier than the normal retirement Benefit Starting
Date and actuarially increased if later.
11.03-3 The limitation in 6.06-7(d) shall be determined using 1.0 in
place of 1.25.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. has executed this
Plan this 31st day of December, 1998.
ATTEST: CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
/s/ Linda B. Vaughn By: /s/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- --------------------- -----------------------------------
APPENDIX A
TO
CENTURYTEL RETIREMENT PLAN
1991 ENHANCED EARLY RETIREMENT PROGRAM
FOR CENCOM EMPLOYEES
Enhanced early retirement benefits shall be paid from the CenturyTel Retirement
Plan (the Plan) to eligible participants under the 1991 Enhanced Early
Retirement Program for Cencom Employees (the Program) who terminate employment
within the prescribed period, as provided below. Terms used in this Appendix and
not defined in it shall have the same meaning as the Plan document.
1. Eligibility
-----------
1.1 Conditions. Benefits under the Program shall be available to all
individuals who are not excluded by 1.2 and satisfy the following conditions:
(a) Are employed by Cencom Inc. or Cencom of
Wisconsin, Inc. or have retired from such employment since
January 1, 1991.
(b) Attained age fifty (50) on or before December 31, 1991.
(c) Have five (5) or more Benefit Years by December 1, 1991.
1.2 Excluded Employees. An employee is excluded from participation
in the Program if the employee was previously retired under the Plan, was
rehired and continues to receive benefits based on the previous retirement.
1.3 Election to Participate. An individual who meets the conditions
in 1.1 may elect to participate in the Program by giving written notice on a
form prescribed by the Committee. To be effective, such form must be received by
the Committee no later than the first of the month following notification of
election. An individual who does not give such notice or who terminates
employment before the date fixed under 1.4 shall not receive the enhanced
benefits of the Program.
1.4 Retirement Date. November 1, 1991 is the estimated retirement
date for each eligible employee who has elected to participate in the Program
under 1.3 unless the Employer fixes a different date by notice to the employee.
A different retirement date shall be no later than December 31, 1991. An
eligible individual who has retired before the first general announcement of the
Program shall be treated as having retired on the date fixed by the Employer.
1.5 Other Termination Payments. The enhanced benefits provided under
the Program shall be in lieu of any severance, unemployment compensation or
other payments to which an individual is entitled as a result of termination of
employment. An election to participate in the Program by an individual who is
entitled to receive any such payments shall be a waiver of the payment
2. Benefit Enhancement.
--------------------
A participant in the Program shall receive enhanced early retirement
benefits from the Plan as provided below. Any enhancement that would exceed the
maximum benefit limits imposed by law shall be paid by the Employer outside the
Plan.
2.1 Commencement Before Age 55. A participant in the Program who is
under age 55 shall commence receiving early retirement benefits under the Plan
upon termination of employment as though the participant were age 55 or over.
2.2 Benefit Formula. A participant in the Program shall have a
normal retirement basic benefit equal to Benefit Years (BY) times 1.8 percent of
Final Average Pay (FAP) as follows:
BY x 1.8% x FAP
For the purpose of this Program, Final Average Pay shall be the participant's
Final Average Pay at December 31, 1990.
2.3 Five Additional Benefit Years. A participant in the program
shall have a normal retirement basic benefit calculated with the addition of
five (5) more Benefit Years than the number of Benefit Years otherwise credited
under the terms of the Plan.
2.4 Early Retirement Reduction. A participant in the program shall
receive the amount payable at normal retirement with no reduction for early
retirement to age 62; reduced three (3) percent per year for early retirement
before age 62.
2.5 Social Security Bridge. A participant in the Program shall be
paid an additional monthly benefit from the Plan equal to fifteen (15) percent
of the participant's monthly salary rate at the time of retirement, but no more
than $1,000 per month. The additional monthly benefit shall commence along with
the regular retirement benefit and shall be paid on the same monthly schedule.
The additional benefit shall terminate with the month prior to the first month
for which the participant is eligible to receive a Social Security retirement
benefit, or the month of the participant's death, if earlier.
3. Death of Participant.
--------------------
The surviving spouse of an eligible individual who has elected to
participate in the Program and who dies before the Benefit Starting Date shall
have a pre-retirement death benefit calculated without regard to the
enhancements provided by the Program. On a participant's death after the Benefit
Starting Date, death benefits shall be paid only in accordance with the form of
benefit elected by the participant.
APPENDIX B
TO
CENTURYTEL RETIREMENT PLAN
1991 ENHANCED EARLY RETIREMENT PROGRAM
FOR ALASCOM EMPLOYEES
Enhanced early retirement benefits shall be paid from the CenturyTel Retirement
Plan (the Plan) to eligible participants under the 1991 Enhanced Early
Retirement Program for Alascom Employees including Alascom engineering
department employees located in Vancouver, Washington (the Program) who
terminate employment within the prescribed period, as provided below. Terms used
in this Appendix and not defined in it shall have the same meaning as the Plan
document.
1. Eligibility
-----------
1.1 Conditions. Benefits under the Program shall be available to all
individuals who are not excluded by 1.2 and satisfy the following conditions:
(a) Are employed by Alascom, Inc. or have retired from such
employment since January 1, 1991.
(b) The employer shall fix the age of eligible employees by
notice to employees. The attained age as of December 31, 1991 shall
be the age for eligibility purposes. The employer shall not fix an
eligibility age of less than fifty (50) years as of December 31,
1991.
1.2 Excluded Employees. An employee is excluded from participation
in the Program if the employee was previously retired under the Plan, was
rehired and continues to receive benefits based on the previous retirement.
1.3 Election to Participate. An individual who meets the conditions
in 1.1 may elect to participate in the Program by giving written notice on a
form prescribed by the Committee. To be effective, such form must be received by
the Committee no later than December 27, 1991. An individual who does not give
such notice or who terminates employment before the date fixed under 1.4 shall
not receive the enhanced benefits of the Program.
1.4 Retirement Date. December 1, 1991 is the estimated retirement
date for each eligible employee who has elected to participate in the Program
under 1.3 unless the Employer fixes a different date by notice to the employee.
A different retirement date shall be no later than December 31, 1991. An
eligible individual who has retired before the first general announcement of the
Program shall be treated as having retired on the date fixed by the Employer.
1.5 Other Termination Payments. The enhanced benefits provided under
the Program shall be in lieu of any severance, unemployment compensation or
other payments to which an individual is entitled as a result of termination of
employment. An election to participate in the Program by an individual who is
entitled to receive any such payments shall be a waiver of the payment
2. Benefit Enhancement
-------------------
A participant in the Program shall receive enhanced early retirement
benefits from the Plan as provided below. Any enhancement that would exceed the
maximum benefit limits imposed by law shall be paid by the Employer outside the
Plan.
2.1 Commencement. Before Age 55. A participant in the Program who is
under age 55 shall commence receiving early retirement benefits under the Plan
upon termination of employment as though the participant were age 55 or over.
2.2 Benefit Formula. A participant in the Program shall have a
normal retirement basic benefit equal to Benefit Years (BY) times 1.8 percent of
Final Average Pay (FAP) as follows:
BY x 1.8% x FAP
For the purpose of this Program, Final Average Pay shall be the participant's
Final Average Pay at December 31, 1990.
2.3 Five Additional Benefit Years. A participant in the program
shall have a normal retirement basic benefit calculated with the addition of
five (5) more Benefit Years than the number of Benefit Years otherwise credited
under the terms of the Plan.
2.4 Early Retirement Reduction. A participant in the program shall
receive the amount payable at normal retirement with no reduction for early
retirement to age 62; reduced three (3) percent per year for early retirement
before age 62.
2.5 Social Security Bridge. A participant in the Program shall be
paid an additional monthly benefit from the Plan equal to fifteen (15) percent
of the participant's base pay as of September 1, 1991; the Social Security
Bridge shall not be less than $400 per month or greater than $1,000 pre month.
The additional monthly benefit shall commence along with the regular retirement
benefit and shall be paid on the same monthly schedule. The additional benefit
shall terminate with the month prior toe the first month for which the
participant is eligible to receive a Social Security retirement benefit, or the
month of the participant's death, if earlier.
The Social Security level income option in 6.09-3(d) of the Retirement Plan is
not available to participants who elect enhanced early retirement benefits
because the Social Security Bridge Benefit is provided in lieu of this option.
3. Death of Participant.
--------------------
The surviving spouse of an eligible individual who has elected to
participate in the Program and who dies before the Benefit Starting Date shall
have a pre-retirement death benefit calculated without regard to the
enhancements provided by the Program. On a participant's death after the Benefit
Starting Date, death benefits shall be paid only in accordance with the form of
benefit elected by the participant.
APPENDIX C
TO
CENTURYTEL RETIREMENT PLAN
1992 ENHANCED EARLY RETIREMENT PROGRAM
Enhanced early retirement benefits shall be paid from the CenturyTel Retirement
Plan (the Plan) to eligible participants under the 1992 Enhanced Early
Retirement Program (the Program) who terminates employment within the prescribed
period, as provided below. Terms used in this Appendix and not defined in it
shall have the same meaning as the Plan document.
1. Eligibility.
------------
1.1 Conditions. Benefits under the Program shall be available to all
individuals who are not excluded by 1.2, who are described in either (a) or (b)
below, and satisfy the minimum age requirement in (c) below:
(a) This paragraph includes individuals who on August 19, 1992
are employed in or serve as officer of the following organizations
or work locations or have returned from such employment since
January 1, 1992:
|X| Pacific Telecom, Inc.
|X| Pacific Telecom Cable
|X| Central Toll Investigation Department
|X| Inter-Island Telephone Company
|X| Peninsula Telecommunications, Inc.
|X| Tel Com Construction Company (exempt employees only)
|X| Telephone Utilities of Washington, Inc. (Long Beach only)
(b) This paragraph includes individuals whose
employment with Pacific Telecom, Inc. or Alascom, Inc. was
terminated between January 1, 1992 and September 1, 1992 as
a result of a reduction in force.
(c) The Company shall fix a minimum age requirement for each
organization or work location described in (a). Satisfaction of the
minimum age shall be based on the employee's attained age as of
December 31, 1992. The minimum ages are set forth below.
|X| Pacific Telecom, Inc. - Age 52
|X| Pacific Telecom Cable - Age 50
|X| Central Toll Investigation Department - Age 52
|X| Inter-Island Telephone Company - Age 55
|X| Peninsula Telecommunications, Inc. - Age 55
|X| Tel Com Construction Company (exempt employees only)
Age 52
|X| Telephone Utilities of Washington, Inc. (Long Beach only)
Age 55
1.2 Excluded Employees. An employee is excluded from participation
in the Program if the employee was previously retired under the Plan, was
rehired and continues to receive benefits based on the previous retirement.
1.3 Election to Participate. An individual who meets the conditions
in 1.1 may elect to participate in the Program by giving written notice on a
form prescribed by the Committee. An individual who does not give such notice or
who terminates employment before the date fixed under 1.4 shall not receive the
enhanced benefits of the Program.
To be effective, such form must be received by the Committee no
later than the following dates:
(a) October 19, 1992 shall be the due date unless (b), (c) or
(d) applies.
(b) An eligible individual who was not notified of the Program
by October 19, 1992 shall have until close of business on December
31, 1992 to elect to participate in the Program.
(c) An eligible individual who was notified of the Program but
did not elect to participate by October 19, 1992 may elect to do so
before close of business on April 16, 1993.
(d) An officer or employee of Pacific Telecom Cable who
becomes eligible as a result of reducing the eligibility age from 52
to 50 may elect to participate in the Program before close of
business on May 31, 1993.
1.4 Retirement Date. The retirement date for each eligible employee
who has elected to participate in the Program shall be December 1, 1992 if the
election is made pursuant to 1.3(a) or (b) and shall be June 1, 1993 if the
election is made pursuant to 1.3(c). However, the participant's Employer may fix
a different retirement date by notice to the employee, which shall be no later
than December 1, 1993. An eligible individual who has retired under 1.1(a) or
been terminated in a reduction in force under 1.1(b) before the first general
announcement of the Program shall be treated as having retired on December 1,
1992.
1.5 Other Termination Payments. The enhanced benefits provided under
the Program shall be in lieu of any severance, unemployment compensation or
other payments to which an individual is entitled as a result of termination of
employment. An election to participate in the Program by an individual who is
entitled to receive any such payment shall be a waiver of the payment. If an
eligible individual who has already received such payments elects to participate
in the Program, the individual's additional benefits under this Appendix shall
be offset in full by the amount of such payments until they are entirely
recovered. The individual then shall receive the full amount, free of offset.
2. Benefit Enhancement.
A participant in the Program shall receive enhanced early retirement
benefits from the Plan as provided below. Any enhancement that would exceed the
maximum benefit limits imposed by law shall be paid by the Employer outside the
Plan.
2.1 Commencement Before Age 55. A participant in the Program who is
under age 55 shall commence receiving early retirement benefits under the Plan
upon termination of employment as though the participant were age 55 or over.
2.2 Benefit Formula. A participant in the Program shall have a
normal retirement basic benefit equal to Benefit Years (BY) times 1.8 percent of
Final Average Pay (FAP) as follows:
BY x 1.8% x FAP
For the purpose of this Program, Final Average Pay shall be the participant's
Final Average Pay at December 31, 1991.
2.3 Five Additional Benefit Years. A participant in the program
shall have a normal retirement basic benefit calculated with the addition of
five (5) more Benefit Years than the number of Benefit Years otherwise credited
under the terms of the Plan.
2.4 Early Retirement Reduction. A participant in the program shall
receive the amount payable at normal retirement with no reduction for early
retirement to age 62; reduced three (3) percent per year for early retirement
before age 62.
2.5 Social Security Bridge. A participant in the Program shall be
paid an additional monthly benefit from the Plan equal to fifteen (15) percent
of the participant's base pay as of August 1, 1992; the Social Security Bridge
shall not be less than $400 per month or greater than $1,000 per month. The
additional monthly benefit shall commence along with the regular retirement
benefit and shall be paid on the same monthly schedule. The additional benefit
shall terminate with the month prior to the first month for which the
participant is eligible to receive a Social Security retirement benefit, or the
month of the participant's death, if earlier.
The Social Security level income option in 6.09-39d) of the Retirement Plan is
not available to participants who elect enhanced early retirement benefits
because the Social Security Bridge Benefit is provided in lieu of this option.
3. Death of Participant.
The surviving spouse of an eligible individual who has elected to
participate in the Program and who dies before the Benefit Starting Date shall
have a pre-retirement death benefit calculated without regard to the
enhancements provided by the Program. On a participant's death after the Benefit
Starting Date, death benefits shall be paid only in accordance with the form of
benefit elected by the participant.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE I....................................................................1
Effective Date; Qualification..........................................1
1.01 Effective Date; Plan Year..................................1
1.02 Qualification..............................................2
ARTICLE II...................................................................2
Application to the Company and Affiliates..............................2
2.01 Eligible Employers.........................................2
2.02 Service for Affiliates.....................................3
2.03 Adoption Procedure.........................................3
ARTICLE III..................................................................4
Eligibility and Service................................................4
3.01 Conditions of Eligibility..................................4
3.02 Service....................................................4
3.03 Break in Service...........................................6
3.04 Leaves of Absence..........................................7
3.05 Layoff.....................................................7
3.06 Benefit Years..............................................8
3.07 Short and Overlapping Computation Periods..................8
ARTICLE IV...................................................................9
Plan Administration....................................................9
4.01 Retirement Committee.......................................9
4.02 Committee Powers and Duties................................9
4.03 Claims Procedure..........................................10
4.04 Authority to Act for the Company or Employer..............11
4.05 Expenses..................................................11
ARTICLE V...................................................................11
Funding...............................................................11
5.01 Funding Policy............................................11
5.02 Contributions.............................................11
5.03 Reports to Committee......................................12
5.04 Trust Fund................................................12
ARTICLE VI..................................................................12
Retirement Benefits...................................................12
6.01 Eligibility; Retirement Dates.............................12
6.02 Normal Retirement Basic Benefit...........................12
6.03 Early Retirement..........................................16
6.04 Deferred Retirement Basic Benefit.........................17
6.05 Cost-of-Living Adjustment.................................18
6.06 ...........................................Limit on Benefits
18
6.07 Application for Benefits..................................20
6.08 Time of Payment...........................................21
6.09 Form of Retirement Benefit................................22
6.10 Limits on Time and Form of Payout.........................24
6.11 Death Benefit for Spouse..................................25
6.12 Disability................................................27
6.13 Reemployment After Retirement.............................28
ARTICLE VII.................................................................28
Benefits After Termination of Employment..............................28
7.01 Vesting of Benefits.......................................28
7.02 Accrued Benefit; Payment..................................29
7.03 Cash Settlement...........................................29
7.04 Forfeiture of Nonvested Retirement Benefits...............30
ARTICLE VIII................................................................31
Medical Benefits......................................................31
8.01 Eligibility...............................................31
8.02 Medical Benefits..........................................31
8.03 Separate Medical Benefits Account.........................32
8.04 Limitation on Contributions...............................32
8.05 Satisfaction of Liabilities...............................32
8.06 Forfeiture of Benefits....................................32
ARTICLE IX..................................................................32
Amendment and Termination.............................................32
9.01 Amendment.................................................32
9.02 Termination...............................................33
9.03 Treatment of Employers....................................33
9.04 Allocation of Assets on Termination.......................34
9.05 Merger....................................................34
ARTICLE X...................................................................35
General Provisions....................................................35
10.01 Information for Committee.................................35
10.02 Indemnity and Bonding.....................................35
10.03 Applicable Law............................................35
10.04 Plan Binding on All Parties...............................35
10.05 Not Contract of Employment................................36
10.06 Notices...................................................36
10.07 Benefits Not Assignable; Qualified Domestic
Relations Order ..........................................36
10.08 Designation of Beneficiary................................36
10.09 Actuarial Equivalency.....................................37
10.10 Nonreversion of Assets....................................37
10.11 Enhanced Early Retirement Programs........................38
ARTICLE XI..................................................................38
Special Top-Heavy Plan Rules..........................................38
11.01 Application of Rules......................................38
11.02 Determination of Top-Heavy Status.........................38
11.03 Top-Heavy Plan Restrictions...............................39
EXHIBIT 21
CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
SUBSIDIARIES OF THE REGISTRANT
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1998
State of
Subsidiary incorporation
Actel Corporation Louisiana
Brownsville Cellular Telephone Co., Inc. Delaware
Cascade Autovon Company Washington
Celutel of Biloxi, Inc. Delaware
Celutel, Inc. Delaware
Century Business Communications, LLC Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Alexandria, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Michigan RSA #4, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Michigan RSAs, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Mississippi RSA #2, Inc. Mississippi
Century Cellunet of Mississippi RSA #6, Inc. Mississippi
Century Cellunet of Mississippi RSA #7, Inc. Mississippi
Century Cellunet of North Arkansas, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Pine Bluff, LLC Arkansas
Century Cellunet of Saginaw, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of South Arkansas, Inc. Louisiana
Century Cellunet of Southern Michigan, Inc. Delaware
Century Cellunet of Texarkana, Inc. Louisiana
Century Color Graphics, LLC Louisiana
Century Interactive Communications, Inc. Louisiana
Century Interactive Fax, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Entertainment, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel Holdings, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Investments, LLC Louisiana
CenturyTel Long Distance, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Michigan Network, LLC Louisiana
CenturyTel Midwest - Michigan, Inc. Michigan
CenturyTel of Adamsville, Inc. Tennessee
CenturyTel of Arkansas, Inc. Arkansas
CenturyTel of Central Indiana, Inc. Indiana
CenturyTel of Central Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Chatham, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Chester, Inc. Iowa
CenturyTel of Claiborne, Inc. Tennessee
CenturyTel of Colorado, Inc. Colorado
CenturyTel of Cowiche, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel of Eagle, Inc. Colorado
CenturyTel of East Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Eastern Oregon, Inc. Oregon
CenturyTel of Evangeline, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Fairwater-Brandon-Alto, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Forestville, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Greater Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Idaho, Inc. Delaware
CenturyTel of Inter Island, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel of Lake Dallas, Inc. Texas
CenturyTel of Larsen-Readfield, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Michigan, Inc. Michigan
CenturyTel of Minnesota, Inc. Minnesota
CenturyTel of Monroe County, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Montana, Inc. Oregon
CenturyTel of Mountain Home, Inc. Arkansas
CenturyTel of North Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of North Mississippi, Inc. Mississippi
CenturyTel of Northern Michigan, Inc. Michigan
CenturyTel of Northern Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Northwest Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Northwest Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Odon, Inc. Indiana
CenturyTel of Ohio, Inc. Ohio
CenturyTel of Ooltewah-Collegedale, Inc. Tennessee
CenturyTel of Oregon, Inc. Oregon
CenturyTel of Port Aransas, Inc. Texas
CenturyTel of Postville, Inc. Iowa
CenturyTel of Redfield, Inc. Arkansas
CenturyTel of Ringgold, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of San Marcos, Inc. Texas
CenturyTel of South Arkansas, Inc. Arkansas
CenturyTel of Southeast Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of Southern Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Southwest Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel of the Gem State, Inc. Idaho
CenturyTel of the Midwest-Kendall, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of the Midwest-Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of the Northwest, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel of the Southwest, Inc. New Mexico
CenturyTel of Upper Michigan, Inc. Michigan
CenturyTel of Washington, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel of Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel of Wyoming, Inc. Wyoming
CenturyTel Paging, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Personal Access Network, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Security Systems, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Service Group, LLC Louisiana
CenturyTel Supply Group, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Telecom Service, Inc. Washington
CenturyTel Telecommunications, Inc. Texas
CenturyTel Telelink, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Wireless Louisiana, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel Wireless of Appleton-Oshkosh-Neenah MSA, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of La Crosse, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of North Louisiana, LLC Louisiana
CenturyTel Wireless of Shreveport, LLC Louisiana
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #1, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #10, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #2, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #3, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #6, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless of Wisconsin RSA #8, LLC Delaware
CenturyTel Wireless, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel/Area Long Lines, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel/Remote Access, Inc. Louisiana
CenturyTel/Tele-Max, Inc. Texas
CenturyTel/Teleview of Wisconsin, Inc. Wisconsin
CenturyTel/WORLDVOX, Inc. Oregon
Eau Claire Cellular, Inc. Colorado
Jackson Cellular Telephone Co., Inc. Delaware
MVI Corp. Oregon
North-West Cellular of Eau Claire, Inc. Wisconsin
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Alaska RSA #1, Inc. Alaska
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Alaska, Inc. Alaska
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Michigan RSA #1, Inc. Michigan
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Michigan RSA #2, Inc. Michigan
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Michigan, Inc. Michigan
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Oregon, Inc. Oregon
Pacific Telecom Cellular of Washington, Inc. Washington
Pacific Telecom Cellular, Inc. Wisconsin
Pacific Telecom of Alaska PCS, Inc. Alaska
Pascagoula Cellular Services, Inc. Mississippi
PTI Communications of Alaska, Inc. Alaska
Telephone Utilities of Alaska, Inc. Alaska
Telephone Utilities of the Northland, Inc. Alaska
The McAllen Cellular Telephone Co., Inc. Nevada
Certain of the Company's smaller subsidiaries have been intentionally
omitted from this exhibit pursuant to rules and regulations of the Securities
and Exchange Commission.
EXHIBIT 23
Independent Auditors' Consent
The Board of Directors
Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.:
We consent to incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements
(No.333-27165 and No. 333-42013) on Form S-3, the Registration Statements (No.
33-17113, No. 33-46562, No. 33-60061 and No. 333-67815) on Form S-8, the
Registration Statements (No. 33-31314 and No. 33-46473) on combined Form S-8 and
Form S-3, and the Registration Statements (No. 33-48956 and No. 333-17015) on
Form S-4 of Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. of our report dated January 28,
1999, except as to Note 21 which is as of February 23, 1999, relating to the
consolidated balance sheets of Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. and
subsidiaries as of December 31, 1998 and 1997, and the related consolidated
statements of income, comprehensive income, stockholders' equity, and cash flows
and related financial statement schedules for each of the years in the
three-year period ended December 31, 1998, which report appears in the December
31, 1998 annual report on Form 10-K of Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.
/s/ KPMG LLP
KPMG LLP
Shreveport, Louisiana
March 12, 1999
<TABLE> <S> <C>
<ARTICLE> 5
<LEGEND>
THIS SCHEDULE CONTAINS SUMMARY FINANCIAL INFORMATION EXTRACTED FROM THE
AUDITED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET OF CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
AND SUBSIDIARIES AS OF DECEMBER 31, 1998 AND THE RELATED AUDITED
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME FOR THE TWELVE MONTH PERIOD THEN ENDED AND
IS QUALIFIED IN ITS ENTIRETY BY REFERENCE TO SUCH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
</LEGEND>
<CIK> 0000018926
<NAME> CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
<MULTIPLIER> 1,000
<S> <C>
<PERIOD-TYPE> YEAR
<FISCAL-YEAR-END> DEC-31-1998
<PERIOD-START> JAN-01-1998
<PERIOD-END> DEC-31-1998
<CASH> 5,742
<SECURITIES> 0
<RECEIVABLES> 134,444
<ALLOWANCES> 4,155
<INVENTORY> 23,709
<CURRENT-ASSETS> 226,238
<PP&E> 4,289,658
<DEPRECIATION> 1,938,205
<TOTAL-ASSETS> 4,935,455
<CURRENT-LIABILITIES> 304,844
<BONDS> 2,558,000
0
8,106
<COMMON> 138,083
<OTHER-SE> 1,385,293
<TOTAL-LIABILITY-AND-EQUITY> 4,935,455
<SALES> 0
<TOTAL-REVENUES> 1,577,085
<CGS> 0
<TOTAL-COSTS> 1,097,274
<OTHER-EXPENSES> 0
<LOSS-PROVISION> 0
<INTEREST-EXPENSE> 167,552
<INCOME-PRETAX> 387,458
<INCOME-TAX> 158,701
<INCOME-CONTINUING> 228,757
<DISCONTINUED> 0
<EXTRAORDINARY> 0
<CHANGES> 0
<NET-INCOME> 228,757
<EPS-PRIMARY> 1.67 <F1>
<EPS-DILUTED> 1.64 <F1>
<FN>
<F1> Adjusted to reflect stock split effective in March 1999. Financial Data
Schedules for prior periods have not been restated to reflect such stock
split.
</FN>
</TABLE>
